SEPA
           United Stales
           Environmental Protection
           Agency
             National Training
             and Operational
             Technology Center
             Cincinnati OH 45268
EPA43O 1 80008
September 1980
            Water
Instructional Resources
Monograph  Series:

Activated Sludge
                          IRIS

-------
                               July, 1980
                 Monograph Series:
                 ACTIVATED SLUDGE
         Selected Instructional Activities
                   and References
      Clinton L. Shepard and James B. Walasek
            Compiled by the staff of the
       EPA Information Dissemination Project
         SMEAC Information Reference Center
            1200 Chambers Rd., 3rd Floor
               Columbus, Ohio  A3212
        U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
         Office of Water Program Operation
National Training and Operational Technology Center
              Cincinnati, Ohio  45268

-------
                                 FOREWORD


    The  National Training & Operational  Technology Center in cooperation  with
Ohio State University is offering an Instructional Resources Monograph Series.  The
monograph series is an extension of the information provided in the "Instructional
Resources Information System" (IRIS) for water quality.

    This document is one of the Instructional Resources Monograph Series. These
documents will assist the professional in identifying and locating instructional and
reference materials related to various  technical aspects of water quality  control.
Emphasis  is  given  to  items  useful in  the  development  and presentation  of
wastewater treatment training programs.

    Each monograph  reviews the technical aspects of a pollution control process,
provides  representative examples of available instructional materials, and includes
an annotated bibliography plus additional references.

    Your comments and suggestions regarding these publications are invited.
                                       Walter G. Gilbert
                                       Director
                                       NTOTC
                                       Cincinnati, Ohio
     This  monograph has  been reviewed  by the  U.S.  Environmental Protection
Agency and approved for publication.  Approval does not signify that the contents
necessarily  reflect  the views  and policies of the U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency, nor  does mention  of trade names of  commercial  products  constitute
endorsement of recommendation for use.

-------
                           ABOUT THE AUTHORS


    James B. Walasek is an Environmental Engineer in the Operational Technology
Branch  at the  U.S.  Environmental  Protection  Agency  National Training and
Operational Technology Center in Cincinnati, Ohio.  Mr. Walasek has extensive
experience in the operation of wastewater treatment facilities.

    Clinton L. Shepard is an Assistant Professor of Environmental Education in the
School of  Natural Resources at The Ohio State University.  Dr. Shepard teaches a
course in  Environmental  Education  Programs  and has  served as a Research
Associate   for  the  EPA  Information   Dissemination  Project  and  the  ERIC
Clearinghouse for Science, Mathematics and Environmental Education at The Ohio
State  University.
    Credits
    Primary   staff   work   for   this    publication   was   completed   by
    Ms. Beverly Malcolm, Dr. Robert W. Howe, and Mrs. Maxine Weingarth.

-------
                            PREFACE
     This monograph  contains a  variety  of selected materials
related  to  wastewater  treatment and  water quality education
and  instruction.  Part  I  presents a  brief discussion  of  the
activated sludge  process  in wastewater treatment  operations.
The  overlying premise  is  that  operator  training  is  a  vital
part of the operation of a wastewater  treatment  facility.  Also
included  in  this  section  are  procedures  to  illustrate  how
instructors   and  training   personnel   in   the   water   quality
control  field  can  locate  instructional   materials   to   meet
general or specific  program  requirements.

     Part II, Instructional Units,  are  selected portions  of
existing  programs which  may  be utilized  in  implementing  a
training  program  for the  activated  sludge process. Each  unit
has  been  selected  for  its  representativeness  to   training
level, subject area  and instructional  approach.  A reference to
the  source  where  the   unit  may  be  found  in more  detail  is
included. (A  list of additional  references  for  those materials
currently available  through  the Water Resources  Center,  ERIC,
and  IRIS systems is  found at the end  of Part  II.)

     It  is  hoped  that  the  instructors and  trainers  who  use
these  materials  will recognize that  the  instructional  units
herein serve  only as a  guide in selecting  appropriate  training
materials and should not be  considered a  fixed  structure.  It
is  recommended that instructors  check for  other activities
appropriate   for  use   or  to   adapt   for   use   in their  own
particular situation.

     For  further information about these materials contact:

              EPA Information Dissemination Project
                  1200 Chambers  Road,  3rd Floor
                     Columbus,  Ohio   A3212

                      Phone:  614-422-7853

-------
                       TABLE OF CONTENTS


Part I: The National Training and Technology Center
        and Selected Information Sources 	    1

Part II:  Instructional Units	13

Part III:  Abstracted Reference Materials	119

Part IV:  Reference Materials, Not Abstracted	165

-------
             PART I

    The National Training and
  Operational Technology Center
and Selected Information Sources

-------
             THE NATIONAL TRAINING AND OPERATIONAL
                       TECHNOLOGY CENTER
     The  entire  program  responsibility  for  water pollution
control training within the Environmental Protection Agency  is
assigned  to  the National Training  and  Operational Technology
Center (NTOTC), located at EPA's Environmental Research Center
in Cincinnati, Ohio.

     The   NTOTC  is   responsible   for   conducting   training
sessions,  developing  instructional  materials  and   courses,
providing  training  assistance,  operating   the  Instructional
Resources  Center,  and developing operational  technology. The
Center is  also responsible for  the management of  the Section
104(g) operator training  grant program,  the academic  training
grant program, other training grant and contract programs, and
related training activities.

     As an instructional  resource,  NTOTC's  purpose is to help
regions,    states,    local    governments,   and    educational
institutions  become  knowledgeable  about   the  Environmental
Protection  Agency's  goals,  regulations,  and  strategies,   as
well as the implications  of EPA  programs.

     Activities encompass three categories:  (1)  instruction;
(2) course development; and (3)  information  management.

Instruction

     NTOTC  offers  a  variety  of  training  courses  in   water
quality control.  Such courses are  taught  at  many locations,
but most are presented at the Environmental  Research Center  in
Cincinnati,  Ohio.  Area   training  centers  will  soon act   as
satellites to  the NTOTC  program, offering similar  courses and
instructional   support.    Select   universities    with   broad
pollution  control  curricula  will act  as area  training centers
within a region. As a result, more pollution control personnel
will have access to needed specialized training.

     Some  courses   are   conducted   at  wastewater  treatment
plants, enabling  USEPA  to work  directly  with  plant personnel
to improve treatment  plant  effluent.  While  working on site  at
treatment  plants,  staff   can  diagnose and  discuss particular
problems  and  provide information  on  design and operation  to
many technicians within the local region.

     Courses currently are offered in five general  categories:
wastewater treatment technology,  treatment facility evaluation
and  inspection,  water  quality  surveillance  and  monitoring,
water quality analysis, and drinking water quality monitoring.

-------
      Students  attend courses from  all  states,  and from  some
foreign countries.  The largest  percentage  represent federal,
state, and  municipal pollution control agencies. A relatively
small  number  of  college  and  university  instructors  attend
these short courses  which  are typically one  week in  length.
USEPA  encourages   more  participation   by  the  educational
community   so  that   current   skills  and   knowledge  will  be
transmitted  to students  to  enable them to deal with pollution
control  problems  as  they  enter  environmental   occupations.
Community   college   and   university  instructors  may  attend
courses  free of  charge  by following  prescribed application
procedures.

Course Development

     NTOTC  is  active in  the  field of course  development.  As
new educational and  training needs are identified, appropriate
instructional   packages   are   developed.  Almost   all   such
development   is   based   on   current  research   and  agency
regulations.  Materials  include  instructor   guides,   student
manuals  and  supporting  audiovisual  materials.  If   USEPA1S
pollution  control  training  programs  are  to  be  successfully
implemented,   college  and  university   staff  from   various
departments  must  cooperate and  integrate these  instructional
activities  within  their  curricula;   or  students  will  not  be
adequately  prepared,  either theoretically or practically.

Information Management

     The goal  of  USEPA's information management  system is  to
support,  in  a  comprehensive  and  systematic  manner, those
involved  with pollution control' education  and  training.  A
central  location within the  NTOTC  facility  is  designed  to
provide a  contact  point and to  coordinate  assistance  efforts
and  has  been  designated  the  Instructional  Resources Center
(IRC).

     Through  the  IRC, NTOTC  maintains  a central location  to
inventory,  evaluate,  catalog,  and  disseminate  instructional
materials  in  the  areas  of  water  pollution   control, water
supply,   and pesticides.  The   IRC  provides  those  involved  in
water  quality   control  education   and   training   with   an
information  management  system  and   acts   as   a   primary
communications  link  between   the  Environmental  Protection
Agency and  educators at all post-secondary levels. Activities
of IRC include:

                               IRIS

     The  focal  point of  the  IRC  is  the  Instructional
     Resources Information  System  (IRIS),  a  compilation
     of  abstracts   on   print   and  non-print  materials
     related   to   water  quality   and  water   resources
     education.  Obtainable  in   paper,   microfiche,  and
     computer versions,  the IRIS  contains more than 3,000

-------
entries  from local,  state,  and  federal  government
sources,  as  well  as   from   private   concerns   and
educational institutions. The system allows  the  user
to  discover  what  material  can  be  utilized,   the
title,  the author,  cross  references,  and  a brief
abstract describing the  content.  IRIS  users  can  also
readily   determine  where   the   material  can   be
obtained, whether  it  can be purchased,  borrowed,  or
rented,  and  the  cost.   The   IRIS  is  kept   current
through constant revision,  adding new  material as it
becomes     available     and    deleting     outdated
information.

   IRIS can  be  scanned for a particular  subject  or
author,   both   by   hand   and   by   computer.    Any
institution with  appropriate  computer  terminals  can
access the  search  and retrieval  capabilities of  the
system.
                  Audiovisual  Library

   The IRC facilities include  an  audiovisual library
equipped with  individual study  carrels for  viewing
movies,  videocassettes,  slide/tape   presentations,
filmstrips,  and tape  programs.  Before determining
curriculum   requirements   or   making   purchases,
educators  can  use  the  library to   review water
quality-oriented  materials  for  use   in  training
courses.

   Nearly   200   of  these  audiovisuals  are   also
available to instructors for  free, short-term loans.
Not  intended  as  self-instructional   units,  these
materials are meant to be used as  part  of  a  complete
training program. A catalog of audiovisual units  can
be obtained through the IRC.

                  Workshops

   The   center   also   conducts    a    variety    of
water-related  workshops  each  year.   Designed   for
state  and  local  agencies,  as  well  as college  and
university   educators,    these   seminars   enable
individuals to  become  familiar with USEPA developed
and  sponsored  resources,   descriptions of   ongoing
programs,  and  specific  instructional techniques.
Participants  also   assist   NTOTC  in  determining
instructional priorities.

-------
                         IRC Bulletin

        The IRC  maintains communications  with its users
     through  the IRC  Bulletin.  Published approximately
     six times a year and nailed  to interested parties at
     no charge, the Bulletin provides current news on IRC
     events.  It  also  includes  descriptions  of  model
     programs, current instructional materials available,
     and education  strategies.  Articles for the Bulletin
     are accepted  from various organizations, education
     institutions, and governmental agencies.

    Interested  persons  are  invited  to Cincinnati  to  use IRC
facilities  for  reviewing  tapes,  slides,  films,  and  other
materials   before   deciding   about  purchases  or  curriculum
development   requirements.   IRC  staff   assist   visitors   by
determining  the  most appropriate  ways  to  use  the  Center's
resources,  or  in  determining educational  and training program
requirements  and available  resources.  During  the past year,
universities   and   state   and   local   governments  have   been
assisted with curriculum  design, course  materials selection,
and audiovisual support efforts.

-------
                  THE INSTRUCTIONAL RESOURCES
                       INFORMATION SYSTEM
General Information about Materials in IRIS

     The  EPA   Information   Dissemination  Project   acquires,
reviews, indexes, and makes available both print and  non-print
materials   related   to   water 'quality  and  water   resources
education and instruction.

     Before materials are entered  into IRIS they are  reviewed
by the project staff. Availability of the material is  checked,
and  the  materials  are  abstracted  and indexed.  The  abstract
describes the contents of the material.

     When  items are  processed  they  are  entered  on the  IRIS
computer tape maintained  by  the  EPA Information Dissemination
Project at The Ohio State University. These tapes are  used for
producing tapes  for other information  systems, publications,
and  for   computer   searches   conducted  at  The  Ohio   State
University.

     Materials entered into the IRIS collection can  be located
by  manual  search  or  by  computer.  The  first  compilation
contains  resumes  of  selected  materials   processed  for  the
previous IRIS collection and  resumes of selected materials  of
items  added to  the  IRIS collection  during  1979.   Quarterly
updates of  the  IRIS compilation are available by  subscription
on a yearly basis.

     A number of  the  materials processed for  the IRIS  system
are entered into the ERIC system and announced  in Resources  in
Education  (RIE).  Most of the  materials announced in RIE  are
available on microfiche at various sites throughout  the  United
States.  Users  can  view  these  materials   on  site  at  many
locations to identify what they believe will be useful to them
at no cost.

Description of Information in Resumes in IRIS

     Two samples  of resumes  are provided to  explain the  data
fields in the resumes.  Sample  resume #1 is a sample  resume of
an item  not entered  in ERIC.  Sample resume  #2  is  a  sample
resume of  an item  entered  into ERIC;  a few  additional  data
elements are in these resumes and are explained.

-------
1.   Sample resume of materials not entered into ERIC

    a.  IRIS NUMBER: EW003059
    b.  PUBLICATION DATE:  1978
    c.  TITLE:  WATER POLLUTION MICROBIOLOGY, VOL. 2
    d.  PERSONAL AUTHOR: MITCHELL, RALPH
    e.  DESCRIPTOR:  BIOCHEMISTRY;  *COLLEGE  SCIENCE;  DISEASE
        CONTROL;    ECOLOGY;    *ENVIRONMENTAL     INFLUENCES;
        *INSTRUCTIONAL   MATERIALS;   *MICROBIOLOGY;   NATURAL
        RESOURCES;   *POLLUTION;   *PUBLIC   HEALTH;    *WATER
        POLLUTION CONTROL; WATER QUALITY
    f.  DESCRIPTIVE NOTE: 442P.
    g.  ABSTRACT:   THIS  VOLUME   CONTAINS   INFORMATION  FOR
        ENVIRONMENTAL  AND SANITARY  ENGINEERS,  PUBLIC  HEALTH
        SCIENTISTS  AND MICROBIOLOGISTS  CONCERNED  WITH WATER
        POLLUTION.  IT  EXAMINES  MICROORGANISMS  AS CAUSITIVE
        AGENTS  OF  ECOLOGICAL  AND  PUBLIC HEALTH  HAZARDS  IN
        NATURAL WATERS,  AND  TREATS THE USE OF MICROORGANISMS
        IN POLLUTION  CONTROL FROM A VARIETY OF PERSPECTIVES.
        (CS)
    h.  AVAILABILITY:   JOHN  WILEY  &  SONS,   ONE   WILEY  DR.,
        SOMERSET NJ_ 08873 ($24.95)

    a.  IRIS   NUMBER—this   is   the  identification   number
        sequentially   assigned   to  materials  as  they  are
        processed.  Gaps in numbers mean that some items  have
        been   deleted,   are  being   processed   to  add  new
        information,  or have been delayed  in processing for
        some reason.

    b.  PUBLICATION   DATE—date   material   was   published
        according to information on  the material.

    c.  TITLE

    d.  PERSONAL   AUTHOR—person  or   persons   who    wrote,
        compiled, or  edited  the material. Up to two personal
        authors can be  listed.

    e.  DESCRIPTOR—subject     terms    which    characterize
        substantive  contents  and  form  of the materials. The
        major  terms  are preceded by an  asterisk.  Terms  used
        to  index  all  resumes   in  this  compilation  can  be
        reviewed in the Subject Index.

    f.  DESCRIPTIVE NOTE—various  items of information  may  be
        contained  in this  section.  For  print  materials the
        number of pages  is usually listed.

-------
    g.  ABSTRACT—some early materials  entered into IRIS did
        not   have   abstract   information.    All   materials
        currently being entered into IRIS have an informative
        abstract that describes the contents of the item.

    h.  AVAILABILITY—information  in  this  field  indicates
        where the material  can be obtained and  the price of
        the material  quoted  the  last  time information was
        received  from the  source.  Please n»te:   prices  of
        nearly all materials  are  subject to changes  and may
        not  be   accurate at   the  time  a  person  orders  a
        specific item.
2.   Sample resume of material entered into ERIC
    (Resources in Education)

    Item entered into ERIC (Resources in Education)
    will have a few additional data fields.

        IRIS NUMBER: EW002998
    a.   ERIC NUMBER: ED151236
        PUBLICATION DATE:  SEP 77
        TITLE:   CHLORINATION.  TRAINING MODULE 2.300.2.77.
        INSTITUTION CODE:  BBB08399
        SPONSORING AGENCY  CODE:   BBB15379; FGK21436
        DESCRIPTOR:  *CHEMISTRY;   *INSTRUCTIONAL  MATERIALS;
        *POST  SECONDARY   EDUCATION;  SECONDARY   EDUCATION;
        *TEACHING  GUIDES;  *UNITS OF  STUDY;  WATER  POLLUTION
        CONTROL;  *CHLORINATION;  *WASTE WATER TREATMENT; WATER
        TREATMENT
    b.   EDRS  PRICE:  EDRS   PRICE  MF-$0.83  HC-$3.50  PLUS
        POSTAGE
        DESCRIPTIVE NOTE:  60P.   FOR  RELATED  DOCUMENTS,  SEE
        SE024 025-046
    c.   ISSUE:  RIEJUL78
        ABSTRACT:   THIS  DOCUMENT  IS  AN INSTRUCTIONAL  MODULE
        PACKAGE PREPARED  IN  OBJECTIVE FORM  FOR USE  BY  AN
        INSTRUCTOR FAMILIAR  WITH CHLORINE.  THE REASONS  FOR
        CHLORINATION AND  SAFE OPERATION  AND MAINTENANCE  OF
        GAS  CHLORINE, DRY CALCIUM,  HYPOCHLORITE AND  LIQUID
        SODIUM  HYPOCHLORITE  CHLORINATION  SYSTEMS  FOR  WATER
        SUPPLY  AND WASTEWATER TREATMENT FACILITIES  ARE GIVEN.
        INCLUDED  ARE OBJECTIVES,  INSTRUCTOR GUIDES,  STUDENT
        HANDOUTS-   AND   TRANSPARENCY   MASTERS.   THE   MODULE
        CONSIDERS   PURPOSES  OF  CHLORINATION,  PROPERTIES  OF
        CHLORINE,    METHODS    OF    CHLORINATION,     SAFETY,
        MAINTENANCE OF  CHLORINATION  UNITS  AND  INTERPRETATION
        OF TEST RESULTS.  (AUTHOR/RH)
    d.   INSTITUTION NAME:  KIRKWOOD  COMMUNITY  COLL.,  CEDAR
        RAPIDS,  IOWA.
        SPONSORING  AGENCY   NAME:   DEPARTMENT  OF   LABOR
        WASHINGTON, D.C.;  IOWA  STATE DEPT. OF  ENVIRONMENTAL
        QUALITY, DES MOINES.

-------
How to Locate Desired Materials  in  IRIS

     Users  can  identify materials of interest by  scanning  the
resume listing,  or using the  Subject  Index,  Author Index,  or
Institution Index  in the  IRIS  Compilation.

     The  Subject  Index  is  designed  to  enable  the  user  to
search for  information on either a  broad subject or a  narrow
information  concern.  An  EW  number  is  included  for each  item
listed under  the  subject  heading. The EW number refers  to  the
abstract   entry   in    the   resume   section   where   complete
bibliographic  information,  an   abstract  of  the  item,   and
availability  information  can be  found.

     A  user  can  also  coordinate   a  search  by  checking  EW
numbers  that  appear under  two or more  subject  headings.  For
example,  you  could  check  all   the EW  numbers  under  Water
Treatment  and all the  EW  numbers under  Films.  EW  numbers
included under both subject  headings would  include information
relevant to Water Treatment  that were films.  EW numbers  under
wastewater  treatment and  laboratory techniques would provide a
list  of  materials related  to  laboratory  techniques  and  to
wastewater  treatment.  Similar  techniques  could  be  used  to
identify other information desired.
    If  you desire  to  locate a  document  by  the  name  of  the
author, you  can  use the Author Index. EW  numbers  are  provided
under the  author  in the Author Index as in the  Subject  Index.
Some  documents do  not  have a  listed author. These  documents
are listed under the name  of  the  institution or  organization
responsible  for  developing the  document  in the  Institution
Index. Both sources  can  be  used  to help  you locate documents.

                         The ERIC System

     Another  excellent  source of  educational information  and
materials  is  the ERIC  system.  ERIC  is a  national information
system designed and  developed by the  U.S.  Office of Education,
and now supported  and  operated by  the  National  Institute  of
Education  (NIE),  for providing ready  access to descriptions  of
exemplary   programs,    research,    instructional   materials,
teaching  guides,  and  other related  information  that  can  be
used to develop effective educational programs.

-------
    There  are  16   clearinghouses   in  the  nationwide  ERIC
network.  Each clearinghouse has  responsibility  for collecting
and analyzing materials related to their scope.

     ADULT, CAREER, AND VOCATIONAL EDUCATION
     The Ohio State University
     Center for Vocational Education
     1960 Kenny Road
     Columbus, Ohio  43210
     (614) 486-3655

     COUNSELING AND PERSONNEL SERVICES
     University of Michigan
     School of Education Building, Rm. 2108
     Ann Arbor, Michigan  48109
     (313) 764-9492

     ELEMENTARY AND EARLY CHILDHOOD EDUCATION
     University of Illinois
     College of Education
     805 W. Pennsylvania
     Urbana, Illinois  61801
     (217) 333-1386

     EDUCATIONAL MANAGEMENT
     University of Oregon
     Eugene, Oregon  97403
     (503) 686-5043

     HANDICAPPED AND GIFTED CHILDREN
     Council for Exceptional Children
     1920 Association Drive
     Reston, Virginia  22091
     (703) 620-3660

     HIGHER EDUCATION
     George Washington University
     One Dupont Circle, Suite 630
     Washington, DC 20036
     (202) 296-2597

     INFORMATION RESOURCES
     Syracuse University
     School of Education
     Syracuse, New York  13210
     (315) 423-3640
                              10

-------
JUNIOR COLLEGES
University of California at Los Angeles
Powell Library, Room 96
Los Angeles, California 90024
      875-3931
LANGUAGES AND LINGUISTICS
3520 Prospect St. , N.W.
Washington, DC   20007
(202) 298-9292

READING AND COMMUNICATION SKILLS
National Council  of Teachers of English
1111 Kenyon Road
Urbana, Illinois  61801
(217) 328-3870

RURAL EDUCATION  AND SMALL SCHOOLS
New Mexico State  University
Box 3AP
Las Cruces, New  Mexico  88003
(505) 646-2623

SCIENCE, MATHEMATICS, AND ENVIRONMENTAL EDUCATION
The Ohio State University
1200 Chambers Road, Third Floor
Columbus, Ohio   43212
(614) 422-6717

SOCIAL STUDIES /SOCIAL SCIENCE EDUCATION
855 Broadway
Boulder, Colorado  80302
(303) 492-8434

TEACHER EDUCATION
American Association of Colleges for Teacher Education
One Dupont Circle, NW, Suite 616
Washington, DC   20036
(202) 293-7280

TESTS, MEASUREMENT, AND EVALUATION
Educational Testing Services
Princeton, New Jersey 08541
(609) 921-9000,  ext. 2176

URBAN EDUCATION
Box 40
Teachers College, Columbia University
525 W. 120th Street
New York, New York  10027
(212) 678-3437
                        11

-------
      PART II
INSTRUCTIONAL UNITS
         13

-------
                  THE ACTIVATED SLUDGE PROCESS
Activated Sludge

    Activated sludge may be defined as a biological  wastewater
treatment  process  in  which  a  mixture   of   wastewater  and
biological floe  (microorganisms)  is  mixed  and aerated  for  the
purpose  of  converting  non-settlable dissolved and  colloidal
material  to  a settleable  form.  The  biological  floe is  then
removed  from  the  treated  wastewater  by  sedimentation  and
returned to the process as needed or wasted.

    The activated sludge process  compresses, in both time  and
space,  aerobic  biological  reactions which occur naturally in
streams.  This  naturally  occuring   process  of  decay  may,
however, take several hours  or even days in a  receiving  water
and is  often accompanied by  undersirable effects such  as:  low
dissolved oxygen (DO), septicity, odors, deposition  of  solids,
etc. By concentrating the  proper  microorganisms, providing an
adequate  oxygen  supply, a settling  tank  to  concentrate  the
microorganisms  and  provisions  for  returning  them  to  the
process,  smaller  volumes  and  shorter detention times may be
used to complete the biological reactions.

    The  objective  of   the  activated   sludge  process   is   to
convert non-settleable  biodegradable pollutants  to  settleable
solids  thereby  producing  a  clarified  effluent  low in  total
suspended solids  (TSS)  and  biochemical oxygen demand  (BOD).
This is accomplished  by microorganisms  utilizing the  organic
material in the wastewater for both energy and  new  cell  mass.
Microorganisms, however, can use only  soluble  organics  which
readily pass through  their cell membrane.  Suspended particles
must first be absorbed  onto  the  surface of  the  bacterium cell
and then  broken  down by enzymes  before they can be absorbed
into  the  cell  and  metabolized.  The  biological   reactions
associated with  metabolism stabilize  the  waste  by  conversion
of  biodegradable organics to  new  cell  mass   and  the  waste
products  of  carbon  dioxide  (C02)  and   water  (t^O).   Both
sorption  reactions  require   intimate   contact  between  the
wastewater and  the activated  sludge. Adsorption takes  place
quickly and is usually  completed in 30  minutes or  less  while
absorption takes place much more slowly  (4-12 hours).

    Microorganisms  reproduce  by  a mechanism  known  as  binary
fission. If an unlimited  supply of  food  is available  and  the
proper  amount  of nutrients  are  available the  microorganisms
will reproduce at a very  rapid  rate.  This  is  called  the  log
growth  phase. Several factors  affect the rate  at which growth
occurs.  Among   these  are:  temperature,   pH,   type   of  food,
nutrients  present,  species   of   microorganisms,   and  toxic
substances.   The  growth  rate  decreases   as  food   becomes
limiting.  This phase  is known as  the  declining growth phase.
In the endogenous phase the energy requirement  (or that energy
energy  needed  to  maintain life functions  and  cell  integrity)
                               14

-------
exceeds  the  externally  available   food   source.  When   this
happens the  microorganism begins  to  break down  non-essential
intracellular components  in an  effort  to maintain vital  life
functions.

    The   activated  sludge   system   is   a  complex   aerobic
biological wastewater treatment  process  that  requires  diligent
and consistent process control to  maintain process  equilibrium
and final effluent quality. Numerous  techniques  and strategies
for managing these systems have  been  proposed and used.

Activated Sludge Processes

    A  typical  flow  schematic  for the  conventional activated
sludge  process  is  shown  in Figure 1.   The  aeration  basin
provides   space   for    contact  between   the   wastewater,
mlcrooganisms,  and  oxygen.  It  also provides  detention  time
which  allows  the microogranisms  to  assimilate  the   organic
materials in the wastewater. An  air  supply system (diffused  or
mechnical) supplies  oxygen  to keep the basin aerobic  and  also
provides  mixing  energy  to  keep the microorganisms dispersed
throughout the  tank.
   Influent
                  Aeration
                   Basin
                  Return Activated  Sludge
                                                  Waste Sludge
                 Figure  1  - CONVENTIONAL
    The  final  clarifier  follows   the  aeration  tank  in  the
conventional  activated  sludge  process.  This  unit  provides
space,  time  and  quiescent  flow  conditions  to  permit  the
suspended  solids to separate from  the mixed  liquor  to produce
a   clarified   supernatant   and   a  concentrated  blanket   of
activated  sludge solids.  Most  of  the settled solids  are then
returned  to the  aeration  tank. However,  since  the  activated
sludge  tends to accumulate  in the  system  a  portion of  the
clarifier  sludge must be removed from the  system and  "wasted"
to  the sludge handling  system for  treatment and  disposal. This
excess sludge is known  as  waste activated sludge.
                                15

-------
    Over  the years,  several  variations  of  this conventional
system have evolved,  the most  cowaon being:  tapered aeration,
step-feed, contact  stabilization, and  complete-mix activated
sludge. The tapered aeration process provides a  greater amount
of air at  the head end of  the aeration basin to help satisfy
the  greater   oxygen  demand that exists  there.  Less  air  is
supplied  at   the  outlet end  of  the  basin where most  of  the
oxygen demand has already been  satisfied.

    The  principle  of  step-aeration  is  to  distribute  the
incoming  wastewater  load  the  length  of the  aeration  basin.
Step-feed  (Figure  2)  would   probably  be  a   more  accurate
description  of  this  process   since  multiple  feed  locations
spread the oxygen demand over more of the basin  resulting in a
more efficient use of the oxygen.
   Influent
             1   I    i    I


Aeration
Basin


fcttluent
Fin
Clar
Return Activated Sludge
al
ifier I
                                               Waste Sludge
                 Figure 2 - STEP AERATION
    Contact-stabilization  (Figure  3) can be  thought of as  an
extreme  of  the step-aeration  process.  In this  variation  only
return  activated  sludge  would be  aerated  most  of  the  tank
length with the wastewater being added near  the  end.  There the
wastewater is mixed briefly with the activated sludge to allow
the organic waste to be adsorbed onto the biological floe.
                               16

-------
    Influent



,
Stabilization
Basin
Contact
Basin




Fir
Clai
Return Activated Sludge
httluent
tal
ifier
                                                 Waste Sludge
              Figure 3 - CONTACT STABILIZATION
The sludge is settled out in  the  clarifier  and  returned  to  the
stabilization tank where   it is  aerated  for a longer time  to
permit  the  bacteria to break down the adsorbed organics.  The
contact-stabilization  process offers  several advantages over
conventional activated  sludge including  reduced tank  volumes,
high sludge  inventories and  the  benefits  of  a sludge  buffer
during times of hydraulic overload.

    Complete  mix  (Figure  4)  activated  sludge provides some
protection against shock loads by dispersing the influent load
along the entire length of the aeration tank.
  Influent
f t
t 1
1 1
H
t 1
1 1
\ \
\ \
\
t
\
\
\
t
t
\
t
t
1
I
t
t
1
1
\
t
1
1





Final
Clarifier
Effluent

                 Return Activated Sludge
                                                Waste  Sludge
                   Figure 4 - COMPLETE MIX
                               17

-------
    The  process   flow  diagram  for   extended  aeration   is
essentially the same as that for conventional activated sludge
except these plants usually  have  no primary treatment and  the
aeration basin  is sized  for an  18-24 hour  detention period
rather  than  the  6-8  hour   period  common  for  conventional
plants.  The  long  aeration  period  and   high   sludge   age
associated with these plants produces  a nitrified effluent  and
a stable, rapidly settling, partially  digested  sludge.

    Another variation of the activated sludge process  which is
gaining  in popularity  in  the  U.S.  is  the  oxidation  ditch.
Originally developed  in Europe  it  is  essentially an  extended
aeration plant with a "race  track"  configuration. Surface type
aerators are used to  provide aeration and circulation  around
the ditch.

    Recently,  high-purity oxygen has  come  into widespread  use
as a  substitute  for  air  in the  activated sludge process.  To
prevent  the  loss  of  oxygen to  the atmosphere these  aeration
basins are usually covered and  the  oxygen recirculated through
several  stages.  Mixing is  accomplished  either  with  surface
mechanical aerators or  submerged  rotating spargers.  Because of
the   enhanced   oxygen  transfer  much  smaller  tanks   can  be
designed.

    The  purpose   of   the  final   clarifier  is  to  separate
activated   sludge  solids   from  the   liquid  stream   and   to
concentrate  these  solids  before  they   are  returned  to  the
process.  The  final  clarifier  may be  operated as a  solids
storage  reservoir or  with a  constant solids inventory.

    As discussed  earlier,  several factors affect  the activated
sludge  process.  Some  of the more  important factors  are:  the
microorganisms,   the   incoming   food,   temperature,   detention
time,  nutrients  and  toxic  substances.  The  operator  of  an
activated  sludge facility usually  has  direct  control of  the
recycle  rate,  the wasting rate and  the  air input.  In  addition
to these controllable variables the operator also has  limited
control   over   the   volume  under  aeration,   the  incoming
wastewater  (through  sewer use  control)  and  can use  chemical
additives for improved  settleability.

    Whatever  control  strategy  is used,  the  objectives  should
be to: control  the solids inventory,  control the distribution
of solids  between the clariifer and the aeration basin  and to
control  the  sludge aeration time.   Some  of  the  better  known
control  strategies are  based  on food to  microorganism  ratio
(F/M), mean cell  residence  time (MCRT), constant-mixed  liquor
suspended  solids, respiration  rate and sludge settleability.
There  is  no  universal  number for  these  parameters  that  will
work  for  every plant.  The  best value to  be used for  process
control must be  determined for  each plant  individually.  There
is also  no  single parameter which  will  tell the operator  the
complete story.   The  operator  must combine  information  from
several  parameters  to get the  complete  picture necessary  for
accurate process  control decisions.

                               18

-------
  SAMPLES OF ACTIVATED
SLUDGE TRAINING MATERIALS
            19

-------
Training Sample 1
"Process Start-Up Procedures"
Chapter 7, Lesson 4
Operation  of  Wastewater  Treatment  Plants;   A  Field  Study
Training Program
Kerri, K.  D.
Sacramento State College
Department of Civil Engineering
1970
General

    Procedures for  starting the activated  sludge process  are
outlined In this  lesson.  An initial average daily flow of  4.0
MGD will  be  assumed;  and  the plant  will  be operated as  a
conventional activated sludge  plant.

    Start-up   help   should  be  available   from  the   design
engineer,  vendors,  nearby  operators,  or  other  specialists.
During start-up  the equipment manufacturers should  be  present
to  be  sure that  any  equipment  breakdowns  are  not  caused  by
improper start-up procedures.

    The  operator may  have several  options in  the  choice  of
start-up procedures with regard to  number of  tanks used  and
procedures  to  establish a  suitable  working  culture   in  the
aeration  tanks.  The  method  described  in   this   lesson   is
recommended because it  provides the longest possible  aeration
time,  reduced chances  of  solids  washout,  and  provides  the
opportunity to use  most  of  the equipment  for a good  test  of
its  acceptability  and  workability  before  the  end  of  the
warranty.

First Day

    First, start  the air blowers and have air passing  through
the  diffusers before  primary effluent  is  admitted  to  the
aeration tanks.  This  prevents diffuser clogging  from  material
in the primary effluent.

    Fill both aeration  tanks to  the normal  operating  water
depth,  thus   allowing  the  aeration  equipment to  operate  at
maximum efficiency. Employing all  of  the  aeration  tanks will
provide the longest possible  aeration time. You  are trying  to
build up a population with a minimum amount  of seed  organisms,
and you will  need all  the aeration capacity available  to give
the organisms  a chance to reach  the settling stage.

    When both  aeration  tanks  have  been  filled,   begin  filling
the  two  secondary  clarlfiers.  Use  of   all   the   secondary
clarlfiers will provide  the longest possible detention  time  to
reduce  washout  of  light  solids  containing  rapidly  growing
organisms and will help  enhance  solids build-up.
                               20

-------
    When    the    secondary   clarlfiers   are    approximately
three-fourths  full,  start  the  clarifier  collector  mechanism
and  return  sludge pumps. Return sludge pumping rates must  be
adjusted to  rapidly  return the solids  (organisms) back  to  the
aeration  tanks.   The   solids  should  never   remain in   the
secondary clarifiers  longer than 1.5  hours.  Trouble also  may
develop if the return  sludge  pumping  rate  is  too high (greater
than 50% of  the  raw  waste-water flow), because  the  high flows
through the  clarifier  may not  allow sufficient  time  for  solids
to  settle   to  the  bottom  of  the  clarifier.  A  conventional
activated  sludge  plant  usually  operates  satisfactorily  at
return  sludge  rates  of  20 to  30  percent  of  raw  wastewater
flow,  but  the  rate  selected should  be  based  upon  returning
organisms  back  to  the  aerator  where  they  can  treat   the
incoming wastes.  A  thin sludge will  require a higher  return
percentage  than  a  thick  one.  Addition  of  a  coagulant  or
coagulant  aid  at  the   end  of  the  aeration  tank will  hasten
solids build-up and improve effluent  during  start-up.

    When  the secondary clarifiers become full  and begin  to
overflow, start  effluent chlorination to  disinfect  the plant
effluent.

    Filling  the aeration   tanks  and   aerating  the  wastewater
starts  the  activated  sludge  process.  The  aerobes  in   the
aeration  tank  have  food  and  are  now  being  supplied  with
oxygen;  consequently,   this  worker  population  will begin  to
increase.

    After two or  three hours  of aeration  you should  check  the
dissolved oxygen  (DO)  of  the aeration tanks,  to  determine  if
sufficient air is  being supplied.

    Check the DO at each  end  and at the middle  of  the aerator.
Oxygen must  be  available for  the aerobes  throughout  the tank.
If  the DO is less  than 2.0 mg/1,  increase the air  supply.  If
the  DO  is  greater  than  2.0  mg/1   the  air  supply  may  be
decreased,  but  not  to  the point  where  the tank would  stop
mixing. There will probably be an excess amount of DO at first
due  to  the   limited number  of  organisms  initially present  to
use it.

    The  effluent  end  of  the  aerator  should have a  dissolved
oxygen level of 2.0  mg/1.  DO  in the aerator  should  be checked
every two hours until  a pattern is  established.  Thereafter,  DO
should  be  checked as   frequently  as  needed to  maintain  the
desired DO  level.  Daily flow variations will create different
oxygen demands; and  until  these patterns  are  established,  it
is  not  known  whether  sufficient  or  excess   air   is  being
delivered  to the  aeration  tanks.  Frequently  excess  air  is
provided during  early mornings  when  the  inflow waste load  Is
low.  Air supply  may  be  too  low  during the  afternoon   and
evening hours because  the waste load  tends to  increase  during
the day.
                                21

-------
Second Day

    Collect   a   sample   from  the  aeration  tank  and  run  a
60-mlnute   settleability  test  using  a   1000  ml  graduated
cylinder. If  possible,  use  a 2000 ml cylinder with a five-inch
diameter in order  to  obtain better results. Observe the sludge
settling  in  the  sample  for approximately  one hour.  It  will
probably have the same  color as  the  primary  effluent during
the first few days.  After a few minutes  in the cylinder, very
fine particles will start forming with a light buff color. The
particles  remain  suspended,  not  settling,   similar  to  fine
particles  of  dust in a  light  beam.  After  an hour,  a  small
amount  of  these particles  may have  settled  to the  bottom of
the cylinder  to a  depth  of  10 or 20 ml, but  most  are still in
suspension. This  indicates  that you are making a  start toward
establishing  a  good  condition in  the  aeration  tank,  but  many
more particles are needed for  effective wastewater treatment.

Third through Fifth Days

    During  this  period of operation the  only controls applied
to the system usually consist  of  maintaining DO concentrations
in  the  system and maintaining proper sludge  return  rates.  A
sampling program  should be  started  to develop  and  record the
necessary data required  for further plant  control.

    Aeration  of  wastewater  to maintain  DO  will  require  some
time  before  settling  will  produce a  clear  liquid over  the
settled liquids. Time is required  for  organisms to grow to the
point where  there  are sufficient  numbers  to perform  the  work
needed—to  produce an activated  sludge. Usually  within  24 to
72 hours of aeration  you will note  that the  settleable solids
do  not  fall  through  the  liquid  quite  so  rapidly,   but  the
liquid remaining above  the  solids  is clearer.

    The active  solids (organisms)  are light  and  may wash out
of the clarifier to some extent. Hopefully you can retain most
of them, because a rapid solids build-up will not  occur unless
they are retained. A good  garden soil will  add organisms and
solids  particles  for  start-up.  Mix  the soil  with water  and
hose in the lighter  slurry, but try to  avoid a lot of grit.  A
truckload of  activated  sludge  from  a  neighboring  treatment
plant also will  help  to start the  process. Hopefully you will
not have  to  treat design  flows  during  plant  start-up.  More
time is  needed both  for aeration and clarification until you
have collected enough organisms in you return sludge to enable
you to produce a clear  effluent after  a short period of mixing
with the influent  followed  by  settling.

Sixth Day

    A  reasonably  clear  effluent  should  be  produced  by  the
sixth  day.  Solids build-up  in  the aeration  tank  should  be
closely checked  using  the  60-minute  settleable  solids  test
during  the  first  week.  Results  of  this  test  indicate  the


                             22

-------
flocculating,  settling,  and compacting characteristics  of  the
sludge. Suspended  solids build-up  is  very slow  at first  but
increases  as  the  waste  removal  efficiency  improves. This
build-up should be carefully measured  and  evaluated each day.

    To  obtain  an  indication  of  the  size  of  the  organism
population  in  the  aeration  tank,  the  solids  are  measured
either  in  mg/1 or in  pounds of  dry  solids.  Suspended  solids
determinations  for aerator mixed liquor will give  the desired
information  in mg/1,  and  the total  pounds of  solids may  be
calculated on  the basis  of  the size of the aerator.


c nj   IK' =  Suspended  Solids, mg/1 x Aerator  Volume,
oO-LlQS, X DS          0 „, -_  ,
                MG x 8.34 Ibs/gal
     The suspended  solids   test  conducted  on activated  sludge
plant  mixed  liquor is normally  a  grab sample  obtained  at  the
effluent end of the aerator. The  sample should  be collected at
the  same  time every  day,   preferably during  peak flows,  in
order  to make  day-to-day comparisons  of  the results.  Collect
the  mixed  liquor  sample   approximately  five  feet  from  the
effluent end of the  aeration tank and  1.5 to 2 feet  below  the
water  surface  to  insure  a  good sample. A  return  sludge  sample
also  should  be collected at this  time every day  to  determine
its concentration.

    With  information  from  the  lab  tests,  estimates of  the
organism mass  (weight) in  the  aerator  can  be  calculated.

Information Needed:

    1.  Aeration Tank  Dimensions

        100 ft long, 45  ft  wide,  and  16.5  ft  deep

    2.  Results of Laboratory  Tests

        Mixed  Liquor Suspended Solids, 780 mg/1

Steps  to calculate pounds  of solids in aeration tank:

    1.  Determine aeration  tank  volume.

        Aerator
        Volume, = Length,  ft x Width,  ft  x Depth, ft
        cu ft
                =  100  ft x  45  ft  x 16.5 ft

                = 74,250 cu ft
                                23

-------
    2.  Convert cu ft to gallons.

        Aerator
        Volume, = 74,250 cu ft x 7.48 gals/cu ft
        gals

                = 555,390 gals

        or      = 555,000 gals (approximately)

        or      = 0.55 MG

    3.   Calculate pounds of solids under aeration.

        Formula:

        Solids
        Ibs,    = Mixed Liquor Suspended Solids, mg/1 x
                  Aerator Volume, MG x 8.34 Ibs/gal

                =    780 mg     x 0.55 M Gals x 8.34 Ibs/gal
                  1,000,000 mg

                = 780 mg  x 0.55 M Gals x 8.34 Ibs/gal
                   M mg

                = 780 x 4.6* Ibs.

                = 3588 Ibs
*The factor  4.6  Ibs is equivalent  to  0.55 x 8.34, a constant
for your plant.  You will  use this value  every  day as long as
you use the  same aeration tank capacity.  Only a change in the
suspended  solids  concentration  will  cause a  change in  the
pounds of solids in  the aeration tank.
                              24

-------
    Close  observation  of  the  suspended  solids  build-up and
results  from the  60-minute  settleability  test  will  indicate
the  solids  growth  rate,  condition of  solids  in aerator, and
how much sludge  should  be  returned to insure proper return  of
the  organisms  to the aerator.  It  will  be necessary to  return
all  of  the  sludge  for   10  to  15  days  or   longer   if  the
wastewater  is weak.

    Results  from the 60-minute settleability test can  be  used
to estimate  if the  return  sludge  rate is too high or  too  low.
If the  volume of settle sludge in the  cylinder is  indicative
of amount  of sludge settling in  the  secondary clarifier, the
volume of return sludge should  be  equal  to  or  slightly greater
than  the   percentage   of  settling   sludge  in  the   cylinder
multiplied  by  the  sum of  the  primary effluent and the  return
sludge flows.

    Estimate the return sludge  pumping  rate.

Information needed:

     1.  Flow to  Aerator from Primary  Clarifier,  4.0 MGD

     2.  Return Sludge Flow, 1.0 MGD

     3.  Volume of Mixed Liquor  Solids Settled  in 60 Minutes,
         360 ml in  2 liters, or  18%

Example:

     Flow to Aerator from Primary  Clarifier = 4.0 MGD
     Return  Sludge  Flow  to  Aerator           = 1.0 MGD
     Total Flow through  Aerator              = 5. 0 MGD

Return Sludge
Rate, MGD    = Aerator Flow, MGD x  Settleable Solids, %

             =5.0 MGD x 0.18

             =0.9 MGD or 900,000  gals/day

Return Sludge
Rate, GPM    = 900,000 GPP
              1440  min/day

             = 625 GPM

     Therefore,  the  initally  selected  700  GPM  return  sludge
rate  is  acceptable at this time.  It  insures that most  solids
are  being  returned to  the  aeration  tank.  A  return  sludge
pumping rate slightly higher than  calculated is  recommended  to
return  the  organisms as fast as  possible to the aerator.  Too
high  a  return  sludge  rate   must   be  avoided  because  the
resulting high flows reduce  the detention time  in the aerator
and  secondary clarifier.
                               25

-------
    If  the  return  sludge  rate  is  too  low,  the  following
undesirable conditions may develop:

    1.  Insufficient organisms will be  in  the aerator to treat
        the  influent  waste  (food)  load. This  normally occurs
        during the first week or two  of start-up.

    2.  Too  long  a detention time  in the secondary clarifier
        could allow the sludge to become septic.

    3.  Accumulation of sludge in the clarifier creates a deep
        sludge blanket  which will allow  solids to  escape  in
        the effluent.
                                Questions

    1.  When  and  where should  solids  samples be  collected  to
        provide the  operator with a record of solids build-up
        in the aeration  tank?

    2.  Determine  the pounds   of  solids  in  an aeration  tank
        with  a volume of 0.25 MG and  a Mixed Liquor Suspended
        Solids (MLSS)  concentration of 640 mg/1.

    3.  Estimate  the return sludge  pumping rate  (GPM)  if  the
        plant inflow is  2.0 MGD and the return sludge flow  is
        0.5  MGD.  The  results  of  the  60-minute settleability
        test  indicate the volume of solids settled to be
        340 ml in 2  liters,  or 17%.

    4.  When  starting a  new activated  sludge  plant,  who might
        the  operator contact for assistance and advice?

    5.  When  starting the activated sludge process, why should
        you  use  all of  the  aerators and  all  of the  secondary
        clarifiers?

    6.  What  are  the  essential laboratory  tests  for starting
        the activated sludge process,  and why?
                               26

-------
Training Sample 2
"Interactions of Activated  Sludge with  other  Unit  Processes."
ACTIVATED SLUDGE PROCESS  CONTROL COURSE
GMP ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERS,  INC.,
1115 Terminal Tower
Cleveland, Ohio  44113
One  of  several  modules   contained within   the  whole  course
package.
LESSON TITLE:  Process Interaction
Estimated time:  One hour
Prerequisites  for  this  lesson:  Initial  certification  as  a
Wastewater Treatment Plant Operator

PERFORMANCE OPJECTIVES:

Trainees will  be able  to:
     1.  Identify the unit processes  contributing to the solids
        and BOD loading  in an  activated  sludge plant.

     2.  Identify  the  streams  that provide  an exit  for  sludge
        solids to  be removed from the plant.
JUSTIFICATION:

Operator  awareness  of  the  feedback  effect  of  the  sludge
handling  unit  processes  on activated sludge is important.

INSTRUCTIONAL  RESOURCES:

    Trainee Manual
    Slides and  other visuals

INSTRUCTOR ACTIVITIES:
    1.  Review and  organize  the  slides   and  audio  visuals.
        Point  out high concentrations  of  BOD and SS  in  these
        streams.  Assess  the  recycle  stream  contributions  to
        plant  solids  and BOD loadings, compared  to  raw sewage
        using  appropriate  visuals.

    2.  Review scenarios  of  wasted  sludge  getting  back  to
        Activated Sludge.  Use  visuals to show  the  limited
        possibilities   for   sludge   solids   to   be   actually
        removed.  If  the  solids can't be  removed  by  those
        routes,  then the  inventory  piles  up  in  the  plant  and
        interferes with  the Activated Sludge process.

    3.  Discuss  guidelines to  reduce  the  effects of  recycle
        streams on the activated sludge process.
                             27

-------
        a.  Avoid pumping  thin  sludges  to sludge handling unit
            processes.

        b.  Improve   efficiency   of   sludge  handling   unit
            processes.

        c.  Pretreat  recycle  streams to reduce the loadings.

        d.  Be sure to meter  and sample the actual influent to
            the  activated  sludge process,  after  all recycle
            streams from other  unit  processes have been added.

TRAINEE MANUAL SECTION

Introduction

    The   accompanying  Figure   1  shows   the  potential  for
interaction between activated sludge and other unit processes,
including  thickening,  stabilization   and  dewatering.  Places
where sludge solids can  truly be wasted in the plant are shown
by  arrows.  Direct wasting by  landfill disposal  or  export  to
another  plant  is  possible  only  in  a  few   plants.  Volatile
solids  reduction  in the  stabilization  process is  another
important  exit.  Dewatered  and  dried solids  are  the  two  best
ways for  sludge  handling unit processed to remove solids.

    If  the  sludge  handling  unit  processes  fail,   then  the
solids will inevitably  return to the wet stream and eventually
work  their way  out as  undesirable  solids  and organic loading
in  the  final effluent.  (A sample  scenario  is  included.)  But
there  are interactions,  even  when  the other  unit  processes
operate normally.

EFFECTS OF SLUDGE HANDLING UNIT PROCESSES ON ACTIVATED SLUDGE

    Sludge  handling  unit  processes can add  greatly to  the
loading   of   the Activated  Sludge  process  through  recycle
streams  that  contain high  concentration or  organics  and  high
solids.  Recycle  streams  (Table  1) of this   type  include  the
supernatants  from  anaerobic  digestion,  heat  treatment  or
aerobic   digestion;   the  centrate  from  centrifugation;  the
filtrate  from  vacuum  filtration;  and  the   supernatant  from
thickening.  Some of  these processes are run only one  or  two
shifts per day,  and not  every day.  So  the  way that the sludge
handling  unit  processes  are  operated  can  result   in  shock
loading  for the Activated Sludge  process,  depending on  how
they  spread  out  the  loads.  (Loadings  that  are  possible  with
some  of  the more  common  treatment  schemes  are shown  in  the
accompanying Tables.)

    The ideal  thing   for  overall  plant  efficiency  would  be  to
have  intermediate storage,  so  that   the  loadings  from  the
recycle streams  could be  programmed to  even out  the overall
daily loading  cycle   for  the  plant  influent.  Some new  plants
provide a separate treatment for the  heavily  loaded recycle
streams,   so  that  they  do  not   interfere with  the  activated
sludge process.
                                28

-------
                                       WHERE SLUDGE CAN BE WASTED
to
to
                                                 Figure 1

-------
                  TABLE  1 -  CHARACTERISTICS  OF RECYCLE STREAMS  (mg/liter)
                               TS
                                             SS
                                                          vss
                                                                        BOD
                                                                                      COD
    Anaerobic  Digestion
low rate
supernatant
high rate
supernatant
4,000-
5,000
10,000-
14 , 000
2,000-
3,000
4 , 000-
6,000
650-
3,000
2,400-
3,800
2,000-
3,500
6,000-
9,000
     Aerobic Digestion


          supernatant


     Heat Treated Sludge

          supernatant
100-
 20,000
               SO-
               11,500
 900-
 1,700
 5,000-
15,000
 230-
 8,100
10,000-
30,000
                             10,000
     Filtrate
                                          500-
                                            2,000
Reference: "Process Design Manual for Sludge Treatment and Disposal" U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency, Center for Environmental Research Information Technology Transfer
September 1979, EPA 625/1-79-011.                                                   '

-------
                        TABLE 2

    LOADINGS  OF RECYCLE STREAMS COMPARED TO RAW SEWAGE
            Conventional Activated Sludge Plant
                 With Anaerobic Digestion
                        BOD
              SS
                                                 Flow
Digester
Supernatant
Filtrate
10.1%
10.7%


 1.7%
continuous


    shifts
                                                1-2
                                                     day
Centrate
                                    13.0%
                         1-2
                shifts
                 day
                          31

-------
                          TABLE 3

    LOADINGS OF RECYCLE STREAMS COMPARED TO  RAW SEWAGE
            Conventional Activated Sludge Plant
                  With Aerobic Digestion
                        BOD
            SS
             Flow
Digester
Supernatant
1.7%
9.1%
continuous
Filtrate
           1.7%
           1-2
    shifts
     day
Centrate
          13.0%
           1-2
    shifts
     day
                           32

-------
                         TABLE 4

    LOADINGS OF RECYCLE STREAMS COMPARED TO RAW SEWAGE
            Conventional Activated Sludge Plant
                With Sludge Heat Treatment
                        BOD
            SS
            Flow
Heat
Treatment
Supernatant
48%
48%     continuous
Filtrate
           1.2%     1-2
            shifts
             day
Generate
           9.5%     1-2
            shifts
             day
                          33

-------
EFFECTS OF ACTIVATED SLUDGE  ON  OTHER UNIT PROCESSES

    Wasting  from the activated sludge process  has  a definite
effect on sludge handling unit processes.  If  the  waste sludge
is  too  thin (low RSC),  it  can cause hydraulic  overloading of
thickening  and  stabilization processes.  This will  eventually
come  back  to haunt the  activated  sludge,  in  the  form of high
solids and organic loadings  in  the  recycle streams.

    Problems  in  the  sludge  handling  unit  processes  can limit
your  freedom to  operate the Activated  Sludge  process  in the
best  way possible.  You may  be  forced to  accumulate  sludge in
the  activated sludge  process  even  when  it  is  desirable  to
waste,  because   the  sludge   handling   unit   processes   are
temporarily  unable to  take  additional   load.  For example,  a
digester failure may force you  to postpone scheduled wasting.

    Some  plants   do  not  have  sludge handling  facilities  on
site.  These  plants  waste  directly, either to  disposal  by
landfill or  by transfer to  another  plant via a force  main  or
tank  truck.  These  plants export  not only their  sludge,  but
also  the problems  due  to interactions of  the  activated sludge
process with other unit  processes.

SLUDGE QUALITY CONTROL

    How  can  you  account  for  the  loading  on  the  activated
sludge process due to the recycle  streams? The formulas  used
for sludge quality  control allow you to  do that.  For example,
AFI is the total influent  to the activated sludge  process, not
just  the  primary effluent.  You should monitor  that  stream  to
determine  its flow rate,   solids  concentration  and  diurnal
cycling.
                               34

-------
                  SCENARIO  FOR  SOLIDS  RECYCLE
            OR, WHEN  IS WASTING NOT  REALLY  WASTING?
    Assume that  the plant  operator  has  determined that wasting
is  really  the  only  way  the  plant  is  controlled  -  that
everything  else   relates   to   operation,   not   real  control.
Further  assume  that  he  has  established  a  wasting  scheme
consistent with  loading on the plant,  aeration capacity,  etc.
In the normal plant then,  all  that  should  remain is  to monitor
the flow  meters  and make  solids  analyses on the  waste sludge
to confirm that  the desired amount  has  actually been "wasted"."
Simple  enough,   and  accurate,  provided the  following  example
situation does not arise!

    In  many  plants,  particulary  smaller  plants with  limited
staff  and limited construction funds,  waste activated sludge
is directed  back to the head  of  the plant  to  be removed  and
blended with  the primary sludge for  subsequent processing.  If
plant  staffing allows  only  8  to 12  hours  per day coverage,  all
operational,  laboratory  and   maintenance  tasks  must  be  done
during this time,  including wasting.

    Unfortunately,   the wasting   period   coincides   with  the
highest flow  rates,  with the  result  that  solids  wasted to  the
primary clarifiers  are often carried through them with little
or  no  removal   of  the  waste  activated  sludge  solids.  These
solids then are  recycled back into  the  activated sludge system
to  be "wasted"  again  the  next day. However,  the  next  day's
wasting  will have to  include  this recycle  plus  the  waste
solids generated from  the  current  day's BOD and SS removals.

    Many  plants  are operated  by  wasting  a  constant  volume of
return activated sludge on a daily basis. In such a case,  the
excess recycle would not be wasted, and if control of MLTSS is
by return sludge pumping rate, these solids  will accumulate in
the  final clarifier.   Assume,  for  purposes of  illustration,
that  these  recycled "wasted"  solids occupy  approximately  one
foot  in  the  clarifier.  Then  for each  day  that  wasted solids
are in fact  merely  recycled   through the  system, one  foot  of
new sludge blanket develops in the  final  clarifier.  The return
slow  flow rates  could  be increased to  remove the blanket,  but
in  that  case the MLTSS  (and MCRT)  will  increase.   Thus,  two
days  "wasting" will produce a 2-foot  blanket; a week's recycle
produces  a  7-foot  blanket;   and   so  on, until aerators  and
clarifiers  are  both  filled  with  sludge.   At  which  point,
everything  else  being  constant,   the  final  clarifiers  will
"bulk."

    This, of  course,  is not  true  bulking  but is  merely  the
result  of the clarifier being  full of  solids which  have  no
place  to  go  other than over  the  final  effluent weirs.  The
reason  why   a true  bulking  sludge  is  washed  out  over  the
effluent  weirs  is related  to  the  inherent  properties of  the
sludge itself, not to  the  fact that the  tank  has  been filled
with solids thought to  have been wasted.

                                35

-------
    No amount  of  "blast wasting" through the primaries  during
high  flow  periods can  possibly be  effective  in  solving  the
problem  of  recycled  waste  activated  sludge. An  alternate
method  of   disposal,   perhaps   as   simple   as   wasting   during
periods  of  low flow,  must be  found.  Once  found,  it must  be
adhered  to  rigorously,  even after  the excessive ''circulating
inventory"  has been reduced to manageable levels.

    Similar scenarios  can be developed  for digesters,  decant
tanks, mechanical  dewatering devices, ash  classifiers,  etc.
The  point  to  be  made,  emphasized  and clearly understood  is
this:

        Solids are truly  wasted only  when  they or their
     residues  have  been  physically  removed  from  the
     plant,  with  no  connection  which  would  allow their
     being  recycled  back to the wet stream in any form.
     In  simpler   form:   Once  solids   in  any   form  have
     entered the  plant in  the  raw flow, there are only
     two  places  they can  go:  Out  the gate or into  the
     river.
                               36

-------
Training Sample 3
"Problems Caused by Industrial Waste1'
BASIC SEWAGE TREATMENT OPERATION
Topic 5
Ministry of the Environment
Toronto, Canada
1978
SUBJECT:  1 - Sewage Treatment Operation

TOPIC: 5 - Problems Caused  by Industrial  Waste

OBJECTIVES: The  trainee will be  able  to

     1.  List 8 features of  a sewer-use by-law.

     2.  List  7  causes  of problems  at  the treatment plant  due
        to industrial wastes.

     3.   List 6  possible  causes of  problems in sewers due  to
        industrial wastes.

PROBLEMS  CAUSED  BY  INDUSTRIAL  WASTES IN   SEWERS  AND SEWAGE
PLANTS

General

     Most sewage  treatment plants have  experienced  the  problems
that  can  be  caused by industrial  wastes. In fact,  life  would
be  very simple  if it  were not for  the occasional slugs  of
grease  that  send  personnel  scurrying for  skimming  buckets.
Plant  operation  is easy under ideal operating  conditions,  but
foresight and Ingenuity are required  to prevent problems, such
as  those  resulting from  industrial wastes, without  upsetting
the  entire plant.

Sewer-use by-law

     To control the quality  of the  waste flows being discharged
to   the  sanitary  system,  a  municipality  usually  enacts  a
sewer—use  by-law,  based  on a model  by-law published  by  the
Ontario Ministry of  the Environment. If  the industries comply
with  this by-law,  there should be  no  problems in the sewers  or
at the plant. The  important features  of such a  by-law are that
discharges must  comply with certain standards for

     1.  Temperature

     2.  pH

     3.  Organic  loading as  measured by the  5-day biochemical
        oxygen demand (BOD-5)

     4.  Suspended  solids


                                37

-------
    5.  Toxic materials such as

        a.  cyanide as HCN
        b.  phenols
        c.  sulphides as H~S
        d.  metals

    6.  Oils and greases or those substances  soluble  in ether

        a.  of mineral origin
        b.  of animal or vegetable origin

    7.  There must be insignificant amounts of  explosive,
        inflammable and/or radioactive materials  present.

    8.  Flow volumes must  not  result  in hydraulic  overloading
        of the system.

    The effect  of  any one industrial  discharge on the entire
sewage flow  will depend  on  their  relative  volumes.  As  most
industrial  wastes   can  be treated  with  domestic  sewage  in
municipality  treatment  plants,   it   may  be   possible  for  a
municipality  to  accept  and  treat  wastes  that  do not  comply
with  the  by-law  limits without  upsetting the operation of  the
sewage treatment plant.  The  municipality may  wish  to  supply
this  additional service   at  no  extra  charge,  or  they  may
require a special  agreement with  the industry and additional
money  for this  service.  Normally,  there is  a  section  in  the
by-law that  provides  for  this  agreement.  In  order   that  the
municipality  may   decide  how   to  handle   any  particular
situation,  they  must  know the  probable effect  of  any  waste
flow  on their sewers and sewage treatment plant.

An Industrial Point of View

    An industry views the  treatment and  disposal  of its wastes
as a  matter of economics.  It expects and deserves  treatment of
flows  within the  by-law  limits   for  the  normal  sewer  rate
charge.  If  the  municipality  will accept  a higher  strength
waste  for a  sum  less than that needed  to  pretreat the wastes
to by-law limits, it  is  good  business for the  industry to use
this  method  of  disposal.  Many times,  the  full strength  waste
cannot be treated at the municipal plant. It  is then  up to the
industry  to  pretreat  to  a level  which is  acceptable  to  the
municipality. It is  quite  often easier  to remove  contaminants
from  a waste flow at  the  source within the industry,  and this
should be done where possible.
                                38

-------
POSSIBLE PROBLEMS

Sewers

    The  problems  that may be anticipated in  sewers  from  flows
not in compliance with sewer—use  by-laws  may  be  outlined  under
the following headings:

    1.   Flows - Excessively  fluctuating  flows may overload the
         hydraulic capacity  of  a sewer and cause  backing  up  of
         sewage  into   basements,   or   overflowing  at   pumping
         stations.

    2.   Temperature  - The higher the temperature  of  a  waste
         discharge,  the greater the biological activity in the
         sewer  (rate  doubles  for  every  10° C  rise).  Thus  the
         oxygen   supply   is   quickly  depleted   and  septic
         conditions  occur.  Also,   high  temperatures  speed  up
         corrosion  and  place  thermal stresses   on  the  sewer
         pipes and joints.

    3.   Suspended Solids  -  May settle in the  sewers and  cause
         blockage.

    4.   pH - Variance beyond the  acceptable  limits  will result
         in corrosion  of the  sewer.

    5.   Oils and  greases  will  build  up  on  the  inside of  the
         lines and reduce  the sewer capacity.

    6.   Dissolved   Salts   -   Certain   dissolved  salts   may
         precipitate  out  in  the  sewers and  lead to blockages
         and/or corroding  conditions.
Sewage Treatment Plant

    More important, however,  is  the  effect  of  industrial  waste
discharges  on the  operation  of  the  sewage  treatment  plant.
First  the   symptoms  must  be  recognized;   then  the  type  and
extent of  the problem diagnosed  and  the effect it will  have,
or  has  had,   on  the  various  processes   must  be   assessed.
Finally,  and  most  important, quick  remedial  action must  be
taken  to   offset   the   changing  conditions.  Following   are
comments on characteristics of industrial waste discharges  of
concern  to a sewage  plant  operator,  and  relating  to  the
detection  and  effect  on  the  (a)  primary  section  and  (b)
biological  processes, as well as the  corrective  action to  be
taken.

    1.  Flow  -  Excessive  or  surging  flow conditions  may  be
        noted on the  flow measuring devices  within  the  plant
        or simply by noting  the  level  of the  flow  on  the  walls
        of  the  channels. High flow rates  tend  to  flush  the
        tanks out,  thus  affecting the detention times  and  the
                                39

-------
    treatment provided.  Little can  be done  to  ease  this
    condition at the sewage plant; it  should be corrected
    at the industry where the flows may be equalized.

2.  Temperature  -  The   rate  of   biological   activity
    increases with temperature  in a  waste  flow  and  the
    resulting septic conditions  may  be noted by the  smell
    and low dissolved oxygen  content  of  the  raw sewage  at
    the plant. A septic sewage will cause septicity in the
    primary  clarifiers  and  exert  an  increased  oxygen
    demand in the secondary biological section. The action
    required  in this   case   would be to   pre-aerate  or
    pre-chlorinate the raw sewage flow.

3.  pH - A  waste with a pH value  outside of the accepted
    range (6.5 - 8.5), besides creating corrosive problems
    throughout the plant, will tend to reduce the settling
    and biological processes.  This condition may be  noted
    by checking  the waste  flow with  pH  paper  at regular
    intervals. Again, little  can be done at  the plant.  The
    situation should  be corrected by  having the industry
    neutralize its wastes before discharge.

4.  Organic Loading (Biochemical Oxygen Demand - BOD)
    High  strength  industrial  discharges  will show  up  in
    the  5-day  BOD  test,   but  this   does   not  help  the
    operating    personnel     concerned    with   operating
    conditions at  any  given  moment.   These  high strength
    wastes  can  usually  be  spotted  by an  unusual colour
    (eg.  red; indicating  blood,  dye,   etc.),  smell  (eg.  a
    putrid smell because  of  the rapid depletion of oxygen
    in the  sewer  lines) or  the  inclusion  of  tell-tale
    solids (feathers, hair, etc.). If  the high strength is
    due  mainly   to  dissolved components,   it  will   have
    little  effect  on  the primary treatment  process  but
    will create  a  high  oxygen demand and  extreme sludge
    growth  in  the  secondary  biological  section.   If  a
    significant amount  of  suspended material  is included
    in the  high  strength waste,  additional  quantities  of
    sludge will  accumulate  in  the primary  tanks  and  the
    digesters may  be  taxed  beyond  capacity.  The action
    that  should be   taken  at   the  plant   would  include
    carrying  a  higher  concentration of  solids  and air  in
    the  aeration  section  and  the  possible addition  of
    alkaline  materials   to   the  digesters  as  well  as
    additional  hauling  of   digested  sludge  so  that   a
    correct   environment   may   be  maintained   for   the
    anaerobic decomposition process.
                           40

-------
    5.  Suspended  Solids -  This characteristic  of the  waste
        flow is one  of  the  most recognizable. Usually a  close
        examination  with the  naked  eye  will  reveal unusual
        conditions  which should  be  taken into  account.  The
        majority  of  the particles in suspension  should  settle
        out in  the  primary  settling tanks. While most will  be
        controllable  by  anaerobic  treatment,  some  particles
        such  as  clay,   chicken  beaks,  hair  and   bark  will
        decompose   very  slowly,  using   additional   digester
        capacity. Adjustment in digester operation as well  as
        cleaning  of  the  digesters may be  required  if  these
        solids  are  allowed to  get  through  the  preliminary
        screening devices.

    6.  Toxic  Materials  -  Toxic  materials  such  as  copper,
        chromium, phenols,  etc., may  be difficult to  detect  in
        the   raw   sewage   if   they   are   present   in   low
        concentrations.  Should  either the  aerobic or  anaerobic
        biological   section  be  upset,   however,   laboratory
        analysis  is  required to confirm any  suspicion in this
        regard. Higher  solids could be  carried  in the  aeration
        section to help in  preventing an upset.

    7.  Oils and  Greases -  These ether  soluble materials will
        usually  come  to the  surface  in  the  grit tanks  and
        primary clarifiers,  making  their  presence  obvious.  If
        they  can be  skimmed,  either by means  of  the  regular
        skimming   facilities  or  manually,  these materials
        should  be of  little  concern.

 Note:  In  most cases,  sophisticated laboratory equipment  is
        not a  necessary part of  good sewage plant  operation.
        More important  is the ability of the  operator  to adapt
        his  thinking to  the situation at  hand and  to  take
        proper  remedial action.
    Resourceful  plant .personnel  will  not  only  provide  good
plant operation, but  will  also  note  the  time and  conditions  of
any  upsets  at  the  plant.  An  attempt  should  be  made  to
determine  the  section  of the  sewer  system  from  which  the
upsetting discharge  came and  to define as closely as  possible
the  problem   industry.   Armed  with  this   information,   the
municipal  officials,  after investigating  conditions  at  the
industries in  the  area,  should be  able  to  locate the  culprit
and thus be in a position  to enforce  their sewer-use by-law.
                               41

-------
Training Sample 4
"Activat-ed Sludge Process Control: Phosphorus Removal"
ACTIVATED SLUDGE PROCESS WORKSHOP MANUAL
Topic 6
Ministry of the Environment
Toronto, Canada
1978
SUBJECT:  Activated Sludge Process Control

TOPIC:  6 - Phosphorus Removal

OBJECTIVES:  The trainee will be able  to

    1.  Name three chemicals suitable  for phosphorus  removal.

    2.  Recall three possible application points  for  chemicals
        used in phosphorus removal.

    3.  List  the  effects  that  phosphorus  removal  chemicals
        have on the raw sludge concentration and  the  operation
        of anaerobic digesters.

    4.  Calculate   the   feed  rate   for   chemicals   used   in
        phosphorus removal.

    5.  Recall  five  means  by  which the  operator can  control
        the phosphorus removal process.


PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

General

    In  recent  years  the  phosphates   in  wastewater  treatment
plant effluents  have  been  identified as a major  factor in  the
eutrophication  (rapid  aging) of  receiving  waters.  Industrial
waste discharges  and run-off also contribute  to  this problem.
Excessive  amounts of  nutrients  (phosphorus,  nitrogen,  etc.)
can cause  the  rapid  gowth  of algae and weeds.  Algae  and weeds
will  settle  to  the bottom, decompose  and use  up  the  dissolved
oxygen  causing  the  destruction  of   the  life  cycle  systems
normally found in  unpolluted lakes,  rivers  and streams.

    Because  it  is a major cause  of eutrofication  and present
technology  provides  a means  to control it,  phosphorus was  the
nutrient  selected to  be  removed  from plant effluents  being
discharged  into  Lake Erie,  Lake  Ontario,  the  Ottawa  River
system,  and  inland  recreational   aras.   Phosphorus  removal
facilities  have  been  installed  in  a number  of  wastewater
treatment  plants  and  future  years   will  see  an  increasing
number.
                               42

-------
    There  are  a  number of  ways  to  remove  phosphorus. These
include  reverse  osmosis,   adsorption,   ion    exchange  and
chemical    precipitation.    Chemical    precipitation   using
commerically available chemicals  is  the least  costly,   both
from capital and  operating  costs,  and is the system of choice
in Ontario. It is the method discussed in this  topic.

Source of Phosphorus

    Phosphorus in the  plant influent  comes  in  many forms.  It
consists   of   organic   phosphorus  from  food  and   wastes,
polyphosphates     from     detergents,     and    precipitated
orthophosphate from chemical reactions  between metal  ions  in
the wastewater and  dissolved orthophosphates.

    The  concentration  of  the phosphorus  in  the wastewater  is
measured as:

    1.   Total phosphorus which  includes  all  forms of
         phosphorus  as  mg/1  P.

    2.   Soluble,  reactive phosphates  as  mg/1 P.

    Because  of   the   complexity   of  the   test  required  to
determine  phosphorus   in  the influent  or effluent, the  tests
are normally done by  the Ministry Laboratories. The  procedure
is outlined in Topic 15 of  this manual.

Mechanism  of Removal

    The  mechanism  of  phosphorus  removal is a  combination  of
chemical and physical reactions  which  include the  chemical
precipitation of  the soluble,  reactive phosphates  by the  metal
ions  (Ca+2,  Fe+3, Al+3) introduced. Other important  reactions
are   the   formation   of    metal   hydroxides   which   adsorb
non-reactive  phosphates  and  trap  finely  suspended  material
containing  phosphates  bound to  organic matter.  Sufficient  time
for  flocculation and  sedimentation of  this combined  floe  is
needed  to  produce an effluent  with  the  desired low phosphorus
concentration  (<1.0 mg/1   P).  Good  mixing  at the  point  of
chemical addition is  also  important.  Rapid  mixing  followed  by
slow, gentle mixing before  sedimentation will produce the  best
results. Sufficient clarifier  (primary or secondary) detention
time  (over  2 hours) and low upflow rates «800 gal/day/ft  )  at
peak  flows are  also  needed to achieve  good clarification  if
chemicals  are added for phosphorus  removal.

Chemicals  Used

    Jar  tests and possibly full scale pilot  studies  should  be
conducted  before the  best  suitable chemical is selected. The
following  commercially available  chemicals  are normally  used
for phosphorus removal.
                                43

-------
    1.  Ferric Chloride     Fed

    2.  Ferrous Chloride    Fed  (waste pickle  liquor)

    3.  Ferrous Sulphate    FeSO, (waste pickle  liquor)

    4.  Alum                A12(S04)3.14 H20

    5.  Hydrated Lime       Ca(OH)
    Of the chemicals  listed  above,  alum,  ferric chloride,  and
hydrated  lime  are most  widely  used  although  waste  pickle
liquor  is gaining in  popularity  since  a  substantial  cost
saving  can be  realized.  Waste  pickle liquor  should only  be
usedin  secondary  treatment   plants,   because  the   2-valent
(ferrous)  iron has to  be  oxidized to  the 3-valent  (ferric)
iron in order to precipitate phosphates. To provide  sufficient
time and  oxygen for oxidation,  the  point of addition  of  waste
pickle liquor should be the influent end of the aeration tank.
Handling,  storage, bulk  delivery,  etc., are similar  to  ferric
chloride.

Ferric Chloride

    Ferric  chloride  is   normally  used  in  the   liquid  form
although  it  is  available   in  the  dry  form  in  drums.  The
reddish-brown  liquid  is   corrosive  and stains  concrete.  With
proper dilution, fairly low temperatures can be tolerated.  For
outside  storage  in  Ontario,  heated,   fibre-glass  reinforced
plastic storage tanks should be used.  All other equipment used
(pumps,  feed  lines,etc. ) should  be  heat treated  and able  to
handle  corrosive  liquids  since  commercial  ferric  chloride
solution  (and pickle liquor) contains  strong acid. The acid in
solution  and  the  acid produced when ferric chloride  is  added
is   normally   neutralized  by   natural  alkalinity  in   the
wastewater.  Additional  alkalinity   (lime,   caustic  soda)  may
have  to  be  added  to wastewaters  with  low  alkalinity.  The
ferric  chloride  can be added  to either  raw sewage or  in the
secondary  section. Experience  indicates that the  latter  point
of  addition  yields better results  at  lower costs.  The  ferric
ions  (Fe+3)   combine  with  the  orthophosphate  to  produce  a
precipitate  (iron  phosphate)  and  with  the hydroxyl ion  to
produce a floe  (ferric hydroxide).

Alum

    Alum  is  easier to handle  than lime  and is somewhat  less
corrosive  than ferric  chloride.  It  is  usually  purchased  in
liquid form, although it  can be procured in 100 Ib bags  in dry
form. The aluminum ions (Al+3) combine with the orthophosphate
to  form  a  precipitate   (aluminum  phosphate) and   with  the
hydroxyl   ions   in  the  water   to  form   a  floe   (aluminum
hydroxide).  It  also produces  an acid  (sulphuric acid)  which
may  be  neutralized by the  alkalinity  available in  the  sewage
or by added alkalinity.

                                44

-------
    Alum  is  delivered  and  stored  in  liquid  form  and as  for
ferric chloride,  involves a large  capital outlay for  storage
tanks and  ancillary equipment. As alum crystallizes  at fairly
high  temperatures,  heating  of tanks  and  feed  lines  is  also
necessary.

    Alum can  be  added to either the raw sewage  for  phosphorus
removal  in the  primary clarifiers, or  in  the  aeration  tank
effluent.  At  most   Ministry   of   the Environment   secondary
treatment  plants, addition  is  made  to  the  secondary  section of
the plant  in  the  aeration effluent.

Hydrated Lime

    Lime  is  employed because  it is  comparatively  inexpensive.
A  portion  of lime  reacts with the  orthophosphate  to  form an
insoluble  compound.  The   remaining   lime  and  the  magnesium
either  in  the sewage  or introduced in  the  lime  form a  floe
causing the precipitated phosphates  and other suspended solids
to  settle  quickly.   Lime  also  reacts with  the  Co 2 in  the
wastewater to form  calcium  carbonate.

    Bulk  lime is  delivered in  10  or 20  ton loads  and  blown
into  a  storage  hopper  or  slurry  make-up  tank.  The  quantity
normally   required  makes   the  use  of   fifty  pound   bags
impractical.  Dry storage  works well, although  problems  can
result  unless the  lime remains dry,  there are no  uncalcined
pebbles,   and  if   there is   sufficient   and  constant  water
pressure  for  slurry make-up.  Slurry storage  involves  a  large
capital outlay,  unloading of the bulk lime is less  than  clean
and if the slurry is  not  used  quickly  it will lose  some of its
effectiveness.

    Lime should  normally be added  to  the  raw sewage ahead of
the   primary   clarifier.   Dosage   can  be   most   effectively
controlled by maintaining  the pH  of  the  primary effluent  at
about  9.5. A  lower  pH will  probably not  produce   the  right
conditions   for   the   reactions   to   proceed   quickly   and
effectively,  the  phosphorus being carried  over with  the solids
in  the  effluent. A high pH   (>8.4) could inhibit  biological
growth in  the mixed  liquor.  The primary effluent  can be low in
BOD because of the  additional  removal of  organic materials by
the lime.

    Lime  is  particularly suitable  from an economic  point of
view   in  waters   of   low   alkalinity.    Despite   handling
difficulties, lime will produce an  effluent  from which most of
the  heavy  metals  have  been removed  by   precipitation  as
hydroxides and which  has  been  softened to  some extent.  In some
areas, because of a combination of  factors,  lime is the  only
viable choice. Digestion of  lime  sludge   appears  not  to  be  a
problem.
                                45

-------
PROCESS CONTROL PROBLEMS

    Those  likely  to  be  encountered  with  ferric  chloride,
pickle liquor and alum include:

    1.  If added to the raw sewage:

        a.  increased  raw  sludge removal  is  required  because
            of  increased  sludge  volumes  and   lower   sludge
            solids concentration. Increased raw  sludge  volumes
            could  cause digester  problems  due  to  hydraulic
            overload.

        b.  The raw sludge may  be  acidic (pH <  7.0)  and  could
            cause    problems    with    anaerobic    digestion.
            Alkalinity  (lime)  may  have  to be  added  to  the
            digester.

    2.  If added to the aeration tank:

        a.  sludge  return  and  sludge  wasting  have   to   be
            increased    to     prevent    excessive     sludge
            accumulations in  the clarifier and  to  prevent  the
            formation of a non-volatile, inert mixed  liquor.

        b.  High dosages to the  aeration tank could  result  in
            a  mixed  liquor  with  a   low  pH   at   which  the
            precipitated   phosphates   may   redissolve    and
            biological  growth  may be retarded.  Addition  of
            alkalinity  (lime,  caustic soda)  to the aeration
            tank will be necessary to  counter this  problem.
    3.  Feeding the  chemicals at  a constant  rate (X  ml/min)
        could  lead  to  one  or  more  of  the  aforementioned
        problems  if   extreme  variations  in  daily  flows  are
        encountered  at  the  plant.  Pacing  chemical  addition
        according to incoming flows is  therefore recommended.

    4.  Chemical  addition  for   phosphorus   removal   usually
        results  in  increased  removals of  toxic heavy  metals
        from  the  wastewater  and  this could  result  in  high
        levels  of heavy metals  in  the  digested  sludge  and
        could make this  sludge unsuitable for  disposal on farm
        land.

    Process control problems  likely to  be encounterd with lime
include:

    1.  The sludge produced,  if high  magnesium  lime  is  used,
        tends  to  be  fluffy  and  may  float  above the  scraper
        mechanism of  the clarifiers  if it is  allowed  to  build
        up. Normally,  "High  Calcium"  lime  does  not give this
        problem.
                               46

-------
    2.  The  deposition  of precipitate at points  of  turbulence
        and  on  all  surfaces  generally.  Clarifier  weirs  and
        channels must  be  cleaned  often and  pipes  flushed to
        prevent  clogging.  Recirculation of primary sludge will
        reduce this problem  substantially.

    3.  Because   the  amount  of  sludge  produced  is  greater,
        sludge must be removed from the primary  clarifier more
        often.

    4.  pH control in the  aeration tank. A close  check must be
        maintained  to  keep  the  pH  below   8.4  to  prevent
        destruction of biological sludge.

    5.  Overdosing with lime may cause digester  upsets.
SUMMARY

    Table  6-1  summarizes  the  use  of   lime,  alum  and  ferric
chloride in  phosphorus  removal.
       SUMMARY

              Table  6-1 summarizes the use of  lime, alum and ferric
       chloride  in phosphorus removal.
          Table  6-1  CHEMICAL ADDITION FOR PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL
         CHEMICAL
                         POINT OF
                         ADDITION
                                              COMMENT
           Lime
                         Raw Sewage
          Lime
      Ferric Chloride
      Pickle Liquor
      Alum
      Ferric Chloride
      Pickle Liquor
      Alum
                         Final
                         Effluent
                         (Tertiary
                         System)
Raw Sewage
Aeration
Tank
              Increased raw sludge concen-
              trations and volumes, higher
              raw sludge pH.
              Primary effluent will have
              lower BOD, higher pH values
              Maintain close check on
              aeration tank - pH should
              not go over 8.4.

              Additional clarifier needed.
              Problems with chemical
              sludge volumes.
Slight decrease in raw
sludge concentrations  pos-
sible, increased sludge
volumes.
Primary effluent BOD values
lower.

Decrease  in aeration tank
volatile  solids, increased
activated sludge return and
wasting required,  resulting
in changes in raw sludge
concentration.   Pickle
liquor added to aeration
influent.
                                 47

-------
DOSAGE

Control

    Influent  conditions   cannot   be  used  as  a   basis   for
determining  the  dosage  required   to  produce  the  required
effluent (1.0 mg/1) or 80% removal because:

    1.  Sewage is  complex  and  variable mixture of organic  and
        inorganic compounds.

    2.  Removal is not only a  function of the completeness  of
        chemical   reactions   but   also  of   the    degree   of
        flocculation adsorption and  sedimentation.

Dosage  must  be  determined for  each  plant  on  the basis  of
experience  gained  from  jar testing,  full  scale  testing  and
recent operations. The procedure  for phosphorus determination
is described in Topic 15.

    If the plant is  not  producing  an effluent which meets  the
standard, the operator  can control  the  process  of  phosphorus
removal by employing one or more of  the following:

    1.  Changes in dosage.

    2.  Sludge wasting.

    3.  Changes in pH by addition of lime or  soda ash.

    4.  Investigate use of other chemicals.

    5.  Change point of chemical addition.

Calculations

    In calculating  chemical dosage,  the operator must  bear in
mind that the active ingredient  of  the chemical added  is  only
the metal  ion;  e.g. calcium  (Ca+2),  aluminum (Al+3),  ferric
(Fe+3). One  therefore  calculates  the  amount  of  Fe+3  required
to reduce the phosphorus and must then  determine the amount of
ferric  chloride  solution  required  which contains   Fe+3,  acid
and water. See Mathematics for Operators  page 50.

Chemical Dosage Calculation for Phosphorus Removal

Examples;

    In a plant with an average flow  of  4.0 MGD ferric  chloride
is used at a dosage  of  10 mg/1 Fe+3 added after the  aeration
tanks.  What  ferric  chloride  flow rate measured  in ml/min is
needed?
                               48

-------
Data:   weight of ferric  chloride  is  14.1  Ib/gallon




        Ferric chloride contains  14.0% wt/wt Fe+3




        Ferric chloride contains  41.0% wt/wt Fed-



    1.  Step by  Step  Calculations





        10/mg/l  Fe+3  =        ^    x 4,000,000 G/D = 400 Ib/D of Fe+3
        therefore  liquid  ferric chloride (FeCl_)  needed =
            400            = 2857  Ib/D





        hence volume  of  liquid FeCl., needed =




            2857  Ib/D x  .} f ., = 202.6 G/D
                         14 . 1 ID




        hence ml/min  of  liquid FeCl,, =



            1/10 c.  ^ /™   1  day    1 hr    4546 ml   ,._ _  ...
            202.6  G/D x  „.  ,•  x 77: - :— x - - - = 639.7 ml/mm
                         24 hr  60 mm      G      zzn^^^^^^i



    2.  Calculation by Formula:



        ml/min =  (dosage mg/1) (plant flow MOD) _ x       .  =

                  (% active chemical (weight of chemical

                   as  fraction)       Ib/gal)



          i / i     (10  mg/1) (4. MGD) (31. 57) _         ,
        ml/min =       ^- — rrr — rr — rr - = 639. 7 ml/mm
                              49

-------
Training Sample 5
"Conventional   Activated  Sludge   -  Design   and  Operation
Parameters"
BASIC ACTIVATED SLUDGE
Kirkwood Community College
Cedar Rapids, Iowa
1977
OBJECTIVES

    1.  Using  the   "typical   conventional  activated   sludge
        flow schematic," show the typical design values  for:

        a.  Aeration tank detention time.
        b.  Final settling tank surface overflow rate
        c.  Return sludge flow pump capacity

    2.  Given aeration  tank  dimensions,  clarlfier  dimensions,
        flows, and appropriate plant data, calculate:

        a.  Aeration tank detention time
        b.  Clarifier surface settling rate
        c.  Lbs.  of BOD to aeration
        d.  Lbs.  of solids under aeration
        e.  F/M

INSTRUCTIONAL AIDS

    1.  Transparencies
    2.  Handout
    3.  Calculator

INSTRUCTIONAL APPROACH

    1.  Lecture
    2.  Discussion
    3.  In class problem solution

REFERENCES

    1.  WPCF MOP 11
    2.  N.Y. Manual

TOPIC

    Design and Operation Parameters
                               50

-------
INSTRUCTOR OUTLINE

    An  operator  should know  what  the  generally "accepted"
design  parameters  are  for  the conventional  activated sludge
process  units.  The  "Recommended  Standards  for  Sewage Works"
and the  "New York  Manual"  values  are shown on Student Handout
II.  The  operator  must realize  that  these  are  the design
numbers. The operator must deal with  that  which exists,  i.e.
the  daily  flow  variation,  the  daily  load variation,   the
weekend  changes,  the seasonal changes, the  new  industry,  the
industry that shut  down and on and on.

   The  point  is that  design  is probably  past  history to  the
operator.   The   operator   faces   operation   or   operational
parameters.  It   then  behooves  the  operator  to   routinely
calculate  operational  parameters   i.e.   to  document  flows,
loading, detention  times, process performance, etc.

    1.   Aeration Tank Detention Time

         First  notice  that  the design  value is  based on  the
         design flow alone.  This  detention time  will  be called
         aeration  tank  detention  time  at  flow.   Understand,
         however,  that  the  true hydraulic  detention  time  must
         include the  return sludge flow  into  the  aeration  tank.
         This  detention  time  will   be  called   aeration   tank
         detention time  at total flow.

         Figure 4  is an example problem. If time permits and  a
         student  has ''real"  plant  dimensions and  flow data,
         solve the problem with  the  real data.

    2.   Clarifier Surface Overflow Rate

         Notice   the  three  flow   values   in   this   problem;
         clarifier  influent,  clarlfier effluent,  and  clarifier
         sludge  flow.  The   correct   flow  (clarifier  effluent)
         must be used for this  calculation.

         See Figure  5 -  Overflow Rate Calculation Example

    3.   Clarifier Detention Time

         The critical  value again is  flow.  The   detention  time
         is calculated  from the clarifier influent. Use a  mean
         clarifier  depth of 10  feet and  a clarifier  influent
         flow of 2.8 MGD to complete  the calculation.

         Figure  5  - encourage  use of "real"  data for  additonal
         calculation  practice.  The  operators should be able  to
         furnish at  least approximate dimensions  and flow  data.
                                51

-------
            CONVENTIONAL ACTIVATED SLUDGE DESIGN PARAMETERS
                                      New York      Reconmended Standards
                                      Manual        For Sewage Works	
Aeration Tank
    Detention Time *(Hrs.)            6 - 8 **          6-7.5
    Oxygen (cu. ft. air/lb. BOD)      1,500             1,500
    Organic Load (i.e. BOD/1000
    cu. ft.                                             30 - 40
Secondary Clarifier
    Surface Overflow (Gal. sq. ft./
    day)                                800             600 - 800
    Detention Time (Mrs.)                               2-3
Clarifier Sludge Flow (%)             20 - 30           15 - 75

*Based on design flow
"Diffused air, for mechanical aerators 9-12
                                     52

-------
RETURN !
FLOW = (
AERATION TANK t
INFLUENT =0.3
5LUDGE
1 1 . nn1
J.I • UU

7 20'
y / /
' ' A
\
AERATION TANK W



/AERATION TANK
EFFLUENT
VOLUME = LEN.GTH X WIDTH X DEPTH = 20 X 80 X 12
VOLUME = 19,200 CUBIC FEET X 7.48 GAL./CUBIC FEET
VOLUME = 143,616 GALLONS
FLOW IN =.3 MGD +.1 MGD =.4 MGD
                 VOLUME  X 24
                 FLOW IN
DETENTION TIME   	
                 FLOW IN
DETENTION TIME * J43j,616__ X 24
                 400,000
DETENTION TIME =8.6 HOURS

                     FIGURE 4
         DETENTION TIME CALCULATION EXAMPLE

-------
                60'  DIAMETER
                                                              -]  HGD
             PRIMARY
             SLUDGE
             FLOW

SURFACE AREA - 1T^_  = 3.14 X 602    2,826 SQ.  FT.
                  4         4
OVERFLOW RATE -   EFFLUENT
                SURFACE AREA
                                   =  2.100.000

OVERFLOW RATE = 743 GAL./SQ.  FT./DAY


                          FIGURE  5

              OVERFLOW RATE CALCULATION EXAMPLE
                            54

-------
4.  Pounds of BOD to Aeration  (F)

5.  Pounds of Solids Under Aeration  (M)

    Some  operators  use mixed liquor  volatile  suspended
    solids  for  this  calculation.  That's  fine  - just be
    consistent  i.e.   if volatile  solids  are  being  used,
    always  use  them and  make appropriate  notes  in  the
    plant data and trend charts.

    See Figure 6 — Organic Load Calculation Example.

6.  F/M

    Point out that this ratio  is comparing the  food  to  the
    organisms available to "eat" the food.
                            55

-------
PRIMARY EFFLUENT BOD = 150 MG/L

PRIMARY EFFLUENT FLOW =0.3 MGD

AERATION TANK VOLUME = 19,200 CUBIC FEET

AERATION TANK VOLUME = 143,616 GALLONS

MIXED LIQUOR SUSPENDED SOLIDS = 2,000 MG/L


POUNDS OF BOD/DAY = 150 X 0.4 X 8.34 = 500 LBS/DAY
POUNDS BOD/DAY	  = 500  = 26 LBS BOD/DAY/1000 CUBIC FEET
VOLUME (1,000 CUBIC FEET)   19.2
POUNDS MIXED LIQUOR SOLIDS = .143616 X 2,000 X 8.34

POUNDS MIXED LIQUOR SOLIDS = 2,396 LBS
POUNDS BOD/DAY	= 500  = 0.21
POUNDS MIXED LIQUOR SOLIDS   2396"
                       FIGURE 6

           ORGANIC LOAD CALCULATION- EXAMPLE
                             56

-------
Training Sample 6
"Control Procedures - Constant F/M Ratio"
INTERMEDIATE ACTIVATED SLUDGE
Kirkwood Community College
Cedar Rapids, Iowa
1977
OBJECTIVES

    1.  List the process control parameters  used  to maintain  a
        constant F/M ratio control and  testing,  (the  flows  and
        the laboratory analysis)

    2.  List the usual range  of "accepted" F/M  ratios.

    3.  List three disadvantages to  control  by  this method.

    4.  Given appropriate data, calculate

        a.  Food (F)
        b.  Micoorganisms (M)
        c.  F/M

    5.  Given    a    basic    conventional    activated    sludge
        schematic,  label flows  and  concentrations,  and  list
        the mass balance equations.

    6.  Given  appropriate  data,   utilizing   the  mass  balance
        equation, solve  for return sludge  concentration needed
        for a given  level of  mixed liquor  suspended solids.

    7.  Given  appropriate  data,   calculate   sludge  weight  to
        concentration ratio.


INSTRUCTIONAL AIDS

    1.  Transparencies

INSTRUCTIONAL APPROACH

    1.  Lecture

    2.  Discussion

    3.  In class problem solution

REFERENCES

    1.  WPCF MOP 11

    2.  PART  III A  -  Operational Control Procedures  for  the
        Activated Sludge Process
                               57

-------
TOPIC

    Control Procedures - Constant F/M

INSTRUCTOR OUTLINE

    The second  control  procedure to be reviewed is  control  to
aconstant F/M  ratio.  In order to control  by maintenance  of  a
constant F/M ratio  it  is  necessary to routinely determine the
strength of  the load (BOD, COD,  TOC  e.g.),  the concentration
of solids under aeration (MLVSS  or MLSS),  raw  sewage flow, and
calculate  values  for  F   and  M  in   order   to determine  if
increased or decreased waste sludge flow is  in order.

    It  is  generally accepted that  values  for F/M should  fall
within the range of 0.1 to 0.5.

    The disadvantages to control  by this technique include:

    1.  The difficulty  in  obtaining a timely  value  of F  (BOD
        is 5 day determination).

    2.  MLVSS determinations are  not necessarily true  measures
        of M (paper and dead cells  show up as  MLVSS).

    3.  Inability  to make  instantaneous   changes  in  aeration
        tank solids concentrations.

    4.  F/M  by  itself  gives  little  assistance  to  operator
        relative to return sludge flow adjustments.
    The workshop  began with a problem from Student Handout  1.
If there was no difficulty with the problem,  proceed.  If  there
are any  questions with  solving  for F or  M or the F/M  ratio,
work another problem using data from the students.

    One  of  the most  significant parts  of this  module  deals
with  the  "mass balance  equation."  The  operator  must come  to
grips  with  this  equation if  he is  to rise  to  an  improved
understanding  of  the  activated  sludge  process.  The  starting
point  is  the  process  flow schematic.  The second  step  is  to
label  all flows  and to  assign symbols  to  these flows  and the
concentration  of  solids  in each "pipe."

    See  Figure  1  -  Conventional  Activated  Sludge  Process
Schematic.

    Recall  that  there is  an  equation which  has  been used  in
this module to solve  for pounds,  pounds of BOD or  solids. You
should recognize  the following equations:

    1.  Pounds solids  =  Cone,  (mg/1) x Volume (mg)  x 8.34
                               58

-------
Ol
CO
                               XSF (mgd)
                    RSTSS (ng/1)
CSF (mgd)

   RSTSS (mg/1)
                                  RSF  (mgd)
                               RSTSS  (mg/1)
                      API  (mgd)
                      PETSS  (mg/1)
                                                    Aeration Tank
                                                                                TFL  (mgd)
                  MLTSS (mg/1)
                                                                   CONVENTIONAL ACTIVATED  SLUDGE

                                                                        PROCESS SCHEMATIC
                                                                           Figure  1

-------
    2.  Pounds  solids  per day =  Cone,  (mg/1) x  Flow (mgd)  x
        8.34

    The mass balance equation  has  as  its  simple premise:  Mass
in equals mass out.

    Let's  take  out one  step backward before  moving ahead.  A
flow  balance  should be  readily  understood. The  flow balance
premise  is:  Flow  in  equals flow  out.  Notice  the  different
relationships  when  the  tanks  are  full.  Flow   balance  is
important  in   that  sometimes  process   flow  data  can  be
calculated  on   occasion  if  some  measured   flow  data   is
available. Flow  balance  equations  should  be done in  your  (the
student's) facility. (See Figure 2 - Flow Balance)

    Return now  to  the mass  balance  equation:  Mass in  equals
mas s out.

    Pounds will be the units of mass for our use. The equation
now becomes:  Pounds in equals pounds out.

    Figure 3 is identical to Figure 1 except the aeration  tank
and   clarifier   have   shrunk.   The   mass   (pound)  balance
relationships should now be  evident.  The  mass balance  around
the clarifier results in the following:

        TFL x MLTSS x  8.34  = CSF  x RSTSS x 8.34 +  CFO x FETSS
        x 8.34

        First the 8.34 can be divided out resulting in:

        TFL x MLTSS = CSF x RSTSS + CFO x FETSS

        Next,  FETSS,  if  final  effluent  quality  is  good,
        approaches  zero.  (At  the  very least  it  is very  much
        smaller than either MLTSS and/or RSTSS).

        The equation then becomes:

        TFL x MLTSS = CSF x RSTSS

        Moving around the system:

        CSF x RSTSS = RSF x RSTSS + XSF x RSTSS

        If there is no sludge being wasted, XSF = 0

        CSF x RSTSS = RSF x RSTSS

        Finally the mass balance around the aeration  tank:

        TFL x MLTSS = RSF x RSTSS + API x PETSS
                               60

-------
XSF
CSF
                   RSF
API
TFL
CFO
                           Flow In » Flow out
                           TFL = AFI +  RSF
                           TFL = CFO +  CSF
                           CSF = RSF +  XSF
                       Figure 2 - Flow Balance

-------
^ XSF (mgd) _ CSF (mgd)
RSTSS (mg/1)


RSTSS (mg/1)
RSF (mgd)
RSTSS (mg/1)
AFI (mqd) if TFL (mqd)
^•i
PETSS (mg/1) MLTSS (mg/1)

1
&f

^^ ^ CFO (mgd)
FETSS (mp/1)
Pounds/day • Flow (mgd) x Cone, (mg/1) x 8.34
Pounds in a Pounds out
                 Figure 3
              MASS BALANCE

-------
        These equations do have significance for the operator.
        The mass balance  around  the  clarifier  resulted in  the
        following equation:

        TFL x MLTSS = CSF x RSTSS

        If XSF = 0

        (AFI + RSF) x MLTSS = RSF x RSTSS

        AFI x MLTSS + RSF x MLTSS = RSF x RSTSS

        RSF x (RSTSS - MLTSS) = AFI x MLTSS

        RSF = (AFI x MLTSS)/(RSTSS - MLTSS)
    This  relationship can  be of  assistance  to  the  operator
trying   to   control  to  a   constant  aeration  tank   solids
concentration  of   F/M   control.   It  is  most  important   to
understand  that  this  relationship presumes no accumulation  of
solids  in  the clarifier. Other  relationships  can  be  derived
and will be in subsequent topics of  this module.

    The  centrifuge  can  be  utilized  as  an  operational  test
device and its use  should be  incorporated. It  does  not  replace
gravimetric  solids   determinations.   It  rather  expands  the
operator's capability.

    There   are  accepted,    even   required   procedures  for
"self-monitoriag" data.  But,  that  does not mean that  a test  or
analysis  not  in "Standard  Methods"   is  not  appropriate as   a
control  test.  Use   of  the centrifuge for solids concentration
determinations  falls  into  this   category.  Percent  solids  by
volume  can  be  easily  determined  using  American  Petroleum
Institute  (API)  centrifuge  tubes.   Determine aeration  tank
concentration  (ATC) and  Return Sludge  Concentration (RSC). The
equation:

    RSF = (AFI x MLTSS)/(RSTSS - MLTSS)

Becomes:

    RSF = (AFI x ATC)/(RSC -  ATC)

    The centrifuge  values  can be  rapidly  determined and  this
test and equation can be made a part  of control procedure.

    This relationship can be  manipulated to give an expression
for the return sludge concentration  (RSC). The expression  is:

    RSC = (AFI + RSF) x  ATC/RSF

    The expression  for RSF impl? 3s that given  mixed liquor and
return  sludge concentrations and  a  level  of flow into the
                               63

-------
aeration  tank,  the  return sludge flow to maintain  that  system
in balance can be found.

    The expression  for  RSC  implies  that given the  flow  values
and   mixed    liquor   concentration,   the   return    sludge
concentration  necessary  to  maintain a  balanced  system  can  be
found.

    However,  there  is  nothing  quite so simple.  First  of  all
the activated sludge process is a biological  (living)  process.
The  mass  balance  presented  does  not  take  into  account  the
growth of new  sludge  in the aeration tank. The second concern
is that the  expression  does not take into account  the storage
of sludge on  occasion in the secondary clarifier.  Finally  the
substituion  for  ATC = MLTSS  and  RSC  =  RSTSS  assumes  an
identity relationship.

    In other words  ATC  times  a  constant = MLTSS and RSC times
a constant = RSTSS.  If  such were the case, gravimetric  solids
determinations could be  replaced with solids determination  by
centrifuge, which is much  easier.  Such is generally not true,
but  the  relationship and   its  relative change  is  worthy  of
consideration. Part III A  terms this  the "Sludge weight-to-
concentration  ratio"  (WCR). The key  is not  the  exactness  of
the numbers  shown,  rather the trend.  In  other words  a  WCR  of
800 does  not  necessarily mean  that  your  sludge  is "normal."
Your  centrifuge may not rotate at the  identical  RPM's  to  the
one used in Part  II A.  The operator watches  the  trend  of  the
WCR  in  his  plant.   Increasing  WCR's  indicate the sludge  is
becoming  relatively "older."  Decreasing  WCR's  indicate  the
sludge is becoming relatively "younger."

    To  solve  for  WCR   requires  only  the  gravimetric  mixed
liquor solids determination and solids by centrifuge.

    WCR = MLTSS/ATC
                               64

-------
Training Sample 7
 Review from Activated Sludge - Trend Charts"
ADVANCED ACTIVATED SLUDGE
Kirkwood Community College
Cedar Rapids, Iowa
1977
OBJECTIVES

    1.  Discuss settling curves

    2.  Discuss concentration curves

    3.  Discuss  process flows  (raw,   primary  sludge,  return,
        and waste activated sludge).

    4.  Discuss sludge  blanket levels

    5.  Discuss effluent quality  curves

INSTRUCTIONAL AIDS

    1.  Transparencies  (Trend Charts)

INSTRUCTIONAL APPROACH

    1.  Lecture

    2.  In-class problem solving

REFERENCES

    1.  Part III-A

TOPIC

    Trend Charts

INSTRUCTOR OUTLINE

    Process control  takes  on a new  dimension when trend charts
are a  part of  process control  decision  making.  This  lesson
plan  provides  trend  figures  which display  about 13 weeks  of
data opposed to  true,  daily maintained trend charts. They  are
missing  the  all important  daily  operational notes  of  unusual
circumstances or events.

    The  following   trend  charts  are   included  in  the lesson.
packet:

    1.  Settled sludge  volume - Figure 7

    2.  Settled sludge  concentration - Figure 8

    3.  Depth of sludge blanket - Figure  9
                               65

-------
    4.  Turbidity, Final effluent - Figure  10

    5.  Aeration tank COD load - Figure  11

    6.  Final clarifier overflow rate - Figure  12

    7.  Oxygen uptake test results - Figure  13

    8.  Weight to concentration ratio - Figure  14
Transparencies  of  these  figures  should be  made  to  display
several of these transparencies at the same time.

    Discussion  of  these trend  charts should  include  but  not
necessarily be limited to:

    1.   The equation WCR = MLTSS/ATC. Notethat  this ratio  is
        most  certainly  not  constant.   Compare  the improved
        settling characteristics to this increase in WCR.

        The COD load curve,  overflow  rate,  and final effluent
        turbidity  should  be displayed  simultaneously.   Notice
        that hydraulic overloads do not  occur, rather  organic
        load  does  occur  with  a  resultant  degradation   of
        effluent quality.

        Other combinations  should generate discussion.

        Any  questions   on   the  logistics  of  trend charting
        should be  resolved.  It  is  suggested  that 10  square  by
        10 square per inch  graph paper does not lend itself  to
        trend  charts  as  the  units   of  time  (the   horizontal
        scale)  can be  confusing.   There  is   available  graph
        paper graduated  12 squares per  inch  horizontal  by  20
        squares per inch vertical.
                               66

-------
Training Sample 8
"Activated Sludge-Aeration and Sedimentation''
STANDARD  OPERATING JOB  PROCEDURES FOR  WASTE  WATER  TREATMENT
PLANT UNIT OPERATIONS S.O.J.P. No. 5
Charles County Community College
LaPlata, Maryland
1972
OBSERVATION

    1.  Observe surface of aeration  tank once every  2 hours

        a.  Good mixing, minimum of  dead spots
        b.  Color-red brown to brown
        c.  Odor-like earth
        d   Foam, color and amount
        e.  Foam control sprays on

                TRAINING GUIDE NOTE: VI  1,  2, 3,  and 4

    2.  Observe surface of clarifiers  once  every  2 hours

        a.  Minimum of scum
        b.  Minimum of rising sludge
        c.  Minimum suspended materials

                TRAINING GUIDE NOTE: VII-1, VI-5, VI-6, VI-7

    3.  Check clarifier sludge blanket and  record once every  2
        hours

        a.  Level between 1/4 - 1/2  tank depth

                TRAINING GUIDE NOTE: VI-8

    4.  Observe flow over clarifier  weirs

        a.  Even flow
        b.  Weirs clean

                TRAINING GUIDE NOTE: VI-9

    5.  Observe return sludge flow

        a.  Color brown to red-brown
        b.  Odor-earthy
        c.  Even smooth flow

                TRAINING GUIDE NOTE: VI-2, VI-3,  III-l
                               67

-------
EQUIPMENT CHECKING (every 4 hours)

    1.  Check blower and record headings

        a.  Suction gauge near zero
        b.  Oil temperature per mfg. specs.
        c.  Oil pressure per mfg. specs.
        d.  Cooling water flow at set point
        e.  Ammeters per mfg. spec.
        f.  Phase angle indicator greater  than  p.85
        g.  Bearing temperature per mfg. specs.
        h.  Vibration monitor within specs.

                TRAINING GUIDE NOTE: V-44, 45,  46, 47,  48,  49

    2.  Check return sludge pumps and record  readings

        a.  Bearing temperature per mfg. specs.
        b.  Motor temperature per mfg.  specs.
        c.  Coupling quiet and smooth
        d.  Record pump output from magnetic  flow meter
        e.  Check seal water flow
        f.  Check discharge pressure

                TRAINING  GUIDE  NOTE:  V-48,  50,  51,  52,  52,
                XIII-1

    3.  Check waste sludge pump and record readings

        a.  Same as return sludge pump  check

                TRAINING'GUIDE NOTE: V-48, 50,  51, 52,  XIII-1

    4.  Check Parshall Flume

        a.  Clean, no obstructions
        b.  Purge bubbler tume
        c.  Record reading

                TRAINING GUIDE NOTE: XI-1, VI-8,  XIII-1

EQUIPMENT ADJUSTMENTS

    1.  Adjust aeration blower output

        a.  As required to maintain > 1.0  and < 3.0  mg/1  D.O.
            throughout aeration tank (see  Process Control)

        b.  Adjust manual control slowly

    2.  Adjust return sludge flow rate

        a.  As required by process demand  (see  Process
            Control
                               68

-------
    3.  Adjust waste sludge pumping rate

        a.  As required by process demand  (see Process
            Control)

NOTE RECORD ALL OBSERVATIONS AND READINGS

HOUSEKEEPING

    1.  Clean effluent weirs

        a.  Daily
        b.  To maintain even overflow

                TRAINING GUIDE NOTE: V-53, XI1-5

    2.  Clean clarifier center

        a.  Daily
        b.  To prevent odors and maintain  free flow

                TRAINING GUIDE NOTE: V-53, XII-5

    3.  Clean aeration tank walls

        a.  At water level
        b.  Once every 2 weeks
        c.  To prevent odors

                TRAINING GUIDE NOTE: V-53, XII-5

    4.  Clean distribution channels and Parshall  Flume

        a.  Every other day
        b.  To maintain accurate flow measurement
        c.  To prevent odors

                TRAINING GUIDE NOTE: V-53, XII-5

    5.  Clean clarifier walls

        a.  At water level
        b.  Twice a week
        c.  To remove algae and grease

                TRAINING GUIDE NOTE: V-53, XII-5

    6.  Clean all pumps, motors and blowers

        a.  Daily
        b.  While shut down
        c.  To maintain cleanliness and increase  equipment
            life

                TRAINING GUIDE NOTE: V-54, XII-6


                               69

-------
7.  Clean control panel(s)

    a.  Daily
    b.  To maintain appearance and operation
    c.  To prevent accidental starts or stops

            TRAINING GUIDE NOTE: V-55, XII-7

8.  Clean structures and walkways

    a.  To prevent falls
    b.  Always keep clean and free of debris,  hoses  and
        tools

            TRAINING GUIDE NOTE: XII-8

9.  Clean piping and valves

    a.  To maintain function and top appearance

            TRAINING GUIDE NOTE: V-56
                            70

-------
                        TRAINING GUIDE

          Educational Concepts - Science, Section  III

1.   III-l (C-I.2.1.4), (C.I.5.3), (C-I.2.6.1)

    Examination  of  the  aeration tank  solids and the  return
    sludge  solids   can  be  very  revealing  of  the  state  of
    oxidation  of  the organisms.  Examination  requires only  a
    simple microscope with reasonable resolution at  100  power.
    A  slide  should  be  prepared  using  a  drop of well  mixed
    sample with  a  coverslip  placed  over  it.  The  floe  should
    have  crisp clean edges   and  a  large variety  of  protozoa
    should be  present. The  presence  of  many small  flagellates
    and  strings  extending  out  of   and  mixed   in  the  floe
    indicates  an  underoxidized,  young  floe.  If   the  floe  is
    small  with  crisp  edges  and  many  large  rotifers   are
    present,  the floe  is  overoxidized.   The  presence  of  a
    variety  of types and many  protozoa  indicated  a  balance
    process.  In many  cases,  the   organism  balance   in  the
    process will indicate problems  in the process  long  before
    they actually occur.
2.
    III-2 (C-I.5.9.10)

    pH Control.  In  adding  coagulant  aids  always  monitor  the
    aeration  tank  pH using   a  pH meter.  Many coagulants  are
    acidic or  basic  and  any  pH  range outside of  6.0-8.0  will
    affect  the microorganisms  adversely  and  halt  biological
    action.

                Process Equipment - Section  IV

1.   V-38 (B.I.3.1)

    Examine all potential drainage places from aeration  tanks,
    clarifiers, and  return lines. Any  unplanned  Isoses  could
    upset the  process or  prevent establishment of  a  culture.

2.   V-39 (B.I.4.1)

    Start blowers as  soon as spargers  are  covered  to  prevent
    plugging.

3.   V-40 (B.I.4.2)

    Remove locks and close circuit breaker.  Push start button.

4.   V-41 (B.I.4.4)

    Fifty percent of  rated  output will  bring  blower output up
    above  surge  point   and  supply  all   air necessary  for
    start-up.  Reference - Mfg. Specifications.
                               71

-------
 5.  V-42 (B.I.5.1)

     Water  just  covering  suction  arms  will  reduce  apparent
     weight of arms and make start easier. Observe arm rotation
     for  smooth,  even operation.  Any roughness  or  stops  call
     for immediate stopping  and  draining of  all  equipment and
     corrective maintenance.   References - Mfg. Specifications
     and Plant Manual

 6.  V-43 (B.I.7.1) (B.I.8.1) (B.I.8.2)  (B.I.8.3)

     Push start button and set initially to 50% of plant flow.
     Make  adjustments  later  by   process demand.  (See Process
     Control Section).

 7.  V-44 (C.2.1.1)

     Any  steady  deviation  on  the negative  side  of 0 for the
     blower intake indicates  plugging filters. These  should be
     cleaned.

 8.  V-45 (C.2.1.2) (C.2.1.3) (C.2.1.4)

     Generally in the 90-150  degree  range oil temperature; oil
     pressure  generally 20-30  psi  on  blower.  Cooling  water
     adequate to keep oil temperature within specifications.
     References - Mfg.  Specifications and Plant Manual

 9.  V-46 (C.2.1.5)

     Ammeters  must  be  in  normal  range. If  otherwise serious
     problems   are   occurring   and   immediate   shutdown  is
     advisable. Reference - Mfg.  Specifications

10.  V-47 (C.2.1.6)

     A power  factor  greater  than  0.85 is required through  most
     of  the   nation.   Penalties are  usually  attached  to  P.F.
     loadings less than  this  on either the lead or log side. A
     rheostat is usually supplied for correction.
     References - Mfg.  Specifications and Plant Manual

11.  V-48 (C.2.3.1) (C.2.1.7) (C.2.2.1)

     High bearing  temperatures will usually coincide  with  high
     oil  temperatures  which  generally  means  a  shutdown and
     repair are called  for.  References  -  Mfg. Specifications
     and Morrow
                                72

-------
12.  V-49 (C.2.1.8)

     Vibration monitoring  is unusual  in smaller installations
     but can  give  immediate or trend  information on equipment
     failure or problems. Reference - Morrow

13.  V-50 (C.2.2.2) (C.2.3.1)

     A  40  C  rise  motor will  feel very  hot  to  the  touch and
     caution should be  used  not  to burn your hands. Experience
     will tell you when the motor  is too hot.

14.  V-51 (C.2.3.1) (C.2.2.3)

     A  noisy  coupling indicates overload  or mechanical damage
     due to misalignment. Call maintenance.

15.  V-52 (C.2.2.4) (C.2.2.6) (C.2.3.1)

     Pump output (flow) and pump discharge pressure are keys to
     the condition of  the  pump and  piping. Learn the normal
     values.  Drastic,  uncalled  for changes  can  lead  to early
     discovery of malfunction.

16.  V-53 (C.4.1.2) (C.4.2.2) (C.4.3.1)  (C.4.4.1) (C.4.5.1)

     Cleaning  of  all  structures   at   the  water  level  is  an
     absolute requirement on a  routine basis.  Failure to do so
     will create an unhealthy,  nauseous, stinking mess, due to
     slime, grease and algal accumulations. Use a high  pressure
     sprayer or high pressure hose.

17.  V-54 (C.4.6.1)

     Clean  equipment  is easier  to  maintain, makes  malfunctions
     show more readily  (e.g.  oil leaks) and prevents equipment
     damage from mechanical junk getting into working parts.

18.  V-55 (C.4.7.2)

     A  control  panel  with extra materials  on  it  can  make
     operation confusing and unsafe.
          Process Flow - Characterization - Section VI

 1.  VI-1 (C.I.1.1)

     The surface of  the  aeration tank should have an even  roll
     with  no  dead  spots.   Particularly   watch  for  plugged
                                73

-------
    sprayers. A dye test may be required at first  to  determine
    whether  or  not a  dead core  may exist  in a  spiral  flow
    aeration tank.  If  this is  so,  major  modifications  of  air
    supply  may  be  necessary.  Reference  -  Activated  Sludge
    Process   Operational   Control,   A.    West   P.E.,    EPA,
    Cincinnati,  Ohio

2.   VI-2 (C.I.1.2) (C.I.5.1)

    The color  of  the  sludge  should  be  a  reddish brown.  Any
    other  variations   may  be   caused  by   dyes   or  colored
    compounds  in   the   influent,  underoxidation   causing  the
    sludge to get very dark or  to tend toward gray.

3.   VI-3 (C.I.1.3) (C.I.5.2)

    Pick up  a  handful  of  loamy earth and  compare the  odors.
    Any  other   odor  means  trouble,  usually  overloading  and
    underoxidation.

4.   VI-4 (C.I.1.4) (D.3.1.1) (D.4.1.1) (D.3.2.1)

    There  will  usually  be some  small  amount  of  light  brown
    foam.   If  the   foam is  white  and  abundant,  the  aeration
    solids concentration  is  too low. If  it  is heavy  and  dark
    the aeration  tank   solids  are too heavy.  These  are  only
    guidelines   and  adequate   testing  must   be   done  before
    corrections  are made.

5.   VI-5 (C.I.2.1)

    Even ideal  control will leave some scum on the clarifiers.
    The amount  will  be small and the  skimming devices  should
    clean it all on each pass.

6.   VI-6 (C.I.2.2)

    There  will  always   be  some  small  amount  of  floe  varying
    from   very  fine   to  1mm  in   diameter  rising   in   the
    clarifiers,  even under  good control.  The amount  should  be
    very small  and not sufficient to interfere with  turbidity
    measurements.

7.   VI-7 (C.I.2.3)

    Some suspended materials  (5 mg/1 or  so)  will be  present.
    This should not interfere with the turbidity readings.
                               74

-------
 8.   VI-8 (C.I.3.1) (C.2.4.1)

     Using an  air lift  or light device,  determine the sludge
     blanket   depth.  Anything  less  than  1/2  the  tank  depth
     indicates process trouble.

 9.   VI-9 (C.I.4.1) (C.I.4.2)

     An even flow  over  the weirs prevents short circuiting and
     consequent hydraulic  upsets leading  to excess  solids in
     the effluent.

10.   VI-10 (D.I.2.1)

     Bulking  sludge. The solids  concentration in  the  clarifier
     will be  almost the  same from the top  to  bottom. There will
     be  no  area  of  clear  supernate on  the clarifiers  or if
     there is   it  will  be  minimum and   the  blanket  will be
     visible  just  below the surface.  The effluent solids  will
     be  almost  equal to the aeration  tank  solids.  This  will
     occur even below design flows.

11.   VI-11 (D.2.1.1) (D.5.1.1)

     Excessive  solids carry-over can be of several forms. Very
     small pinhead floe  going over  the weirs  indicates  over-
     oxidized  sludge.  Large  chunks  of  light  brown  materials
     indicate nitrification and  denitrlfication or  too  much air
     and  aeration  tank  solids  too  heavy.  Dark  brown  to black
     chunks  indicate septicity.
                                75

-------
Training Sample 9
"The Activated Sludge Process"
Wastewater Treatment Plant Operator Training Program
Water Pollution Control Federation
Intermediate Course, Vol. A
Part of Unit 5 has been selected as an example
(Pre/posttest and review exercises are included)
UNIT: 5 The Activated Sludge Process (Summary)
Estimated Time: 2.5 hours
Prerequisites: Successful Completion of Basic Course

PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVES

    Behaviors exhibited by the student at the end of this unit
include being able to:

   1.  Briefly define what is meant by flocculation
   2.  Describe the causes of poor settling
   3.  Describe reactions throughout an aeration tank
   4.  Identify variations of the activated sludge process
   5.  Explain the 30-minute settling test, the sludge
       volume index, and the'mixed liquor suspended solids
       test
   6.  Explain the importance of proper DO levels.

UNIT OBJECTIVES

    To  provide the  conceptual  information  that  the   student
needs to know about activated sludge.

INSTRUCTIONAL RESOURCES

    1.  Handbook for Program Administrator
    2.  Student Workbook
    3.  Pre/Posttests
    4.  Slides/tapes and program audioscript

INSTRUCTOR ACTIVITIES

    1.  Have the student complete and self-check the pretest
        questionnaire .
    2.  Have the  student  go through  the  audio-visual  portion
        of the Unit and complete review exercises.
    3.  Provide  a   discussion   period   to   clarify   student
        questions or problems encountered in the Unit.
    4.  Have the student complete the final review exercise.
    5.  Mark and retain the Posttest questionnaire.
DISCUSSION QUESTIONS

    1.  What is the purpose of the secondary clarifier? How  is
        what happens in the secondary clarifier different  than
        what happens in the primary clarifier?

                               76

-------
    2.   What is  the  F/M ratio?  What would you  expect with  a
        high F/M ratio, and with a low F/M ratio?

    3.   Why is  it important  that  floe  settle at  the proper
        rate in the secondary clarifier?

    4.   What is  the  purpose  of  the  30-minute settling  test,
        and how can you use the information you get from  it?

    5.   What are the two variables  that  determine the rate of
        sludge return from the secondary clarifier?

    6.   The DO level in  the  aeration basin should not be  less
        than 1 mg/1,  and not more than 3 to 4  mg/1. Why?

    7.   Why is it important that contents of the aeration  tank
        be well mixed?
    In addition to the Pretest/posttest and review  information
given  in the  student workbook,  a  summary  of  the activated
sludge  process  is  provided  to  supplement  the  audio-visual
presentation.  A   sample  of   that   summary  information   is
provided.
                               77

-------
WWTP OPERATOR TRAINING PROGRAM - INTERMEDIATE COURSE

Summary

    Usually  it is  primary  effluent that  is  treated  in  the
conventional activated sludge process, although raw wastewater
from  the pretreatment  processes  might  flow directly  to  the
activated sludge process.

    Regardless  of  the  setup, there  are  two main steps in  the
activated sludge process:

    1.   Changing nonsettleable organic materials into
         settleable sludge

    2.   Removing the sludge

    It  is  important   that   these  organic  materials  are  not
allowed  to  enter  receiving waters.  Too  many organics  will
cause  rapid  growth  of  bacteria,   and  this,  means  that  the
overall  level  of  dissolved oxygen in receiving waters  will be
reduced.  Overloading   the  assimilation  capacity of  receiving
waters  can  result  in  fish kills  and septic conditions in  the
immediate area  and often for several miles  downstream.

    In  the  activated  sludge  process,  we compress  the  natural
treatment process  in  time  and space, there are two main  units
in  the  activated sludge process:  the aeration tank,  and  the
secondary clarifier.

    Aeration   Tank;     Primary  effluent,   or   sometimes  raw
wastewater, goes into  an aeration  tank.  The aeration tank uses
either   mechanical  or   diffused   aeration  to   aerate  the
wastewater. A  plant usually  has at  least two aeration tanks to
allow one to be shut down  for maintenance.  The  contents of the
aeration tank  are  called mixed liquor.  This  is the mixture of
raw  or  settled wastewater  and  the  return activated  sludge.
Mixed  liquor  is kept  in the aeration  tank for  about  4 to  8
hours   to   allow  the   bacteria  enough time   to   treat  the
wastewater.  For this  treatment  to  happen, there  have  to be
enough  bacteria,  enough dissolved  oxygen,   and  enough  contact
between  oxygen, bacteria  and  organics. A healthy  activated
sludge  in the aeration tank is  light to dark  brown in color,
and has  a smell that is  earthy and  slightly musty.

    Secondary  clarifier: Circular  clarifiers are most  common,
and  at  least  two  clarifiers are  usually  used.  The  secondary
clarifier   is   used   to  settle  activated sludge  from  the
wastewater.  This material   is fluffier  and  harder  to settle
than  materials  settled out in the primary  clarifier.  This
means  that  the  overflow rate has  to be  lower, and that  the
detention  time in the secondary  clarifier has to be  longer,
usually  between 2 to 4 hours.
                                78

-------
    It  is  important  that  the sludge  blanket  doesn't get  too
close to the top  of  the  clarifier, so that floe  doesn't  start
going  out  with  the  effluent.   A  good  secondary  clarifier
effluent  will  look   clear   and  sparkling.   Sludge  in   the
secondary clarifier has to be continuously removed.

     The key  to  the  activated   sludge  process  is  the  return
activated sludge.  Sludge  from the bottom  of  the clarifier  is
returned  to  the  head of the aeration  tank.  It is  important
that you know how much sludge is being  returned, and  how much
is being wasted.  Not  all  of  the activated  sludge collected  in
the  secondary   clarifier  is  returned  to  the  aeration  tank.
Wasting  should  be done  at  regular  intervals.  If  some of  it
were not wasted,  the  clarifier  would soon fillup with sludge.
The  other  advantage   of  wasting  or  removing  sludge is  the
removal of some of the older, less active  microorganisms

BIOLOGICAL PRINCIPLES

     Because  the  activated  sludge   process   is  an  aerobic
process,  we  are  mainly  concerned  with  the  aerobic   and
facultative bacteria.  The  organics in the wastewater  are  used
as food  by  the  bacteria. The bacteria use oxygen  during  this
process, and  this is one reason for  aeration in the  aeration
tank. The other function of  aeration is to provide  mixing  to
keep the organics, oxygen and bacteria  in  contact.

    The  rate  of  growth  of  microorganisms will  depend on  how
much food is available. The  ratio  of  food  to  the weight  of the
microorganisms  is called  the F/M ratio,  and it  is the  F/M
ratio that  determines the growth rate  of  the  microorganisms.
With  a  high  F/M   ratio,  there   will  be a lot  of  growth  and
reproduction  of  the  bacteria.  With a  low  F/M ratio,  each
microorganism will continue  to  need oxygen unitl it  dies,  and
it  will  keep  losing  weight  during  life  because  cellular
material is being  changed to  energy.

SETTLING

    Some sludges  do  not flocculate as  well as  others. One  of
the  reasons for  this  poor   settling might  be  that a  large
number  of micoorganisms  in the  wastewater are  fungi.  Because
of their shape, fungi tend to hinder  settling.  There are other
types of  bacteria that  grow into  chain—like structures,  and
look  like   fungi.  These  chain-like   organisms  are  called
filamentous organisms.

    One  of  the   causes  of  sludge   bulking   is  filamentous
organisms.  Another  cause  could  be   a high  F/M  ratio.  The
individual  bacteria  will be  too active to  stay in  clusters,
and will not flocculate.

    Another reason for poor  settling  is hydraulic overloading.
If  there  is  too  much  flow  coming  through  the  secondary
clarifier,  it will cause  sludge to  rise  and go out  with the
effluent.

                               79

-------
    The other major  requirement  for a good settling  sludge is
the presence  of a large  number  of  protozoa.  These  organisms
eat the  bacteria, and  in doing  so, produce  a denser  sludge
which settles more readily.

FOLLOWING A PARCEL OF WASTEWATER THROUGH THE ACTIVATED  SLUDGE
SYSTEM

    At  the   beginning   of  the   aeration  tank,   the  return
activatedsludge is mixed  with  the wastewater.  There  is  a  high
F/M ratio here. There  is  rapid growth of bacteria,  and  a  high
demand of oxygen.

    In  the  middle  of   the   aeration   tank,   the  number  of
microorganisms  has  increased. But  as  this  is happening,  the
food supply is  decreasing.  That  is, the F/M ratio is becoming
lower. At this  point,  fewer new cells are being  produced.  The
amount of oxygen needed by the organisms keeps  on decreasing.

    At the end  of the aeration tank,  there is  very little  food
that  remains,  and  the   oxygen  requirements   are  low.   The
bacteria are  less  active and  will  start to form  floes  unless
there  is  too  much mixing  from  aeration.  Also,  some  of  the
bacteria may  die.  This mixed  liquor goes  on to  the secondary
clarifier.

    The important  condition in  the  secondary  clarifier  is the
speed with  which  the  floe  settles.  If the  floe  settles  too
fast, smaller particles  will  stay on  the  top. If  the  sludge
does  not  settle   fast  enough,   solids  will  escape  in   the
effluent. The settling floe  acts like  a  filter. As  it moves
down, it takes  the smaller particles with  it.

    If the  sludge has settled properly,  the return activated
sludge line will  bring hungry microorganisms back to the  head
of the aeration tank,  where the process starts again.  Some of
this  activated  sludge   is  wasted  to keep   the  number  of
microorganisms  at a manageable level. Also,  wasting helps  keep
the bacteria  staying in  the  system young and  active,  because
some of the bacteria removed during wasting  are old ones.

AERATION

    Aeration  is important because  it supplies  dissolved oxygen
to  the  microorganisms,  and  because  it provides  mixing.  This
mixing keeps  the  organisms,  organics  and  oxygen  in constant
contact.

    The  two  main  systems used  to  get  air  into  the aeration
tank  are  the  diffused  aeration  system,  and  the  mechanical
aeration system.

    In  the  diffused  aeration system,  air  is  forced  through
tubes into  the mixed  liquor  and  bubbles  up  through it.  The
amount  of  oxygen  that  will  be  dissolved  into  the mixed
                               80

-------
liquor  depends  on  the  size  of  the bubbles,  and how  long  it
takes  the  bubble to  reach  the surface.  The farther down  and
the smaller the bubble  size,  the  greater  the efficiency of  the
aeration unit.

    In the mechanical aeration system,  a  device  like a  paddle,
wheel  or  brush is  used to  mix the  mixed liquor and bring  it
into contact with  the air.  The device  splashes  water into  the
air, or air  into the water,  so  that oxygen  will be dissolved
in the liquid.

ACTIVATED SLUDGE PROCESS VARIATIONS

       Extended  aeration:  In  the  extended  aeration   plant,
wastewater  is  pre-treated,   and  then  goes  on   to  biological
treatment.  There is  no primary  clarification   of  wastewater
Pre-treated  wastewater  is  aerated  in  an  aeration tank  for
about  a day,  as compaed to 4 to 8  hours in  the conventional
system. Also,  in  the extended aeration plant  the mixed liquor
suspended solids concentration is usually more than twice that
of a conventional plant, and  the  amount of sludge to be wasted
is considerably reduced.

    Oxidation ditch:  The  oxidation  ditch  operates  on the same
principle as  the  extended aeration  plant.  The differences  are
the  shape,  and the  method  used  to  aerate the  wastewater.  In
the  oxidation ditch,  brush  rotors  provide  the aeration  and
mixing, and move the  liquor around  the  racetrack.

    Contact stabilization:  In the contact  stablization plant,
there  is  only  a short  period,   about  30  to  60 minutes,  for
mixing raw wastewater and  activated sludge. During  this  time,
the  organics  collect on the  surface of  the  sludge particles,
and these solids are  then settled out.  These settled particles
are aerated for another 2 to  6 hours. This allows the bacteria
to complete  the  stabilization of the  organics.  The advantage
of this process is  that only  a smaller  quantity  of  liquid must
be aerated, and this  means a  saving  in  aeration  tank volume.

    Tapered aeration;  In  the  tapered aeration setup, more  air
is  added  to  the  head  of  the aeration tank,  because  this  is
where  the oxygen  demands  are the greatest. The  oxygen supply
is decreased or tapered throughout  the  rest of the  tank.

    Step aeration  process:  In  this  setup,  settled wastewater
is introduced at several  points  along  the  aeration tank.  This
gets  around   the  high  initial  oxygen  demand  if  all  of  the
wastewater enters at  the head of  the aeration tank.

OPERATIONAL POINTS

    The  effluent  from the  secondary  clarifier  should  look
clear  and  attractive.  To  get  a  good  effluent,   the  sludge
blanket should be  in the  lower half of the clarifier.   You  do
not  have  a  good  effluent  if it  looks  cloudy   or  if  it  has
noticeable solids in  it.

                               81

-------
    If  you  are  to  get  a good  effluent,  then you  have  to
monitor and  control  settleability, the  solids  level,  and  the
dissolved oxygen level.

    The following tests should be  performed  regularly:

    1.  Influent: B.O.D.;  ph
    2.  Mixed Liquor: SS,  D.O.; settling
    3.  Return Sludge: SS
    4.  Clarifier: Sludge  Blanket  Depth
    5.  Effluent: B.O.D.;  SS; D.O.

    Settleability;  The  sludge  has   to  have   good  settling
properties if you expect a good effluent.  The sludge should be
fairly dense so that enough can be pumped  back  to the  aeration
tank.  The  sludge  blanket  should be in  the  lower half  of  the
tank.

    In  a  well operated  plant,  the  sludge volume  index (SVI)
can be  as  low as  50.  But if  SVI  values  are  around 200,  the
sludge settling characteristics are quite  poor.  If  it  gets  any
worse, you can expect a lot of sludge  in the plant  effluent.

    Another  good way of finding out about  the settleability of
your  sludge  is  to  watch it  as  it settles.   You   might,  for
example,   check  every   five   minutes   during   the  30-minute
settling test. A good sludge settles fairly  rapidly during  the
first ten  minutes.  It  will compact uniformly, and  has a clear
liquid above the  sludge.  After ten  minutes, the settling rate
drops. If  a sludge  acts  like this,  you can expect to   get  a
reading that will give an  SVI of 100 to  150.

    If you have  a very fast  settling sludge,  you  will  notice
fast  settling  during the  first five minutes of  the 30-minute
settling test, and  then  the1 settling rate drops. This kind of
sludge settles  so quickly that  it  leaves  behind  a pin-point
floe.  This  pin-point floe will not settle and  will end up in
the effluent.  A  very fast settling sludge  could be due to  a
low F/M ratio.  What you might  consider  doing if you  run into
this problem is lower the  MLSS level.

    A  slow  settling  sludge  will  settle  at   a  very   slow,
constant rate  during the time of  the  30-minute  settling test.
A slow  settling  sludge usually has  an SVI value greater than
200. The probable problem  with this kind of  sludge  is  that  the
F/M ratio  is too high. To solve  the  problem,  you  should  try
for a higher MLSS level.

    Another  fast  way  of  checking  the  settleability   of  the
sludge is  to check  the  depth of  the sludge  blanket.   If  the
sludge  is  in the   lower  half  of  the  clarifier,  then  you
probably have  a  good settling sludge. This  should  be  checked
daily,  so   that  you  realize  when there  are  changes   in  the
depth. If the blanket is rising, you will  have  time to  correct
the situation before the sludge gets  to  the  top.


                               82

-------
    The  most  common  cause  of   a  rising  sludge  blanket  is
hydraulic overloading. If you are overloaded  and  if  the SVI is
about  50  to  100,  then you  must reduce  the  flow through  the
clarifier.

    Solids  level;  By  solids  level,  we  are  referring to  the
amount of solids in the mixed liquor.  The  purpose of  the mixed
liquor  suspended  solids  test  is  to measure  the  amount  of
active  microorganisms in  the aeration  tank.  Particularly  w6
are concerned  about  the  active  microorganisms.  The MLSS  test
measures   a   number   of    other    things    besides    active
microorganisms.  It is  more  accurate  to  do  a  mixed  liquor
volatile suspended solids (MLVSS) test,  because  this  test does
not record  the inorganic suspended solids.   In  any  case,  the
MLSS concentration in the  aeration  tank should be kept  at  the
same  level  as  long  as  there   is  not  great  change  in  the
strength of  the wastewater.

    The  best  mixed  liquor  suspended  solids  concentration  is
the one which  produces a  good effluent. You  should  experiment
to find the  best MLSS concentration for  your  plant.

    Oxygen level: The D.O.  level should  be at least  2  mg/1.  If
it is  any lower,  protozoa  will  have  difficulty growing,  and
there  will  be  an  increase  in  the  number  of  filamentous
organisms.  Turbulence caused by trying to  get   the  dissolved
oxygen higher  than 2  mg/1  wastes energy and  might hinder floe
formation.

    Usually  the  D.O.  level  will  be  lowest at the  inlet  end of
the  tank  and  highest  at  the outlet,  with some  areas  of poor
mixing  and  low D.O.   Also,  when  influent  loads  are high,  the
D.O. will be low.

    The  D.O.  level  should  be   checked  at  the  same  location
twice  each  shift.  These  readings  will  let   you  know if  your
D.O. concentration is what  it  should be. If the D.O.  is  too
low,  you could  increase  the amount  of  air going  into  the
aeration tank, use extra aeration tanks, or  try  operating at a
lower MLSS level.

    Even with  a good D.O. in  the aeration  tank,  you  will still
need aeration  so that the contents  of  the  tank are well mixed.
Poor  mixing  will  mean  low  D.O.  and  maybe  even   anaerobic
conditions  in some  part  of the aeration  tank.  Also,  there
might be sludge settling out  in  these  areas.

    When you look at  the  tank,  there  should not  be  any "dead"
areas, or areas where there  is no mixing.
                               83

-------
Training Sample 10
"A Prototype for Development of Routine Operational Procedures
for   the   pH  Determination  of   Wastewater  and  Wastewater
Treatment Plant Effluents"
INSTRUCTIONAL PACKAGE WORKSHEET
National Training Center
Municipal Permits and Operations Division
Office of Water Program Operations
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
GUIDELINES FOR INSTRUCTIONAL PACKAGE WORKSHEET

SUBJECT MATTER: pH Determination

UNIT  OF  INSTRUCTION:  pH  Determination  of  Wastewater   and
Wastewater Treatment Plant Effluents

LESSON NUMBER: 1 of 1

ESTIMATED TIME: 2 hours

JUSTIFICATION FOR THIS OBJECTIVE:  The learner should know  how
to  set  up,  calibrate,  and  use  a  pH  meter  for   the  pH
determination  of wastewater  and  wastewater  treatemnt plant
effluents.

ENTRY LEVEL BEHAVIOR:

A.  Instructional Objective

    1.  Terminal Behavior  - The  learner will determine the pH
        of  several  standard solutions  and  typical  samples of
        treatment plant effluents.

    2.  Conditions  - The  learner will  have  the  use  of   the
        attached  CH.pH.  BMP.1.9.73  and  all  chemicals   and
        equipment listed in it.

    3.  Accepted   performance  -   Acceptable   technique   in
        performing   the   test  will  be   determined   by   the
        instructor.


B.  Instructional Resources

    1.  Available Media  -  XT-69,  Slide/Tape  Unit  "ph Meter -
        Lab Operation." OT-11, Overhead Transparencies  - 7.

    2.  Suggested Media -

C.  Instructional Approach (Sequencing)

    1.  Discussion of the various types of available pH meters
        by the instructor.
                               84

-------
2.   Distribution   of   pre-instructional   quiz   to    all
    participants.

3.   Discussion  of the  operation  of  a  pH  meter  by  the
    instructor.

4.   Showing   of   A/V  unit   XT-69   pH  Determination   of
    Wastewater and Wastewater Treatment  Plant Effluents.

5.   Laboratory exercise involving set  up,  calibration,  and
    use of  pH meter.  Learner will use two prepared buffer
    solutions for calibration and will determine  the  pH of
    two  prepared   buffer  solutions  and   three   typical
    samples of treatment  plant effluents.

6.   Critique  of the laboratory exercise  by the  instructor.

7.   Distribution  of   post   instructional   quiz   to   all
    participants.

8.   Review and grading of  pre and post quizzes.
                            85

-------
Training Sample 11
"Unit 11: Activated Sludge, Instructor Notebook"
TROUBLESHOOTING 0 & M PROBLEMS IN WASTEWATER TREATMENT
FACILITIES
NTOTC
Cincinnati, Ohio  45268
December 1979
Lesson 3 of 14 lessons
Recommended Time:  25 minutes
    Purpose:   There are  several  variations  of  the activated
sludge process.   The  most frequently used process var  iations
are conventional, contact stabilization, extended aeration  and
step feed  activated sludge.   The troubleshooter may encounter
any  of  the variations  during  his/her  technical  assistance
efforts.   Hence,  the  troubleshooter must be familiar with  the
design   and  operating    characteristics   of  each   process
variation.

    Trainee Entry Level  Behavior:   The  trainee  should  have
achieved the learning objectives specified for Unit 11,  Lesson
2, before  beginning Unit  11, Lesson  3.

    Trainee Learning  Objectives:   At  the  conclusion  of this
lesson,  the trainee will  be able to:

    1.    Using  references  in  the Trainee  Notebook,  describe
         and    compare    the    design    and   operational
         characteristics   of   the   major  variations  of  the
         activated sludge  process  and explain  how a change  in
         operating mode  could be  used to  solve  an activated
         sludge process control problem.

    2.    Cite   examples   from   his/her   experience    which
         illustrate  how mode  change  has   been used  or  could
         have been   used to solve an  operational problem.
    Instructional Approach:   Illustrated lecture with  trainee
discussion.

    Lesson Schedule:   The 25 minutes allocated to  this  Lesson
should be scheduled as follows:

    TIME               SUBJECT

     0 -  2 minutes     Introduce Lesson
     2-20 minutes     Activated Sludge Process  Variations
    20 - 25 minutes     Examples of Mode Change In  Process
                          Troubleshooting
                               86

-------
    Trainee Materials Used in Lesson:

    1.   Trainee  Notebook,   page  Til.3.1,  "Activated  Sludge
        Process    Variations,    Design     and    Operating
        Parameters."

    2.   Field   Manual   for   Performance   Evaluation   and
        Troubleshooting  at  Municipal  Wastewater  Treatment
        Facilities, page 56-57.

    Instructor Materials Used in Lesson:

    1.   Instructor Notebook,  Unit  11,  Lesson 3, pages 11.3.1-
        11.3.9.

    2.   Slides 179.2/11.3.1 - 179.2/11.3.6.

    Instructor  Materials  Recommended  for  Development:    The
instructor should be prepared to cite one or two examples from
his/her experience to  illustrate the use  of  activated sludge
mode variation as  a  troubleshooting  or  operational control
tool.

    Additional Instructor References:

    1.   Metcalf   and   Eddy,   Inc.,   Wastewater  Engineering
        Treatment  Disposal  Reuse,   Chapters   9   and   10,
        McGraw-Hill  Book   Co.,   New  York,  NY  (2nd   edition,
        1979).

    2.   Stewart,  M.J.,  "Activated  Sludge  Process Variations.
        The Complete Spectrum," Article in 3 parts, Water and
        Sewage  Works,  lll(RN),  pp.  R241-R262  (November 30,
        1964).

    Classroom Set-Up:  As specified in Unit 11, Lesson 1, page
11.1.4.
                               87

-------
 Lesson Outline

 I.   Introduce Lesson (2 minutes)

     A.  Reason for Lesson

         1.   Many variations to activated sludge process are
             used

         2.   Troubleshooters may encounter any of the
             variations

         3.   Troubleshooters must be familiar with design and
             operation of all process variations

     B.  Lesson Objectives

         1.   Review design and operational parameters for
             activated sludge process variations

         2.   Discuss use of mode change as an operational
             or troubleshooting tool

         3.   Cite examples showing use of mode change as a
             problem solving tool

     C.  Refer class to

         1.   Trainee Notebook, page Til.3.1  which lists
             parameters for activated sludge process
             variations

         2.   Field Manual for Performance Evaluation and
             troubleshooting at Municipal Wastewater Treatment
             Facilities, pages 56-57 which present schematic
             diagrams of process variations

                 Key  Points & Instructor Guide

                 Use Slide  179.2/11.3.1
                 Slide  179.2/11.3.1 is a blank

II.  Activated Sludge Process Variations (18 minutes)

     A.  Conventional Activated Sludge Process

         1.   Hydraulic  and  sludge detention times are  solely
             dependent  on influent flow rate and return sludge
             flow rate.  Solids can accumulate  only  in the
             aeration basin or final clarifier.  There  is
             limited sludge storage capability.
                                 88

-------
    2.   Hence, a  conventional system  operating  near the
        upper  limits  of  the  loading  ranges  may  not  be
        able to absorb shock loads, organic or hydraulic

    3.   Similarly,   a  conventional   system  which  is
        under-loaded  may  produce  over  oxidized  sludges
        and nitrified effluents which cause clarification
        problems.

        Key Points & Instructor Guide

            Use Slide 179.2/11.3.2
            Slide 179.2/11.3.2 is a schematic flow
            diagram of the conventional plug flow
            activated sludge process

            Note to Instructor:  The flow schematic  shows
            the WAS flow returned to the primary
            clarifier which is a common design for
            conventional systems.  Better design practice
             is  to avoid wasting to the primary clarifier
            and waste directly  to  the  solids  handling and
            disposal system because
            1.  Reduce load on primary clarifier and
                aeration system
            2.  Anoxic  conditions  in  primary  clarifier
                promote  released of phosphorous which has
                been  accumulated by the  activated  sludge
                and hence recycle of phosphorus through
                the system.
B.  Contact Stablization, Two-Stage Aeration or Sludge
    Reaeration

    1.   Differentiate  between contact  stabilization (30
        to  60  min.  contact time),  two-stage aeration (90
        to  180 min. contact time) and  conventional  system
        with  sludge  reaeration  (4    to  8 hr.   contact
        time).

    2.   The  reareation  basin   permits  accumulation  of
        sludge  under  aeration.     This   permits  some
        flexibility   in  control  of   sludge  aeration,
        permits accumulation of  sludge to increase' sludge
        inventory and  reduce  F/M,  and  provides  a  sludge
        buffer  to  prevent  total   solids   washout  under
        temporary  severe   hydraulic  overload  conditions
        (storm water after a storm).

    3.   Contact time  of sludge with wastewater may limit
        BOD removal.  System normally  used where influent
        BOD is colloidal in nature
                           89

-------
    4.  Note  that  many  processes  designed  as   contact
        stabilization   actually  operate   as  two-stage
        aeration  plants or  as  conventional  plants with
        sludge reaeration because contact times exceed  60
        minutes  and  stabilization  times   exceed   eight
        hours.   This  is caused by flow  rates being much
        less  than  design   flow  at  newly   constructed
        plants.   Such  underloaded  plants  tend  to have
        very  old,  over-oxidized  sludges   which   produce
        turbid  effluents.    Problem  solution   at  such
        plants   may   be   to   convert    operation   to
        conventional  or   extended  aeration  modes   by
        changing flow patterns.

            Key Points & Instructor  Guide

            Use Slide 179.2/11.3.3
            Slide   179.2/11.3.3  is  a   schematic  flow
            diagram of a contact stabilization process

            Comment on problems caused by not  having a
            primary clarifier.
C.  Extended Aeration

    1.  Characterized  by  low  F/M  and  stable  rapidly
        settling sludge.

    2.  Clarifiers  are  usually  designed for relatively
        low surface  loadings  (200-400 gpd/ft2) resulting
        in fairly  good  clarification.   Return rates are
        high (100% of influent flow).

    3.  Usually  produce  a  fully  nitrified  or partially
        nitrified  effluent.   High  return  rate  prevents
        denitrification in final clarifier.

    4.  Effluent is  usually  turbid  because  of ashing and
        the  poor   clarification  achieved   by   rapidly
        settling sludges.

    5.  Very good BOD removals (95%+).

    6.  Resistant   to   shock  loads   because  of   large
        aeration volume (18-24 hour detention  time).
                           90

-------
            Key Points & Instructor Guide

            Use Slide 179.2/11.3.4
            Slide 179.2/11.3.4 is a schematic flow
            diagram of an extended aeration facility

            Comment on problems caused by not having a
            primary clarifier

D.   Step Feed

    1.  Use  step  feed   diagram   to   illustrate  how  mode
        change can be used in problem solving.

    2.  Step  feed  can  be  varied  from conventional   to
        contact mode. Use slide to show  how this change  is
        accomplished.

    3.  By  increasing  or decreasing  the tank volume used
        for  sludge  reaeration  the  sludge   inventory  and
        sludge  aeration  time  can  be  varied   over  wide
        ranges.

    4.  Conditions   which   might  indicate   mode  change
        (assume   that   system    is   being   operated    in
        conventional mode before  change  is affected):
        a.  Sudden increase in hydraulic  load  (storm water
            run-off)  -  change to  contact  mode to protect
            sludge inventory.

        b.  Sludge begins  to settle  slowly and RR begins
            to increase - change to sludge  reaeration mode
            to   increase   sludge   inventory  and  sludge
            aeration  time.  Cause  sludge  to  become  more
            stable, settle faster  and lower  RR.

        c.  Troubleshooter  may  see  system  as  an extreme
            problem - very  slow settling  sludge  spilling
            over  weirs  or  severely  over-oxidized sludge
            which  has  deflocculated  and   losing  excess
            solids. Mode  changes  offer  quick response  to
            correct these conditions.

            Key Points & Instructor Guide

            Use Slide 179.2/11.3.5
            Slide 179.2/11.3.5 is  a schematic  flow diagram
            of a step feed activated sludge  plant
                           91

-------
E.  Other Variations

    1.  Complete Mixing

        a.  Complete   mixing   provides   some  protection
            against "shock" or "slug" loads.

        b.  Operating parameters

            1)  F/M:  0.2-0.6 #BOD5/#MVLSS/day

            2)  Aerator Loading:  50-120 #BOD5/1000 ft3

            3)  MLSS:  3000-6000 mg/1

            4)  Detention Time:  3-5 hours

            5)  MCRT:  5-15 days

            6)  Return sludge flow rate:  25-100% of
                influent

        c.  Higher  loadings  tend   to  produce  a  slower
            settling  sludge  than  conventional  processes
            but otherwise the operation is  similar.

    2.  Oxidation Ditch-an extended  aeration  plant with an
        "oval  doughnut"   aeration   basin  configuration.
        Brush aerators  are  used to   circulate mixed liquor
        around  the aeration  basin.    Sometimes  called a
        "Dutch Ditch" or "Race Track".

    3.  Tapered aeration - a conventional  plug flow  plant
        with the air  application  tapered  from the head of
        the  plant  (high  oxygen  demand  zone  and  higher
        aeration  rate) to  the effluent  end of  the  tank
        (low oxygen demand zone and  lower aeration rate).

            Key Points & Instructor  Guide

            Use Slide  179.2/11.4.5
            Slide  179.2/11.4.5 is a schematic  diagram of
            the complete mixing activated sludge process

            Use Slide  179.2/11.3.6
            Slide  179.2/11.3.6  is a  blank

            Refer  class to  Field Manual   for  Performance
            Evaluation  and  Troubleshooting  at Municipal
            Wastewater   Treatment   Facilities,   page  57,
                            92

-------
III.  Examples  of Mode  Change  for  Process  Trouble  shooting (5
      minutes)

      A.  Ask  class  to  cite  examples  from  their  experience  of
          mode    changes   used    for   process    control    or
          troubleshooting.

      B.  Discuss class  inputs

      C.  Instructor  should  be  prepared  to  cite  examples  if
          class  does not  offer  examples.

              Key Points  &  Instructor Guide

              Example of  Mode  Change  for Process Troubleshooting
              and Operational  Control.   (Example is  based on the
              experiences of  the Operational Technology  Branch,
              National   Training   and  Operational   Technology
              Center,   U.S.  Environmental  Protection   Agency,
              Cincinnati,  Ohio).

               1.  Plant  design  is  about 2  MGD

               2.  Plant  has two  aeration  basins  which   can  be
                  operated

                  a.  In  series,  plug flow

                  b.  In  parallel

                  c.  One tank on-line, one  tank off-line

                  d.  One tank as  "Contact  basin1'  and one  tank
                      as  "reaeratlon  basin"

              3.  Large  portion of raw waste comes  from  a large
                  bakery  which  discharges  a  high  carbohydrate
                  waste  with high  grease and oil content.

              4.  Plant   has  constant  slow  settling  (bulking)
                  sludge   problems  when  aeration   basins   are
                  operated  in  series  or  in parallel.    Solids
                  cannot  be retained  in the  system.

              5.  By  operating with  one  tank  as  a  contact  tank
                  and the other as  a  reaeration  tank,  the solids
                  could  be retained  and  stabilized.   However,
                  prolonged operation  in  this  mode  resulted  in
                  over-oxidation  of the sludge  producing a  fast
                  settling  sludge which left  a  turbid  effluent
                  which  exceeded  TSS  standards.
                                 93

-------
6.   Plant personnel were  taught to monitor sludge
    settling  characteristics  and  to   switch   the
    plant from  the  "reaeration operating mode" to
    an operating mode  with the  aeration tanks in
    parallel  when   sludge   settling   began   to
    increase.   As   settling  rates  became slower,
    the   plant    was   switched   back   to    the
    "reaeration" mode.

7.   The plant operated for over a year using mode
    change   to    control   sludge   quality    and
    consistently produced a  high quality effluent
    which exceeded  NPDES permit requirements.
                  94

-------
Training Sample 12
"Unit 11: Activated Sludge, Instructor Notebook"
TROUBLESHOOTING 0 & M PROBLEMS IN WASTEWATER TREATMENT
FACILITIES
NTOTC
Cincinnati, Ohio  45268
December 1979
Lesson 7 of 14 lessons
Recommended Time:  90 minutes
    Purpose:    Four  major   process   control   decision  making
tools,  F/M,  MCRT,  Sludge Settleability  and  RR,  are used  in
activated    sludge    process    control,    evaluation     and
troubleshooting.  Many operators  and  troubleshooters  routinely
use only one or  two of  these tools and,  therefore, attempt  to
control  the  process based on limited or partial  information.
The  problem solving exercise  in  this  lesson  requires  the
trainee  to  solve   a  generalized  process   control  problem,
identify the possible causes of the  problem,  describe how  the
actual   problem   cause   would  be  determined   and   recommend
corrective actions  for  each possible cause  identified.    The
exercise forces  the trainee  to look at the interrelationships
between  the various  process  control decision  making tools.

    Trainee  Entry   Level  Behavior:    Trainees  should  have
achieved  the  learning   objectives   specified   for   Unit  11,
Lessons  1-6 before beginning  this lesson.

    Trainee Learning Objectives:   At the  conclusion of this
lesson,  the trainee  will  be  able  to:

    1.    Given  design   information  about  a  model   activated
sludge treatment plant, information that  a  change  has occurred
in one of the parameters  F/M, MCRT, Sludge  Settleability  or RR
and using  Trainee Notebook  references and class  notes, list
all  possible   causes of  the observed  change  in  the process
control  parameter,  describe  the expected  change   in   other
process  control  parameters   which  would  confirm each possible
cause  as  the  most  likely  cause  and  list   the  recommended
process  control  responses  to  each  possible  cause  of  the
observed change  in  the process  control parameter.

    2.   When  called upon by  the instructor,  report his/her
findings   for   the  given   conditions   and   justify his/her
recommendations  for  process  control responses.

    3.   Using  class notes  and  Trainee  Notebook references,
explain  why it  is  necessary  to consider  concurrent changes  in
at least four  parameters, F/M,  MCRT,  Sludge  Settleability  and
RR, when evaluating  an  activated  sludge  system  to identify
problems and their probable  causes.
                               95

-------
    Instructional Approach:   Trainee problem  solving  in work
groups of four trainees and discussion of trainee findings.

    Lesson Schedule:  The  90  minutes  allocated to this lesson
should be scheduled as follows:

     TIME               SUBJECT

     0-10 minutes     Instructor Introduces the Problem
    10 - 45 minutes     Trainee Problem Solving
    45 - 85 minutes     Trainees Report Findings
    85 - 90 minutes     Instructor Summarized Lesson

    Trainee Materials Used in Lesson:

    1.  Trainee  Notebook,  page  Til.7.1,  "Activated  Sludge
        Process  Troubleshooting,   Problem Identification  and
        Process Control Response - Problem Statement."

    2.  Trainee  Notebook,  page  Til.7.4,  "Activated  Sludge
        Process  Troubleshooting,   Problem Identification  and
        Process Control Response - Instructions for Completing
        Worksheet."

    3.  Trainee Notebook,  page  Til.7.5  - Til.7.12, "Activated
        Sludge Process Troubleshooting, Problem Identification
        and Process Control Response-Worksheets.

    4.  All trainee  references  and Trainee Notebook materials
        used in Unit 11, Lessons 1-6.

    Instructor Materials Used in Lesson:

    1.  Instructor   Notebook,   Unit   11,   Lesson   7,   pages
        11.7.1 -11.7.9.

    2.  Instructor   Notebook,   pages   Hll.7.1   -  Hll.7.37,
        "Activated  Sludge  Process  Troubleshooting,  Problem
        Identification  and  Process Control Response"   (to be
        reproduced   and  distributed   to  trainees   at   the
        conclusion of the lesson.)

    Instructor Materials Recommended for Development:  None

    Additional Instructor References:  As specified in Unit
    11, Lessons 1-6.

    Classroom Set-Up:

    1.  Lesson  Introduction:  As specified in Unit 11,
        Lessons 1.
                              96

-------
2.   Trainee Problem  Solving:   One  separate breakout  room
    for  each  trainee  workgroup   so  that  individual  work
    groups have a  private  quiet  area in which to meet and
    discuss the work group's assigned problem.

3.   Trainees Report  Findings:    As  specified  in  Unit 11,
    Lesson 1.
                           97

-------
Lesson Outline

I.  Instructor Introduces the Problem (10 minutes)

    A.  Introduction

        1.  Have   discussed  several   process   control   and
            evaluation tools and their significance.

            a.  F/M

            b.  MCRT

            c.  Sludge Settleability

            d.  RR

        2.  Now its  time to  apply what  has been  covered  to
            activated sludge process troubleshooting.

        3.  Do this  by  developing  a series of process  control
            and troubleshooting guides.

                Key Points & Instructor Guide

                Refer class to Trainee Notebook,  pages
                T11.7.1-T11.7.11 for a statement  of  the
                problem, instructions and worksheets.

    B.  Have class read Problem Situation

        1.  Refer    class    to    Trainee    Notebook,     page
            T11.7.1-T11.7.2 for  a  statement of the  situation.
            Trainee   Notebook   pages   Til.7.1-T11.7.11   are
            included in the Instructor Notebook.

        2.  Emphasize   that   the   situation  is  designed  to
            provide  a  maximum of  process  control  flexibility
            which   is   available   to   the   operator   and
            troubleshooter.  The specifics  of plant  design are
            really immaterial to this problem.

        3.  The objective is to provide specific  guidelines to
            the operator on how to  correctly  use  the available
            process  flexibility  to achieve and  maintain  good
            effluent quality.

    C.  Instructions for Completing the Problem Worksheets

        1.  Refer class  to Trainee Notebook,  pages  Til. 7.4 -
            Til.7.11,       "Activated       Sludge      Process
            Troubleshooting,   Problem   Identification    and
            Process  Control  Response  Worksheets"   and  page
            Til.7.3    for    "Instructions    for    Completing
            Worksheets".    These  pages  are  included  in  the
            Instructor Notebook.

                               98

-------
    2.   Review instructions and worksheets with  the
        class.

            Key Points & Instructor Guide

            Instructor should refer to pages
            H11.7.1-H11.7.37 which are the completed
            worksheets to gain a better understanding  of
            the expected trainee responses to the
            worksheet exercise.

D.   Make Worksheet Assignments

    1.   Assign worksheets to trainee workgroups  for
        completion.

        a.  Trainee Group 1, page Til.7.4, F/M Increasing.

        b.  Trainee Group 2, page Til.7.5, F/M Decreasing.

        c.  Trainee Group 3, page Til.7.6, MCRT
            Increasing.

        d.  Trainee Group 4, page Til.7.7, MCRT
            Decreasing.

        e.  Trainee Group 5, page Til.7.8, MLSS  RR
            Increasing.

        f.  Trainee Group 6, page Til.7.9, MLSS  RR
            Decreasing.

        g.  Trainee Group  7,  page Til.7.10, Settling  Rate
            Increasing.

        h.  Trainee Group 8,  page Til.7.11, Settling  Rate
            Decreasing.

    2.   Each  work  group  should  complete  its  assigned
        worksheet  by  working  as a   team.    Stress   the
        importance of discussion within the group.

    3.   Work groups will have about 35 minutes to complete
        their assigned worksheets.

    4.   Inform work groups that when the class reconvenes,
        each  work  group will  report  its  findings  to  the
        class and justify its recommendations.
                          99

-------
      E.  Direct Work Groups to Their Work Areas

          1.  Separate  work areas,  preferably  separate  rooms,
              should be provided for each work group  so  that  the
              group may  freely discuss the assigned  problem  and
              develop   a   group   concensus   solution   without
              interfering with the work of another  group.

          2.  Assign  a   work   area   to  each  group  and  give
              directions for finding the assigned work area.

      F.  Answer any questions about the exercise before
          sending groups to their work areas.

 II.  Trainee Problem Solving  (35 minutes)

      A.  Circulate  among work  groups to monitor  progress  and
          answer questions.

      B.  Review  each  work group's   product  periodically  and
          redirect their efforts as necessary.

      C.  If  a  group completes  the  assigned  work sheet  early,
          assign a second work sheet to the group.

      D.  Periodically inform groups of time remaining.

      E.  Reconvene groups  in  the  main classroom  at  the end  of
          the 35 minute work period.

III.  Trainees Report Findings (40 minutes)

      A.  Reconvene class in main classroom.

      B.  Have work groups  report their findings.

          1.  Call on groups sequentially, beginning  with
              Group 1, to report findings  (allocate about 8
              minutes per group).

              a.  Group  1 - F/M Increasing

              b.  Group  2 - F/M Decreasing

              c.  Group  3 - MCRT Increasing

              d.  Group  4 - MCRT Decreasing

              e.  Group  5 - MLSS RR Increasing

              f.  Group  6 - MLSS RR Decreasing

              g.  Group  7 - Settling Rate  Increasing

              h.  Group  8 - Settling Rate  Decreasing
                                 100

-------
2.   Encourage class  discussion as each possible  cause
    is presented.

3.   Using the suggested solutions on pages
    Hll.7.1-H11.7.37, challenge groups to justify
    their recommendations as appropriate.

4.   Note that there is overlap and commonality between
    the  correct  responses  for  the  eight  observed
    conditions given in the worksheets, e.g., a rising
    F/M will  cause  a decreasing  settling rate and  an
    increasing MLSS RR which  could  be associated with
    a  decreasing  MCRT.     Therefore,  several  groups
    should   identify   the   same   probable   causes,
    confirmation  observations  and  control  responses.
    Use this  information  to draw several groups into
    the discussion.

5.   Distribute solutions to the class after discussion
    is complete.

        Key Points & Instructor Guide

        School Solutions
        Refer to pages Hll.7.1-H11.7.7

        Refer to pages Hll.7.8-H11.7.13

        Refer to pages Hll.7.14-H11.7.15

        Refer to pages Hll.7.16-H11.7.19

        Refer to pages Hll.7.20-H11.7.23

        Refer to pages Hll.7.24-H11.7.28

        Refer to pages Hll.7.29-H11.7.33

        Refer to pages Hll.7-34-H11.7.37

        Reproduce   pages   Hll.7.1    -   Hll.7.37   in
        sufficient  quantity   to   distribute  to   the
        class.
                       101

-------
A.  Using  one  solution  sheet,  page  Til.7.4,   the  F/M
    Increasing  case,  point  out  that  there  were    many
    things  which  could  have  caused  this   observation.
    Point  out  that  the  correct process  control  response
    was  different  for each  possible  cause of  the  problem
    although several other control  responses  could  be made
    to  reverse  the observed increase  in  F/M if  this were
    the  only  information  available  to the  operator  and
    troubleshooter.

B.  Point  out   that  by  looking  at  the   four  control
    parameters, F/M,  MCRT,  Sludge  Settleability and  MLSS
    RR,  together  'it  is  fairly easy  to eliminate  several
    possible causes  and narrow the list  to  the one  most
    likely cause.

C.  After  identifying  the  cause of the problem,  a  correct
    process control response decision can be  made.

D.  Emphasize the  importance of looking  at  all  available
    information about  the  process before making  a  process
    control   decision   and    changing   process   control
    variables.   Incorrect control responses  can be  made if
    only one parameter is considered.   This may cause more
    problems that it solves.

E.  Recommend that routine monitoring of F/M, MCRT,  Sludge
    Settleability   and  process   respiration   rates   be
    considered for all activated  sludge plants.  If  it is
    practical  (personnel  and  dollar  resources  available)
    to   institute   a   comprehensive   process    control
    management  system,  the  process  can be  controlled  to
    produce good effluents consistently.
                          102

-------
Training Sample 13
"Unit 11: Activated Sludge, Trainee Notebook"
TROUBLESHOOTING 0 & M PROBLEMS IN WASTEWATER TREATMENT
FACILITIES
NTOTC
Cincinnati, Ohio  45268
December 1979
                   Trainee Notebook Contents

Problem Identification and Process Control
    Response - Problem Statement	Til. 7.1

Flow Schematic for Use in Problem Solving	Til. 7. 3

Problem Identification and Process Control
    Response - Instructions for Completing
    Worksheet	Til. 7. A

Problem Identification and Process Control
    Response - Worksheets	Til. 7. 5
                             103

-------
           Activated Sludge Process Troubleshooting

      Problem Identification and Process Control Response


                       Problem Statement
    While attending  a  local operator association meeting,  you
are introduced to John Schmitt, superintendent  at a  new 10 MGD
step feed activated sludge plant.  John has heard that  you are
an expert in activated sludge  process control and asks  you to
help him  solve recurrent process  control problems  which  have
occurred at the  new  plant.    The  plant has  been in  operation
about  a  year  but  has  never  consistently  produced  a  good
effluent.

    John informs you that he  was  superintendent at  the  city's
old  trickling  filter  plant  which  was   replaced  by the  new
activated sludge plant about  a  year  ago.   John  confesses  that
he  knows very little  about  activated  sludge  treatment  and
process control.   Everything he knows about process  control in
the plant he got from the 0  &  M  manual  which was prepared by
the design firm as the new  plant  was constructed.    Because he
knows  little   about  activated  sludge,  John  has mechanically
followed the process  control  procedure outlined in  the 0  & M
manual  but  has never  been  able  to  get  the  plant   to  perform
properly.

    The plant  design flow is 10 MGD.  There are  separate storm
water and sewage collection systems.  The  raw sewage is  pumped
to  the  plant  headworks  from  a large  lift  station which  is
equipped with  one variable  speed  5000 gpm, one  constant speed
5000  gpm and  one  constant speed 3000  gpm  raw sewage  pumps
activated by level  controllers in the wet well.  Preliminary
treatment consists of bar screening,  comminution, grit  removal
and  flow measurment.    The  pretreated  waste  is  fed  to  two
circular primary  clarifiers.    The  primary effluent from  the
two  tanks   discharges  to  a  common   channel  which  feeds  the
aeration basin.   The"aeration basin  has  step feed  capability
at  the  quadrant  points  in  the  four pass  plug flow aeration
tank.   Mixed  liquor  is distributed to  two  circular  final
clarifiers.     The  final  clarifier  effluent  is  chlorinated
before  discharging to  the river.   The underflow from  the  two
clarifiers  discharges   to  a  common  return  sludge  wet  well.
There are  two  variable  speed 5000  gpm   return  sludge  pumps.
All  return  sludge  discharges  to  the  first quadrant   of  the
aeration basin.  Return  sludge flow  is metered,  and  the  return
sludge  flow can  be  varied from 1400 to  10,000  gpm.    Waste
activated sludge is  pumped  from the  return sludge wet well to
the primary clarifiers.   The waste  sludge pump is  a 1500 gpm
constant  speed  pump  activated  by  a  time  clock   mechanism.
There have been no problems in solids handling.
                              104

-------
    John informs you that  there  are  several  industries  in town
which discharge  to the  plant and  sometimes cause  relatively
large variations  in hydraulic and  organic load to  the  plant.
The average daily flow to  the plant  is  9.0 MGD.

    John  always   operates  the   plant  in   the   conventional
treatment mode with all  influent wastewater  and return  sludge
entering  the  first  quadrant  of  the  aeration  basin.   John
normally  operates  with a  constant  return sludge  flow rate  of
about 6  MGD and  only varies  the return  rate  if  the  sludge
blanket  in  the  final clarifier begins  to  fall  or rise.   A
constant volume of  sludge  is wasted  each day because the  waste
rate  has  not been changed  from the wasting  rate  set by the
engineer during plant start-up.

    John  tells   you  that   plant   performance   is  erratic.
Sometimes  the  sludge  bulks  and  washes  out  of  the  final
clarifiers.    Sometimes  the sludge separates very  well in the
final  clarifiers  but  leaves  a turbid  ashy  type  effluent.
Sometimes the  plant  produces a good  effluent but not  very
often.  John is upset because he had been told  that this  plant
would produce an  excellent effluent and consistently meet his
discharge permit  requirement of  20  mg/1 BOD and  20 mg/1 TSS.
But he can't seem  to make  the thing  work.

    John  tells you  that  he has  a well  equipped  laboratory and
a good lab technician who's  running  all the  tests  specified in
the 0 & M manual  and the  permit.   John knows that  these test
results should be used in  controlling the  plant  but he  doesn't
know what the test  results mean  or how to  use them.

    John  wants you to teach  him how  to make the  plant  work.
You decide to accept the job.

    To accomplish  the  task,  you decide  to develop a series  of
process control and troubleshooting charts as work  aids  which
John  can  use  to  help  him  interpret  his  process  control
laboratory data.

    You  will use   the  attached  worksheets,  pages  Til.7.5  -
Til.7.12  to  develop  the  process  control and  troubleshooting
charts.    You and  the  members of  your  workgroup  will  be
assigned  one worksheet  to  complete.   After  you  have completed
your assigned worksheet, you will present  the information from
your worksheet to  the class.
                               105

-------
COLLECTION
SYSTEMS—•
LIFT _. BAH
STATION SCREEN


	 CHAMBER

	 „ 'AR8HALL
FLUME
WASTE


1 , V 	 ^/ACTIVATED 8LODQF
1 ^ 	 -^ ' SLUDQE PUMP
/"~^N



    TO
CHLORINATION
                            T
T
         FLOW SCHEMATIC FOR USE IN PROBLEM SOLVING

-------
           Activated Sludge Process Troubleshooting

      Problem Identification and Process Control Response


             Instructions for Completing Worksheet
1.   Prepare  the  worksheet  in  the  context  of   the  problem
    statement,  i.e.,  a  very  flexible  plant design  which can
    accommodate many  different  process control adjustments in
    response to observed process conditions.

2.   A change is  observed  in one process  control  parameter as
    specified at the top of the worksheet.

3.   Possible Causes  of Observed  Condition.   Possible Cause:
    List all things which could have occurred in the system to
    cause the change  observed  in  the monitored parameter.  Be
    as  specific  as possible.   For  example, if  one possible
    cause for  the observed  condition is a  change in applied
    load, specify  the  ways  in which the  load  change   could
    occur.   Applied BOD load could  increase because (a)  the
    influent BOD  concentration increases with  flow remaining
    constant (b)   the  influent flow  rate  increases with the
    BOD concentration remaining constant,   (c)  both flow rate
    and  BOD concentration  increase,  (d)    an  internal   plant
    recycle stream is  returned to the aeration basin, etc.

    Observations and  Data  to Confirm  Cause:   What  additional
    observations and  tests would you  perform  to confirm this
    as  the  cause  of  the  problem  and what result  would you
    expect  to   see?    For  each possible  cause,  include the
    expected change  in  F/M,  MCRT,  Sludge  Settleability and
    MLSS RR as  your minimum entry in this column.

4.   Process  Control Response  to Observed Condition.  For each
    possible  cause  of  the  observed  condition,   enter the
    correct  process   control  response.     Process  control
    responses should  be considered  as immediate  or temporary
    (things to  do right now to solve an immediate  problem) and
    long  term   (things  to  be  done  which  will   correct the
    problem  and  prevent possible recurrence of  the problem).
    For  example,  suppose  the  sludge settling  rate decreases
    because of  organic overload and  the final clarifier sludge
    blanket  becomes  very  high and  solids   wash-out  from the
    clarifier is imminent.   Then  an immediate  response may be
    to  lower the  sludge  blanket  by  increasing  return   rate
    temporarily to prevent solids  wash-out, but the long term
    solution to  correct the problem may be to  reduce return
    sludge  rate  and   increase  solids inventory.    Be as  exact
    and  complete  as   possible  in  listing  process  control
    responses.
                               107

-------
        Pioblem
                       Stodge. ?loc.m Tiou.btiAkooti.ng
                            m and PIOC.UA Con&wt
                            Worksheet
PARAMETER MONITORED:  F/H                  CONDITION OBSERVED:

POSSIBLE CAUSES OF OBSERVE!? CONPITION:
                                                                  Increasing
          Possible Cause
                                          Observations and Data to Confirm Cause
1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

PROCESS CONTROL RESPONSE TO 08SERVEP CONDITION:
Possible
Cause
   1
   2
   3
   4
   5
            Immediate or Temporary Response
Long Term Corrective Action
                                 108

-------
Training Sample 1A
"Unit 11:  Activated Sludge, Instructor Handout"
TROUBLESHOOTING 0 & M PROBLEMS IN WASTEWATER TREATMENT
FACILITIES
NTOTC
Cincinnati, Ohio  45268
December 1979
                  Instructor Handout Contents
Problem Identification and Process Control
  Response - Answer Sheets  	 Hll.7.1 - Hll.7.37
                              109

-------
           Activated Sludge Process Troubleshooting

      Problem Identification and Process Control Response
PARAMETER MONITORED:  F/M
OBSERVED CONDITION:  F/M Increasing
POSSIBLE CAUSES OF OBSERVED CONDITION:

Observations and Data to Confirm Cause

1.  Settling rate - decreasing
    MLSS RR - increasing
    MCRT - constant or slowly increasing
    Solids Inventory - constant or slowly increasing
    Fed Sludge RR - increasing
    Influent Flow Rate - about the same
    Aeration Basin D.O. - decreasing

    Possible  Causes  -  Increased   organic   load  caused  by
    increased influent BOD concentration with little change in
    influent flow rate

2.  Settling rate - decreasing or no change
    MLSS RR - increasing or no change
    MCRT - constant or slowly increasing
    Solids Inventory - constant or slowly increasing
    Fed Sludge RR - increasing
    Influent Flow Rate - decreasing
    Aeration Basin D.O. - decreasing or about the same

    Possible  Causes  -  Increased   organic   load  caused  by
    increased  influent  BOD  concentration with  a decrease in
    influent flow rate

3.  Settling Rate - usually decreasing
    MLSS RR - increasing
    MCRT - constant or slowly increasing
    Solids Inventory - constant or slowly increasing
    Fed Sludge RR - about the same
    Influent Flow Rate - increasing
    Aeration Basin D.O. - decreasing

    Possible  Causes  -  Increased   organic   load  caused  by
    increase  in  influent   flow  rate  with  little  change in
    influent BOD concentration
                              110

-------
4.   Settling Rate - decreasing or no change
    MLSS RR - increasing or no change
    MCRT - Constant or slowly increasing
    Solids Inventory - constant or slowly increasing
    Fed Sludge RR - decreasing
    Influent Flow Rate - increasing
    Aeration Basin D.O. - decreasing or about the same

    Possible  Causes   —   Increased   organic  load  caused  by
    increase in influent flow rate with a decrease in influent
    BOD concentration

5.   Settling Rate - Decreasing
    MLSS RR - increasing
    MCRT - constant or slowly increasing
    Solids Inventory - constant or slowly increasing
    Fed Sludge RR - increasing
    Influent Flow Rate - increasing
    Aeration Basin D.O. - decreasing

    Possible  Causes   -   Increased   organic  load  caused  by
    increase in both influent BOD and influent flow rate

6.   Settling Rate - decreasing
    MLSS RR - increasing
    MCRT - constant or slowly increasing
    Solids Inventory - constant or slowly increasing
    Fed Sludge RR - about the same if sample collected before
      recycle stream enters the aeration system
                  - increasing if sample collected after
      recycle stream enters the aeration system
    Influent Flow Rate - about the same
    Aeration Basin D.O. - decreasing

    Possible  Causes   -   Increased   organic  load  caused  by
    internal plant recycles

7.   Settling Rate - decreasing
    MLSS RR - increasing
    MCRT - decreasing
    Solids Inventory - decreasing
    Fed Sludge RR - about the same
    Aeration Basin D.O. - increasing or about the same

    Possible Causes  - Decrease in  solids  inventory caused by
    excessive deliberate wasting
                              111

-------
8.  Settling Rate - decreasing
    MLSS RR - increasing
    MCRT - decreasing
    Solids Inventory - decreasing
    Fed Sludge RR - about the same
    Influent Flow Rate - about the same
    Aeration Basin D.O. - increasing or about  the  same

    Possible Causes  - Decrease  in  solids inventory caused  by
    excessive effluent suspended solids

9.  Settling Rate - no  change
    MLSS RR - no change
    MCRT - no change
    Solids Inventory - no change
    Fed Sludge RR - no change or increasing
    Influent Flow Rate - about the same
    Aeration Basin D.O. - about the same

    Possible Causes - Nitrification occurring  in BOD test  used
    to measure applied load
PROCESS CONTROL RESPONSE TO OBSERVED CONDITIONS:

Possible Cause 1

1.  Immediate or Temporary Response

    a.  Check final clarifier sludge blanket depth.

        1.  If the blanket is rising  rapidly with possibility
            of  solids   washout,   then  temporarily   increase
            return rate or waste rate to lower sludge  blanket.
            Reduce  return or waste rate  as soon  as  blanket
            can  be  retained  in  final  clarifier.     CAUTION:
            Increased  hydraulic  load  on clarifier  may  cause
            solids washout.  This action may cause slow sludge
            settling  problem  to  get  worse  before  long  range
            corrective actions affect process.  This  temporary
            response is a calculated risk!

        2.  If  the  sludge blanket is  not  out  of  control,
            implement long term corrective actions.

    b.  Check aeration basin D.O.   If D.O. is less than 1
        mg/1, increase air supply.
                               112

-------
2.   Long Term Corrective Action

    a.   When  sludge   blanket   can  be  retained  in    final
        clarifier, reduce return sludge flow rate-concentrates
        return sludge and increases aeration detention time.

    b.   Reduce deliberate wasting to increase solids inventory
        and sludge  aeration time.   Continue to  monitor F/M,
        sludge settleability and MLSS RR and balance system  to
        new conditions  of  solids  inventory and  MCRT to treat
        increased load.

    c.   If a and b don't work,  then

        1.  Increase   aeration   detention  time   by  placing
            additional aeration basins into service.

        2.  Increase  sludge detention  time by  converting  to
            sludge reaeration operating mode.

Possible Cause 2

1.   Immediate or Temporary Response

    (Same as possible cause 1 responses)

2.   Long Term Corrective Action

    a.   If  settling  rate  and  MLSS  RR  are  not  changing,
        continue  current   operating   practices  but  monitor
        settleability  and  MLSS RR frequently  and  respond  to
        any changes  which  occur because  of increased organic
        load.

    b.   If  settling   rate   is   decreasing  and  MLSS  RR   is
        increasing,   then  implement corrective  actions listed
        for possible cause  1.

Possible Cause 3

1.   Immediate or Temporary Response

    (Same as possible cause 1 responses)

2.   Long Term Corrective Actions

    (Same as possible cause 1 responses)
                              113

-------
Possible Cause 4

1.  Immediate or Temporary Response
         (Same as possible cause 1 responses)

2.  Long Term Corrective Actions

    (Same as possible cause 2 reponses)

Possible Cause 5

1.  Immediate or Temporary Response

    (Same as possible cause 1 responses)

2.  Long Term Corrective Actions

    Same as possible cause 1 responses.  Need  to  use
    additional aeration volume or sludge reaeration to  handle
    new load is more likely for these  influent  load
    conditions.

Possible Cause 6

1.  Immediate or Temporary Response
    a.  Same as possible cause 1 responses

    b.  Identify  source   of   internal  recycle   and   modify
        operations  creating the  internal recycle  to  eliminate
        or reduce the recycle, if possible

2.  Long Term Corrective Actions

    a.  Same as possible cause 1 responses

    b.  If  internal  recycles  cause  serious   problems  which
        interfere with  treatment of  influent  wastewater,  the
        recycles cannot be eliminated  and  the aeration system
        cannot be controlled by responses in a, then

        1.  Pre-treat  recycle  streams  before   returning  to
            aeration system;

        2.  Provide means  to equalize  recycle  loads  and bleed
            them into aeration system;

        3.  Pre-aerate  recycle  streams  before  returning  to
            aeration system;

        4.  Consider  and  evaluate  use  of  chemical  additives
            such as  coagulants  and coagulant  aids in aeration
            system    to    maintain    process    integrity.
                              114

-------
Possible Cause 7

1.  Immediate or Temporary Response

    (Same as possible cause 1 reponses)

2.  Long Term Corrective Actions

    a.  Decrease  waste  activated sludge  to  increase  solids
        inventory.  Monitor F/M and  MCRT and readjust wasting
        rate when parameters are  in optimum range.

    b.  Decrease   return  activated   sludge    flow   rate   to
        concentrate   return  and  increase   aeration   basin
        detention time

    c.  If a and b are not effective

        1.  Increase aeration volume in use

        2.  Use sludge reaeration mode of operation

Possible Cause 8

1.  Immediate or Temporary Response

    a.  Same as possible cause  1  responses

    b.  Check  and  evaluate  final  clarifier   operation  and
        design for possible problems

        1.  Sludge collection,  return or wasting systems  not
            operating properly

            a.  Rake  or collector  drive mechanism  broken  or
                shut off because  of torque overload

            b.  Broken chains

            c.  Missing flights or scrappers

            d.  Plugged collectors or pumps

            e.  Pumps not operating

        2.  Hydraulic overload

        3.  Solids overload

        4.  Improperly maintained clarifier weirs
                              115

-------
        5.   Unequal load distribution to multiple  clarifiers

        6.   Improperly designed clarifier


            a.   High velocity currents at weirs

            b.   Short circuiting

2.   Long Term Corrective Action

    a.   Same as possible cause 7 responses

    b.   Correct final clarifier deficiencies
        1.   Sludge  collection,  return or  wasting systems  not
            operating properly

            a.   Repair or reset

            b.   Repair or replace

            c.   Repair

            d.   Unplug collectors or pumps

            e.   Repair or reset pumps

        2.   Hydraulic overload

            a.   Put  additional  clarifiers   in   service,  if
                possible

            b.   Reduce   hydraulic   load   to   clarifier,  if
                possible

        3.   Solids overload

            a.   Put additional clarifiers in service

            b.   Reduce solids load to clarifier,  if possible

            c.   Take actions to produce faster  settling  solids
                (possible cause 7 responses)

        4.   Improperly maintained clarifier weirs

            (Check weirs for level and level if  necessary)
                              116

-------
        5.   Unequal load distribution to multiple clarifiers

            a.   Check weirs to verify that all clarifiers have
                same weir elevation.  Adjust as needed.

            b.   Check   inlet   and  effluent   structures  for
                obstructions - remove obstructions

            c.   Check and adjust flow distribution system

        6.   Improperly designed clarifier

            a.   High velocity currents at weirs
                1.   Check adequacy  of total weir  length.  Add
                    weirs if needed

                2.   Block   excess  weirs   which   may  cause
                    localized velocity currents

                3.   If   velocity   currents  caused   by  weir
                    placement  too  close  to  wall,  move weirs
                    away from wall

            b.   Short circuiting

                1.   Check and adjust weirs

                2.   Check adequacy  of inlet target baffles and
                    skirts.   Correct  target  baffles and skirt
                    deficiencies.

                3.   If inlet velocities are excessive,  provide
                    mechanism to dampen inlet velocities

                4.   Check for thermal stratification in
                    clarifier.  Eliminate cause of thermal
                    stratification.

Possible Cause 9

1.   Immediate or Temporary Response

    (None)

2.   Long Term Corrective Action

    a.   Continue operation  using  current  practices if  process
        is  performing well and there are no other problems
                               117

-------
b.  Check, evaluate  and  correct  BOD test procedure.   Most
    likely  cause  is  high  nitrifier  population  in  seed
    organisms used in BOD test

    1.   Change seed

    2.   Inhibit  nitrification in BOD test using alternate
        procedure

    NOTE:   This  problem  frequently  occurs in effluent BOD
    determination also

c.  Nitrification  in  influent BOD  test  may be desirable,
    and hence, this is not a problem.
                          118

-------
           PART III




Abstracted Reference Materials
             119

-------
TITLE       ACTIVATED SLUDGE.
AUTHOR      SCHROEDER, E. D.
CORP AUTH   CALIFORNIA UNIV., DAVIS.
AVAIL       JOURNAL WATER POLLUTION CONTROL  FEDERATION,  VOL 47
            NO 6, P 1261-1269, JUNE,  1975.  101  REF.
KEYWORDS    *REVIEWS,   *BIBLIOGRAPHIES,   *ACTIVATED   SLUDGE,
            *WASTE   WATER   TREATMENT,    INDUSTRIAL   WASTES,
            PHOSPHORUS,  NITROGEN,  NUTRIENT  REMOVAL,   DESIGN,
            OPERATIONS,  MATHEMATICAL MODELS,  AERATION,  WASTE
            TREATMENT, WATER POLLUTION  CONTROL,  PULP  WASTES,
            CONTROL, HEAVY METALS, BIOCHEMISTRY,  MICROBIOLOGY,
            TOXINS,   SLUDGE   TREATMENT,    SLUDGE   DISPOSAL,
            ECONOMICS, COSTS.
ABSTRACT    THE  1974  LITERATURE  ON  THE  TREATMENT  OF  WASTE
            WATERS   BY  THE   ACTIVATED   SLUDGE   PROCESS   IS
            REVIEWED.   TOPICS   DISCUSSED   INCLUDE:   PROCESS
            MODELS,  CONTROL,  AND  DESIGN   AND  OPERATION  OF
            ACTIVATED    SLUDGE    PLANTS;   MICROBIOLOGY    AND
            BIOCHEMISTRY  OF  THE  PROCESS;  REMOVAL  OF  HEAVY
            METALS AND EFFECTS OF TOXICANTS; INDUSTRIAL  WASTE
            WATER TREATMENT; AERATION;  NITROGEN  AND PHOPHORUS
            REMOVAL; SLUDGE THICKENING AND DISPOSAL; AND  COSTS
            OF  ACTIVATED  SLUDGE  PLANTS.  REFINERY,  PULP  AND
            PAPER, AND DISTILLERY WASTES ARE CITED AS  EXAMPLES
            OF  SOME  OF  THE  WASTE  MATERIALS   THAT  ARE  BEING
            TREATED   BY   THE   ACTIVATED   SLUDGE    PROCESS.
            (W1TT-1PC)

TITLE       ACTIVATED SLUDGE BASIC DESIGN  CONCEPTS.
AUTHOR      MCKINNEY, ROSS E.; OFERIEN,  WALTER  J.
CORP AUTH   KANSAS UNIV., LAWRENCE.
AVAIL       JOURNAL OF WATER POLLUTION CONTROL  FEDERATION,
            VOL 40, NO 11, PART 1, P  1831-1834, NOV  1968.
            16 REF.
IDEN        SCREENING,    PRIMARY    SEDIMENTATION,   SECONDARY
            SEDIMENTATION.
KEYWORDS    *ACTIVATED   SLUDGE,   *AERATION,  *DESIGN,   *WASTE
            WATER TREATMENT, HISTORY, MIXING, SETTLING BASINS,
            SLUDGE DISPOSAL.
ABSTRACT    THE DESIGN OF ACTIVATED SLUDGE SYSTEMS HAS EVOLVED
            SLOWLY  AND  PROGRESS  HAS  BEEN MADE LARGELY ON  AN
            EMPIRICAL  BASIS.  THIS  PAPER  PRESENTS  THE  BASIC
            DESIGN  CONCEPTS  FOR  A  MODERN ACTIVATED  SLUDGE
            SYSTEM  INCLUDING THE FOUNDATIONS  ON WHICH  THESE
            CONCEPTS   WERE   DEVELOPED.   DESIGN   PARAMETERS
            DEVELOPED  FOR CONVENTIONAL  AND  COMPLETELY  MIXED
            SYSTEMS INDICATE THAT AERATION WILL BE FROM  3  TO 8
            HOURS.  TOTAL MLSS WILL   RANGE  FROM  1500  TO  4000
            MG/L,  ORGANIC  LOADS  OF  0.5  TO  0.7  LB  BOD/LB
                               120

-------
            MICROBIAL  SOLIDS  WILL  YIELD  GOOD OPERATIONS,  AND
            DIFFUSED AERATION  OF 1000 CUBIC  OF  AIR PER  POUND
            OF BOD  REMOVED IS A SOUND PARAMETER. ALL ASPECTS
            OF ACTIVATED  SLUDGE SCHEMES  ARE  DISCUSSED WITH
            DESIGN PARAMETERS GIVEN.  (HANCUFF-TEXAS)

TITLE       ACTIVATED SLUDGE PROCESS WORKSHOP MANUAL
PUB DATE    JUL 76
AVAIL       PUBLICATIONS    CENTRE,    ONTARIO    MINISTRY    OF
            GOVERNMENT  SERVICES, 880  BAY STREET,  5TH  FLOOR,
            TORONTO, ONTARIO,  CANADA  M7A 1N8  ($2.00;  ORDERS
            MUST  BE  ACCOMPANIED   BY  CHECK  OR  MONEY   ORDER
            PAYABLE TO "THE TREASURER OF ONTARIO")
DESC        *BEHAVIORAL OBJECTIVES, *CHEMISTRY, *ENVIRONMENTAL
            EDUCATION,  ENVIRONMENTAL  TECHNICIANS, JOB SKILLS,
            *POLLUTION,   WASTE  DISPOSAL,   *WATER  POLLUTION
            CONTROL, *WORKSHOPS, ACTIVATED SLUDGE, ONTARIO
ERIC NO.    ED155033
EDRS PRICE  EDRS PRICE MF-$0.83  PLUS POSTAGE. HC  NOT AVAILABLE
            FROM EDRS
DESC NOTE   242P.; FOR  RELATED  DOCUMENT,  SEE SE 024  226-233;
            NOT  AVAILABLE  IN   HARD  COPY  DUE   TO  COPYRIGHT
            RESTRICTIONS; CONTAINS  COLORED PAGES  WHICH MAY  NOT
            REPRODUCE WELL
ISSUE       RIEOCT78
ABSTRACT    THIS  MANUAL WAS  DEVELOPED FOR  USE  AT WORKSHOPS
            DESIGNED TO UPGRADE THE  KNOWLEDGE  OF EXPERIENCED
            WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT  OPERATORS. EACH OF  THE
            LESSONS  IN   THIS   DOCUMENT  HAS  CLEARLY   STATED
            BEHAVIORAL OBJECTIVES TO  TELL  THE TRAINEE WHAT  HE
            SHOULD  KNOW  OR" DO  AFTER COMPLETING THAT  TOPIC.
            AREAS  COVERED IN  THIS  MANUAL INCLUDE:  TYPES  AND
            FACTORS  AFFECTING   ACTIVATED  SLUDGE  PROCESSES,
            IDENTIFICATION AND SOLUTION OF OPERATING PROBLEMS,
            SELECTED  TESTS  AND  MEASUREMENT,    AND   CHEMICAL
            DETERMINATIONS.  A  GLOSSARY  OF TERMS IS   INCLUDED
            FOR REFERENCE. (CS)

TITLE       ACTIVATED SLUDGE. TRAINING MODULE 2.117.4.77.
PUB DATE    SEP 77
DESC        INSTRUCTIONAL    MATERIALS,    *POST   SECONDARY
            EDUCATION,   SECONDARY EDUCATION,  *TEACHING GUIDES,
            *UNITS   OF    STUDY,   *WATER   POLLUTION   CONTROL,
            *ACTIVATED    SLUDGE,   OPERATIONS    (WASTEWATER),
            *WASTEWATER TREATMENT
ERIC NO.    ED151222
EDRS PRICE  EDRS PRICE MF-$0.83  HC-$6.01 PLUS POSTAGE
                              121

-------
DESC NOTE   IIP.:  FOR RELATED  DOCUMENTS,  SEE SE  024-025-447;
            CONTAINS  SMALL TYPE IN FIGURES
ISSUE       RIEJUL78
ABSTRACT    THIS  DOCUMENT  IS AN  INSTRUCTIONAL MODULE  PACKAGE
            PREPARED   IN  OBJECTIVE   FORM   FOR   USE   BY   AN
            INSTRUCTOR  FAMILIAR  WITH  OPERATION  OF  ACTIVATED
            SLUDGE  WASTEWATER TREATMENT  PLANTS.  INCLUDED  ARE
            OBJECTIVES,  INSTRUCTOR GUIDES,  STUDENT  HANDOUTS,
            AND  TRANSPARENCY MASTERS.  THIS IS THE  THIRD LEVEL
            OF A  THREE MODULE SERIES  AND CONSIDERS  DESIGN  AND
            OPERATION  PARAMETERS, PROCESS CONTROL  PROCEDURES,
            INTERPRETATION OF TREND  CHART DATA AND  THE  OXYGEN
            UPTAKE TEST. (AUTHOR/RH)

TITLE       ACTIVATED SLUDGE-UNIFIED SYSTEM DESIGN  AND
            OPERATION
AUTHOR      KEINATH,  T. M.;  RYCKMAN, M. D.; DANA,  C.  H.;
            HOFER, D. A.
CORP AUTH   CLEMSON  UNIV.,  SC.  DEPT.  OF ENVIRONMENTAL  SYSTEMS
            ENGINEERING.
PUB DESC    JOURNAL OF THE ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING DIVISION,
            PROCEEDINGS OF ASCE,  VOL 013, NO' EE5, P  829-849,
            OCTOBER,  1977. 11 FIG, 2 TAB,  19  REF,  1  APPEND
DESC        *ACTIVATED    SLUDGE,     *ANALYTICAL     TECHNIQUES,
            *SEDIMENTATION    RATES,   TREATMENT    FACILITIES,
            *DESIGN,   BIOLOGICAL   TREATMENT,   OPERATION   AND
            MAINTENANCE,  EVALUATION,  AERATION,  WASTE   WATER
            TREATMENT
ABSTRACT    THE  SETTLING  FLUX APPROACH  CAN  BE  ADAPTED  FOR
            EVALUATING ECONOMIC TRADEOFFS  BETWEEN  ALTERNATIVE
            DESIGNS  FOR  WASTE WATER  TREATMENT  SYSTEMS.  THE
            DESIGN  BASIS  FOR THE AERATOR  INCORPORATES  SOLIDS
            RESIDENCE  TIME  AND HYDRAULIC  RESIDENCE TIME.  THE
            DESIGN  BASIS  FOR THE CLARIFIER  INCORPORATES  THE
            CLARIFICATION  CONSTRAINT,   AND  A  RECYCLE RATE
            CONSTRAINT.  THIS  METHODOLOGY  CAN  BE   USED  FOR
            EVALUATING  THE   ECONOMIC  ASPECTS  OF  AN  ACTIVATED
            SLUDGE  SYSTEM CONSISTING  OF  AN  AERATION  BASIN,
            CLARIFIER,  AND   SLUDGE  PROCESSING  EQUIPMENT.  THE
            SETTLING - FLUX   APPROACH   CAN   ALSO   BE  USED   IN
            OPERATIONS  MONITORING   OF  AN   ACTIVTED   SLUDGE
            SYSTEM.  THIS  APPROACH  INDICATES THAT  INCREASED
            HYDRAULIC  FLOW   RATES  WOULD ONLY  CAUSE SOLIDS  TO
            ENTER  THE EFFLUENT AT CERTAIN  CRITICALLY LOCATED
            POINTS NEAR THE  SETTLING FLUX CURVE. FOR DECREASED
            HYDRAULIC  FLOW  RATES, THE  RECYCLE RATE  COULD  BE
            REDUCED  TO  THE   POINT  OF  CRITICAL  LOADING.  THE
            SETTLING  FLUX APPROACH  INDICATES  THAT  THE FLOW
            PROPORTIONAL  RECYCLE  CONTROLS  CAN   ESTIMATE  THE
                              122

-------
            REQUIRED  FLOW  FAIRLY  ACCURATELY.   IT  DOES  NOT,
            HOWEVER, PROVIDE THE PRECISE RECYCLE RATE REQUIRED
            TO MAINTAIN  THE CLARIFIER IN  A CRITICALLY LOADED
            CONDITION.  THIS APPROACH  CAN  ALSO  ESTABLISH THE
            HYDRAULIC  SURGE THAT  A SYSTEM  COULD  ACCOMMODATE
            WITHOUT   INDISCRIMINATE   SOLIDS   WASTING.   THIS
            APPROACH   CAN  ONLY   BE   USED  FOR   OPERATIONS
            MONITORING AND  CONTROL  IF CURRENT  SETTLING  FLUX
            CURVES ARE AVAILABLE. CHANGES  IN  THE  OPERATIONAL
            SET-POINT  OF  SOLIDS   RESIDENCE   TIME   CAN  BE
            ACCOMMODATED   BY  CHANGES  IN  THE  SOLIDS  WASTING
            PROGRAM. (SNYDER-FIRL)

TITLE       AERATION: PROPER SIZING IS CRITICAL.
AUTHOR      SHERRARD, J.  H.
CORP AUTH   VIRGINIA   POLYTECHNIC  INST.  AND   STATE  UNIV. ,
            BLACKSBURG. DEPT.  OF CIVIL ENGINEERING.
AVAIL       WATER AND WASTES ENGINEERING,  VOL  14,  NO  4, P 62,
            66-67, 71, APRIL,  1977. 4 FIG, 4 TAB, 6 REF.
IDEN        MECHANICAL AERATORS
KEYWORDS    *AERATION,    TREATMENT   FACILITIES,    *DESIGN,
            PERFORMANCE,     ACTIVATED    SLUDGE,    MECHANICAL
ABSTRACT    EQUIPMENT,  OXYGEN,  TEMPERATURE,  MICROORGANISMS,
            OPERATIONS,  BIOCHEMICAL OXYGEN  DEMAND,  NITROGEN,
            NITRIFICATION,  *WASTE WATER TREATMENT
            THE SELECTION OF LOW SPEED MECHANICAL AERATORS WAS
            CONSIDERED.   ANY   AERATION  METHOD   MUST  PRODUCE
            ENOUGH MIXING TO MAINTAIN ACTIVATED SLUDGE FLOC IN
            SUSPENSION AND  SUPPLY SUFFICIENT OXYGEN TRANSER TO
            MEET  THE DEMANDS  OF  MICROBIAL  GROWTH.  EQUATIONS
            WERE  PROVIDED  TO  HELP  JUDGE  A GIVEN  AERATOR'S
            PERFORMANCE.   MECHANICAL  AERATORS   MUST  MEET TWO
            STANDARDS:   POWER,   AND   SUFFICIENT   OXYGEN  FOR
            MICROBIAL  METABOLISM.  THE  FIRST DEPEND  UPON THE
            TYPE OF AERATOR AND THE GEOMETRY OF THE BASIN. THE
            LATTER  INVOLVES OXYGEN  FOR  ORGANIC REMOVAL AND
            NITRIFICATION,  AND  DEPENDS ON PLANT OPERATION AND
            THE  BOD5/ORG-N  +  NH(+4)  -  N  RATIO.  BIOKINETIC
            COEFFICIENTS  SHOULD BE ESTABLISHED TO MAKE QUALITY
            AND  OXYGEN  NEEDS  PREDICTABLE  AS  A FUNCTION  OF
            TREATMENT  PROCESS  OPERATING  CONDITIONS.  SEVERAL
            EXAMPLES OF  TYPICAL SOLUTIONS WERE  PRESENTED.  IT
            WAS  CONCLUDED  THAT  THE  USE  OF   A RATIO   OF   1
            MG/LITER OF  OXYGEN  TO 1 MG/LITER OF BODS COULD BE
            MISLEADING  AND  RESULT  IN  A  FAULTY  SELECTION.
            NITROGENOUS   OXYGEN  DEMAND   FROM   NITRIFICATION
            SHOULD  BE  USED FOR  AERATOR SELECTION  IF HIGHER
            MEAN  CELL  RESIDENCE TIME  VALUES ARE USED. OXYGEN
            TRANSFER REQUIREMENTS CAN  BE MET IN SOME INSTANCES
                               123

-------
            BY  LOWERING PROCESS  MEAN CELL  RESIDENCE TIME  TO
            DECREASE OXYGEN NEEDS.  (COLLINS-FIRL)

TITLE       AN  AUTOMATED SPECTROPHOTOMETRIC SUSPENDED  SOLIDS
            ANALYSIS FOR ACTIVATED  SLUDGE.
AUTHOR      FINGER, R. E.; STRUTYNSKI, B. J.
CORP AUTH   MUNICIPALITY  OF   METROPOLITAN   SEATTLE,   RENTON,
            WASH. RENTON TREATMENT  PLANT
AVAIL       JOURNAL  WATER POLLUTION CONTROL FEDERATION,  VOL
            47, NO  5,  P 1043-1054,  MAY,  1975.  11 FIG,  4  TAB,
            15 REF.
IDEN        *SLUDGE VOLUME INDEX
KEYWORDS    *ACTIVATED    SLUDGE,     *BIOLOGICAL     TREATMENT,
            *SUSPENDED   SOLIDS,    *WASTE    WATER    TREATMENT,
            COLORIMETRY,  AUTOMATION,  SAMPLING,   MEASUREMENT,
ABSTRACT    ANALYTICAL  TECHNIQUES,  *POLLUTANT  IDENTIFICATION,
            *SPECTROPHOTOMETRY
            THE   MEASUREMENT   OF    SUSPENDED    SOLIDS    (SS)
            CONCENTRATION  IN  BIOLOGICAL  WASTE  TREATMENT  IS
            USED AS A PRIMARY CONTROL, FOR PROCESS ADJUSTMENT.
            THE SS  MEASUREMENT IS  NECESSARY   FOR CALCULATION
            OF  CELL  RESIDENCE  TIME,  ORGANIC LOADING,   AND
            SLUDGE  VOLUME INDEXES,  THE DETERMINATION  OF TYPES
            OF   POLYSACCHARIDES   ASSOCIATED  WITH   ACTIVATED
            SLUDGE   AND  THEIR   EFFECTS    ON   THE   PHYSICAL
            CHARACTERISTICS OF  SLUDGE HAVE   BEEN  INVESTIGATED
            BY A SIMPLE COLORIMETRIC  TEST. THE  PURPOSE OF  THIS
            STUDY WAS TO CONSIDER  THE POSSIBILITY OF  ADAPTING
            THIS  TEST  TO  AN  AUTOMATED  PROCEDURE.   A  MANUAL
            COLORIMETRIC PROCEDURES WHICH TAKES  TWO OR  THREE
            HOURS   WAS  FIRST   TESTED   AND   IT   PROVED   TO
            EFFECTIVELY MEASURE MIXED LIQUOR SUSPENDED  SOLIDS
            AND VSS.  THE  AUTOMATED  SPECTROPHOTOMETRIC  SS  TEST
            TAKES ONLY FIFTEEN MINUTES AND WAS  DEMONSTRATED TO
            BE  PRACTICAL  FOR USE  ON A  CONTINUOUS  BASIS.  THE
            MAJOR  PROBLEM  WITH   THE TECHNIQUE  IS   SAMPLING,
            WHICH  MAY BE IMPROVED  BY  THE  INSTALLATION OF  A
            HOMOGENIZATION SYSTEM.  (PRAGUE-FIRL)

TITLE       BASIC    ACTIVATED    SLUDGE.     TRAINING    MODULE
            2.115.2.77.
PUB DATE    SEP 77
DESC        *INSTRUCTIONAL    MATERIALS,     *POST     SECONDARY
            EDUCATION,  SECONDARY  EDUCATION,   *TEACHING  GUIDES,
            *UNITS   OF  STUDY,   *WATER   POLLUTION   CONTROL,
            *ACTIVATED   SLUDGE,    OPERATIONS    (WASTEWATER);
            *WASTEWATER TREATMENT
ERIC NO.    ED151220
                               124

-------
EDRS PRICE
DESC NOTE

ISSUE
ABSTRACT
INSTITUTION
NAME

TITLE

PUB DATE
DESC
ERIC NO.
EDRS PRICE
DESC NOTE
ISSUE
ABSTRACT
INSTITUTION
NAME
EDRS PRICE MF-$0.83 HC $4.67 PLUS POSTAGE
93P.; FOR  RELATED DOCUMENTS,  SEE  SE 024  025-047;
CONTAINS OCCASIONAL LIGHT AN DBROKEN TYPE.
RIEJUL78
THIS DOCUMENT  IS AN  INSTRUCTIONAL  MODULE  PACKAGE
PREPARED   IN   OBJECTIVE  FORM  FOR  USE   BY  AN
INSTRUCTOR  FAMILIAR  WITH  OPERATION  OF ACTIVATED
SLUDGE  WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANTS.  INCLUDED ARE
OBJECTIVES,  INSTRUCTOR GUIDES,  STUDENT HANDOUTS,
AND TRANSPARENCY  MASTERS.  THIS IS  THE  FIRST OF A
THREE MODULE  SERIES  AND  CONSIDERS, DEFINITION OF
TERMS,   DESIGN  AND  OPERATION  PARAMETERS,   PROCESS
OBSERVATIONS,  BASIC PROCESS CONTROLS  AND  CONTROL
TESTS.   (AUTHOR/RH)

KIRKWOOD COMMUNITY COLL., CEDAR RAPIDS,  IOWA.

BASIC    LABORATORY    SKILLS.    TRAINING    MODULE
5.300.2.77.
SEP 77
*BIOLOGY,  *CHEMISTRY,  INSTRUCTIONAL   MATERIALS,
""LABORATORY  PROCEDURES,  LABORATORY   TECHNIQUES,
POST  SECONDARY   EDUCATION,  SECONDARY   EDUCATION,
UNITS OF  STUDY,  WATER  POLLUTION  CONTROL, WATER
RESOURCES, *WASTEWATER TREATMENT, *WATER TREATMENT
ED153866
EDRS PRICE MF-$0.83 HC-$10.03  PLUS  POSTAGE
195P.;  FOR RELATED DOCUMENTS,  SEE SE 024 249-254
RIESEP78
THIS DOCUMENT  IS AN  INSTRUCTIONAL  MODULE  PACKAGE
PREPARED   IN   OBJECTIVE   FORM  FOR  USE   BY  AN
INSTRUCTOR  FAMILIAR WITH  THE  BASIC  CHEMICAL AND
MICROBIOLOGICAL     LABORARORY     EQUIPMENT    AND
PROCEDURES USED  IN  WATER AND WASTEWATER TREATMENT
PLANT   LABORATORIES.   INCLUDED   ARE   OBJECTIVES,
INSTRUCTOR    GUIDES,     STUDENT     HANDOUTS   AND
TRANSPARENCY MASTERS. THIS  MODULE  CONSIDERS LAB
SAFETY,     BENCH   SHEETS,    LABELING,   SAMPLING,
SOLUTIONS,   DILUTION   TECHNIQUES,    INCUBATORS,
BALANCES,  GLASSWARE,   STANDARDIZATION,   STANDARD
CURVES,     EQUIPMENT     PACKAGING,      AUTOCLAVES,
MICROSCOPES AND ASEPTIC TECHNIQUES.  (AUTHOR/RH)

KIRKWOOD COMMUNITY COLL., CEDAR RAPIDS,  IOWA.
                              125

-------
TITLE
PUB DATE
AVAIL
DESC
ERIC NO.
EDRS PRICE

DESC NOTE
ISSUE
ABSTRACT
TITLE

AUTHOR
AVAIL
I DEN
BASIC SEWAGE TREATMENT OPERATION.
NOV 76
PUBLICATIONS    CENTRE,    ONTARIO    MINISTRY    OF
GOVERNMENT  SERVICES,  880  BAY STREET,  5TH  FLOOR,
TORONTO,  ONTARIO,  CANADA  M7A 1N8  ($2.00;  ORDERS
MUST  BE  ACCOMPANIED  BY  CHECK  OR  MONEY  ORDER
PAYABLE    TO    "THE   TREASURER    OF    ONTARIO")
*BEHAVIORAL OBJECTIVES,  *ENVIRONMENTAL EDUCATION,
ENVIRONMENTAL TECHNICIANS, JOB SKILLS,  *POLLUTION,
SAFETY, SAMPLING, WASTE DISPOSAL, *WATER  POLLUTION
CONTROL, *WORKSHOPS, ONTARIO
ED155001
EDRS PRICE MF-$0.83 PLUS POSTAGE. HC NOT  AVAILABLE
FROM EDRS.
247P.; FOR  RELATED  DOCUMENTS, SEE SE 024 227-233;
NOT  AVAILABLE  IN  HARD  COPY  DUE  TO   COPYRIGHT
RESTRICTIONS; CONTAINS COLORED PAGES WHICH MAY  NOT
REPRODUCE WELL.
RIEOCT78
THIS  MANUAL WAS  DEVELOPED FOR  USE  AT  WORKSHOPS
DESIGNED    TO    INTRODUCE    OPERATORS    TO    THE
FUNDAMENTALS OF SEWAGE PLANT  OPERATION. THE COURSE
CONSISTS   OF   LECTURE-DISCUSSIONS   AND   HANDS-ON
ACTIVITIES. EACH OF THE LESSONS HAS CLEARLY STATED
BEHAVIORAL  OBJECTIVES TO  TELL THE TRAINEE  WHAT HE
SHOULD  KNOW OR  DO  AFTER  COMPLETING  THAT  TOPIC.
AREAS COVERED IN THIS MANUAL  INCLUDE: INTRODUCTION
TO   SEWAGE   TREATMENT,   BACTERIOLOGY,    PRIMARY
TREATMENT, ACTIVATED SLUDGE PROCESS, SAMPLING,  AND
RECORD  KEEPING,   SAFETY,   AND SELECTED   TESTS.  A
GLOSSARY OF TERMS IN INCLUDED FOR REFERENCE.  (CS)
BIOLOGICAL
EXPERIMENTS
BALMER, P.
IN:  INTERNATIONAL
CONTROL   IN   COLD
              AND    CHEMICAL    WASTE
            IN FAR NORTHERN SWEDEN
TREATMENT
                    SYMPOSIUM  ON  WATER  POLLUTION
                    CLIMATES,  JULY  22-24,   1970,
UNIVERSITY OF ALASKA, COLLEGE, P 252-262,  6 FIG,
6 TAB, 5 REF.
*KIRUNA (SWEDEN), *CHEMICAL TREATMENT
                              126

-------
KEYWORDS    *BIOLOGICAL  TREATMENT,  *WASTE  WATER   TREATMENT,
            *ACTIVATED    SLUDGE,    TEMPERATURE,     BACTERIA,
            *AERATION,   FLOCCULATION,   COSTS,   COLD  REGIONS,
            CHEMICAL   PRECIPITATION,   PHOSPHORUS,    SUSPENDED
            SOLIDS, SLUDGE, PILOT PLANTS,  SEWAGE, RECIRCULATED
            WATER,     SETTLING    BASINS,     HYDROGEN     ION
            CONCENTRATION, EFFLUENTS
ABSTRACT    LABORATORY   DATA   SHOW   THAT   THE  METABOLIZING
            ACTIVITY OF ACTIVATED SLUDGE IS  SERIOUSLY HAMPERED
            AT  LOW TEMPERATURES,  AND  BOD REDUCTION  DATA  IN
            ACTIVATED  SLUDGE  SYSTEMS AT  LOW TEMPERATURES  ARE
            PARTLY CONTRADICTORY. PILOT PLANT EXPERIMENTS  WERE
            CONDUCTED  WITH   ACTIVATED   SLUDGE  AND  CHEMICAL
            TREATMENT. THE  ACTIVATED SLUDGE  TREATMENT  PROVED
            THAT BIOLOGICAL TREATMENT IS POSSIBLE EVEN  AT  VERY
            LOW  SEWAGE   TEMPERATURES.   AS  THE  METABOLIZING
            ACTIVITY  OF  THE  ACTIVATED   SLUDGE  BACTERIA  IS
            CONSIDERABLY  REDUCED,  LONG AERATION  PERIODS,  4-5
            HOURS,  AND LARGE  AERATION  BASINS,  ARE  REQUIRED.
            CHEMICAL  TREATMENT  IS  MUCH LESS  SENSITIVE  TO  LOW
            TEMPERATURES  AND  REQUIRES  ONLY  ABOUT  0.5  HOUR
            DETENTION  TIME  IN  FLOCCULATION  TANKS.   DIFFERENCE
            IN  INVESTMENT  COSTS WILL IN  MANY  INSTANCES BE  SO
            LARGE   THAT   THE  INCREASED   RUNNING   COSTS   ARE
            JUSTIFIED. IF A COMMUNITY HAS AN EXISTING  PRIMARY
            TREATMENT  PLANT  WITH A  LONG  DETENTION  TIME  (MORE
            THAN  2 HOURS),  IT  MAY  BE  POSSIBLE  TO ACHIEVE  A
            SUBSTANTIAL   INCREASE    IN   TREATMENT   EFFICIENCY
            SIMPLY   ADDING   FLOCCULATING   CHEMICALS  TO   THE
            INFLUENT.  BOD  REMOVAL  WITH CHEMICAL  TREATMENT  IS
            SOMEWHAT  INFERIOR  TO  WHAT  CAN BE  ACHIEVED  WITH
            BIOLOGICAL TREATMENT.  THIS DRAWBACK,  HOWEVER,  IS
            COMPENSATED  BY  SUPERIOR  PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL.  (SEE
            ALSO W72-12548) (JONES-WISCONSIN)

TITLE       BIOMASS   DETERMINATION   -   A   NEW  TECHNIQUE   FOR
            ACTIVATED SLUDGE CONTROL.
CORP AUTH   BIOSPHERICS INC., ROCKVILLE, MD.
AVAIL       COPY  AVAILABLE   FROM GPO  SUP  DOC  EPA  17050  EOY
            01/72,  $1.25; MICROFICHE  FROM  NTIS  AS PB-211  127,
            $0.95.   ENVIRONMENTAL   PROTECTION  AGENCY,  WATER
            POLLUTION  CONTROL  RESEARCH  SERIES, NO  17050  EOY.
            JANUARY  1972,  116  P, 53 FIG,  22 TAB,  18 REF,  EPA
            PROGRAM  17050 EOY 01/72.
                               127

-------
IDEN        *ATP, *PROCESS CONTROL,  *ADENOSINE  TRIPHOSPHATE
KEYWORDS    *ACTIVATED  SLUDGE,  *ANALYTICAL TECHNIQUES,  *WATER
            QUALITY,  *CONTROL,  MONITORING,  SUSPENDED  SOLIDS,
            *BIOMASS, SEPARATION TECHNIQUES, LABORATORY TESTS,
            PILOT PLANTS, ON-SITE  INVESTIGATIONS,  *WASTE WATER
            TREATMENT
ABSTRACT    RESEARCH    WAS    CONDUCTED   TO    DETERMINE   THE
            FEASIBILITY  OF  USING  ADENOSINE TRIPHOSPHATE (ATP)
            AS  A  MEASURE  OF  VIABLE   BIOMASS  IN  ACTIVATED
            SLUDGE. METHODS WERE  DEVELOPED FOR  THE  EXTRACTION
            OF ATP  FROM SLUDGE AND  MIXED LIQUOR, AND  FOR  THE
            DETERMINATION   OF    ATP    USING    THE    FIREFLY
            BIOLUMINESCENT PROCEDURE. MEASUREMENTS OF ATP WERE
            CONDUCTED  ON VARIOUS  PURE  CULTURES,  PILOT  PLANT
            AND FULL-SCALE  ACTIVATED SLUDGE TREATMENT  PLANTS.
            ADDITIONAL  PARAMETERS  INCLUDING BOD,  TOC,  OXYGEN
            UPTAKE  RATE, AND SUSPENDED  SOLIDS  WERE  MEASUREED
            TO PROVIDE COMPARATIVE AND SUPPORTIVE  INFORMATION.
            PRELIMINARY  TESTS  IN  WHICH ATP  MEASUREMENTS  OF
            BIOMASS WERE USED  TO  CONTROL THE  PERCENT  SLUDGE
            RETURN WERE  CONDUCTED  AT TWO FULL-SCALE  MUNICIPAL
            SEWAGE  TREATMENT  PLANTS.  LOWERED  RETURN  SLUDGE
            RATES  WERE   FOUND  TO   PRODUCE  EFFECTIVE  TREATMENT
            AND  INCREASE  THE  BIOLOGICAL  ACTIVITY   OF   THE
            SLUDGE.  CHANGES  IN  THE  RATE  OF  RETURN  SLUDGE
            RESULTED IN  CHANGES IN ATP  CONCENTRATION OF  MIXED
            LIQUOR WHICH PRECEDED  CHANGES IN SUSPENDED SOLIDS
            BY AS MUCH AS 24  HOURS.  THE  ASSAY WAS FOUND  TO  BE
            REPRODUCIBLE  AND  RAPID,  RESULTS CAN  BE  OBTAINED
            WITHIN APPROXIMATELY TEN MINUTES.  (LOWRY-TEXAS)

TITLE       COMPARATIVE   EVALUATION   OF   SEQUENCING    BATCH
            REACTORS
AUTHOR      IRVINE, R. L.; RICHTER, R. 0.
CORP AUTH   NOTRE DAME UNIV., IN.  DEPT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING
PUB DESC    JOURNAL OF THE ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING  DIVISION,
            VOL  104,   NO  EE3,  PROCEEDINGS OF  THE  AMERICAN
            SOCIETY OF CIVIL  ENGINEERS,  P 503-514, JUNE  1978.
            3 FIG, 4 TAB, 15 REF.
KEYWORDS    *ACTIVATED  SLUDGE,  *BATCH REACTORS,  *SEQUENCING,
            *SEWAGE TREATMENT,  *COMPUTER  MODELS,  *SIMULATION
            ANALYSIS,  WASTE  WATER (POLLUTION),  MASS  BALANCE
            EQUATIONS,   FLOW,   DESIGN,   PERIODIC   VARIATIONS,
            OPERATIONS RESEARCH
                               128

-------
ABSTRACT    THE  PERFORMANCE  OF tMANY  PROCESSES AND  OPERATIONS
            CAN  BE  IMPROVED  APPRECIABLY  BY   THE   CONTROLLED
            UNSTEADY   OPERATIONS   THAT    ARE    PROVIDED    BY
            SEQUENCING   BATCH   (FILL   AND   DRAW)   BIOLOGICAL
            REACTORS.   THE   LACK   OF   DESIGN   AND   OPERATION
            EXPERIENCE  IN  BATCH TREATMENT  HAS  RESULTED IN  AN
            EXPERIENCE VOID THAT HAS FOSTERED  THE SELECTION  OF
            CONTINUOUS   FLOW  RATHER   THAN  BATCH   TREATMENT
            SCHEMES.  SYSTEM SELECTION  SHOULD  DEPEND  INSTEAD
            UPON   SUITABILITY   OF   THE  SYSTEM,  RELIABILITY,
            EFFICIENCY,  CONSISTENCY,   AND  ECONOMIC.   BENCH,
            PILOT, AND FULL-SCALE INVESTIGATIONS, AND DESK TOP
            AND  COMPUTER  ANALYSES   MUST   SUPPLEMENT  EXISTING
            BENCH  SCALE  STUDIES IF  THE EXPERIENCE  VOID IS  TO
            BE FILLED.  SEVERAL HYPOTHETICAL EXAMPLES  ARE USED
            TO PARTIALLY FILL  THE  VOID BY  COMPARING  VOLUMES
            FOR BOTH THE BATCH  AND  CONTINUOUS  FLOW  SYSTEMS.  IN
            THE EXAMPLES,  SEQUENCING BATCH TREATMENT  PROVIDES
            THE  POTENTIAL  FOR  ACHIEVING  EFFLUENT  LIMITATIONS
            IN A  TOTAL  VOLUME  NOTABLY LESS  THAN  THAT FOR  A
            CONVENTIONAL CONTINUOUS FLOW  SYSTEM. THIS  ADDS  TO
            PREVIOUSLY   RECOGNIZED   ADVANTAGES  THAT   INCLUDE
            HOLDING  A   WASTE   UNTIL  A  PROPER  TREATMENT   IS
            ACHIEVED.  THE  COMPUTER  SIMULATIONS HEREIN HAVE
            SHOWN HOW THE DESIGN VOLUME FOR A  SEQUENCING BATCH
            SYSTEM  DIFFERED AS A  FUNCTION  OF  THE  RELATIVE
            VARIABILITY  OF  THE MASS FLOW RATE  EVEN  THOUGH THE
            AVERAGE MASS FLOW  RATE  WAS  THE SAME FOR  ALL CASES
            INVESTIGATED. (GRAF-CORNELL)

TITLE       CONTACT STABILIZATION IN SMALL  PACKAGE  PLANTS
AUTHOR      DAGUE, R. R.; ELBERT, G. F.;  ROCKWELL,  M.  D.
CORP AUTH   IOWA UNIV.,  IOWA CITY.
AVAIL       JOURNAL WATER POLLUTION CONTROL FEDERATION,
            VOL 44, NO 2, FEBRUARY  1972, P  255-264,  11  FIG,
            3 TAB, 6 REF.
IDEM        *CONTACT STABILIZATION, *PACKAGE PLANTS
KEYWORDS    *ACTIVATED   SLUDGE,   *DESIGN   CRITERIA,   *ON-SITE
            INVESTIGATIONS, AERATION, RESPIRATION,  ABSORPTION,
            ADSORPTION,   MIXING,    BIODEGRADATION,    ORGANIC
            LOADING,  BIOCHEMICAL   OXYGEN  DEMAND,   SUSPENDED
            SOLIDS, WASTE WATER TREATMENT
ABSTRACT    INVESTIGATION  WITH CONTACT STABILIZATION  PACKAGE
            TREATMENT   PLANTS   AS   CURRENTLY   DESIGNED  HAS
            DEMONSTRATED  THAT  SUCH  FACILITIES  ARE  UNSTABLE
            UNDER CONDITIONS OTHER  THAN 24  HOUR OPERATION. TWO
            CONTACT   STABILIZATION   PLANTS  CURRENTLY   HAVING
            OPERATIONAL  DIFFICULTIES WERE MODIFIED,  ONE TO THE
            CONVENTIONAL  ACTIVATED SLUDGE  PROCESS  AND  THE
                              129

-------
            OTHER  TO  COMPLETE MIX OPERATION.  THE DIFFICULTIES
            ENCOUNTERED  BY THE  CONTACT STABILIZATION  STEMMED
            MAINLY  FROM  FLOW VARIATIONS,  AND  THE FACT  THAT
            MOST PLANTS ARE DESIGNED  FOR A 3-HOUR CONTACT TIME
            RATHER  THAN   THE  15  TO  30   MIN.   CONTACT  TIME
            ORIGINALLY DEVELOPED.  THE WIDE VARIABILITY  OF THE
            MUNICIPAL   WASTE   FLOW   FOR   THE   FIRST   SYSTEM
            EVALUATED CAUSED  THE WASTES IN THE CONTACT ZONE TO
            HAVE A RETENTION TIME VARYING FROM  2  TO  8  HOURS.
            EACH OF  THE  OTHER  PLANT  OPERATIONS  WAS  SIMILARLY
            AFFECTED. THE  TROUBLE  WHICH AROSE  THEN, WAS  MAINLY
            IN  SEPARATING  THE SOLIDS  FROM  THE EFFLUENT,  WHICH
            BECAME NEARLY  IMPOSSIBLE. AFTER MODIFICATION, THE
            TWO  PLANTS  FUNCTIONED EXTREMELY  WELL,  PRODUCING
            EFFLUENTS OF 13 MG/L OR LESS OF BOD  AND 12 MG/L OR
            LESS OF SUSPENDED SOLIDS.  (LOWRY-TEXAS)

TITLE       THE   DESIGN,   CONSTRUCTION,   AND   OPERATION   OF
            EXTENDED-AERATION PLANTS.
AUTHOR      STORCH, B.
CORP AUTH   PETERS, G. D.  (ENGINEERING)  LTD.
AVAIL       WATER  POLLUTION  CONTROL,   VOL  68,  NO 1, P  40-50,
            JAN-FEB 1969,  4 REF.
IDEN        *EXTENDED AERATION, AEROBIC  DIGESTION
KEYWORDS    *ACTIVATED  SLUDGE,  OPERATION AND  MAINTENANCE,
            *DESIGN,  *CONSTRUCTION,   AERATION,    WASTE   WATER
            TREATMENT, AEROBIC CONDITIONS
ABSTRACT    THE  DESIGN  OF   AN  EXTENDED   AERATION  PLANT  IS
            DISCUSSED   INCLUDING:    INLET,    AERATION   TANK,
            AERATION TO  SETTLING TRANSFER,  INLET  TO  SETTLING
            TANKS,  SETTLING   TANK,   SLUDGE  RETURN,  SURFACE
            SKIMMING, EFFLUENT  WITHDRAWAL,  AND   EXCESS  SLUDGE
            HANDLING.  EXCESS  SLUDGE   HANDLING  IS  TREATED  AT
            LENGTH   INCLUDING  AEROBIC   DIGESTION.   PHYSICAL
            DESCRIPTIONS   AND   RECOMMENDED   DIMENSIONS   FOR
            VARIOUS  COMPONENTS  AND   EQUATIONS   FOR  SEVERAL
            CALCULATIONS ARE  GIVEN.   RECOMMENDATIONS ARE  MADE
            FOR MATERIALS  TO  BE USED,  POSITIONING OF EQUIPMENT
            AND OTHER  FACETS OF CONSTRUCTION.  PLANT  START-UP
            IS  DESCRIBED  AND  A CHECKLIST FOR  OPERATION  AND
            MAINTENANCE IS GIVEN.  (DIFILIPPO-TEXAS)

TITLE       DESIGN PROCEDURES FOR  DISSOLVED OXYGEN CONTROL OF
            ACTIVATED SLUDGE  PROCESSES
AUTHOR      FLANAGAN, M.  J.;  BRACKEN,  B. D.
CORP AUTH   BROWN AND CALDWELL, WALNUT  CREEK,  CA
PUB DESC    AVAILABLE FROM THE  NATIONAL TECHNICAL INFORMATION
            SERVICE,  SPRINGFIELD,  VA  22161  AS  PB-270 960,  IN
                              130

-------
KEYWORDS
ABSTRACT
TITLE

AUTHOR
PUB DATE
PAPER    COPY,     IN    MICROFICHE,    REPORT   NO.
EPA-600/2-77-032,  JUNE,  1977.  217  P,  86  FIG,  31
TAB, 47 REF, 1 APPEND. 68-2130.
*DISSOLVED  OXYGEN,   *ACTIVATED  SLUDGE,   *SLUDGE
TREATMENT, *AERATION, *AUTOMATION, *COST ANALYSIS,
ECONOMICS, COSTS,  OPERATING COSTS,  CAPITAL COSTS,
MAINTENANCE   COSTS,   MANUAL   CONTROL,  AUTOMATIC
CONTROL,  CONTROL  SYSTEMS,  EQUIPMENT,  PERFORMANCE,
OPERATIONS,   DESIGN,   MAINTENANCE,    APPLICATION
METHODS,  WASTE  WATER TREATMENT,  WASTE TREATMENT,
SEWAGE     TREATMENT,      WATER      PURIFICATION,
INSTRUMENTATION,  *AERATION  EQUIPMENT, ACTIVATED
SLUDGE   TREATMENT  PLANTS,  *COST  EFFECTIVENESS,
ECONOMIC   ANALYSIS,   MANUAL   DISSOLVED   OXYGEN
CONTROL,   AUTOMATIC   DISSOLVED   OXYGEN   CONTROL,
CONTROL EQUIPMENT.
DESIGN PROCEDURES AND GUIDELINES  FOR  THE SELECTION
OF  AERATION  EQUIPMENT  AND DISSOLVED  OXYGEN  (DO)
CONTROL  SYSTEMS  FOR ACTIVATED  SLUDGE TREATMENT
PLANTS  ARE PRESENTED. PROCESS  CONFIGURATIONS AND
DESIGN PARAMETERS ARE REVIEWED  TO ESTABLISH SYSTEM
REQUIREMENTS.  AERATION  METHODS,  EQUIPMENT  AND
APPLICATION   TECHNIQUES,   DESIGN   SYSTEMS,   AND
CONTROL  SYSTEM  SELECTION  PROCEDURES  ARE EXAMINED.
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR SYSTEM  APPLICATIONS TO  VARIOUS
AERATION     EQUIPMENT    TYPES    AND     PROCESS
CONFIGURATIONS    ARE    DESCRIBED.     PERFORMANCE,
OPERATIONAL  AND  MAINTENANCE   DATA   FOR  AERATION
EQUIPMENT  AND  DO  CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR  12 ACTIVATED
SLUDGE  PLANTS  ARE  PRESENTED  IN  THE  APPENDIX.
AUTOMATIC  DO  CONTROL  SYSTEMS  FOR   VARIOUS   SIZE
HYPOTHETICAL      ACTIVATED      SLUDGE     SYSTEM
CONFIGURATIONS   ARE   PRESENTED  TO   DEVELOP   AN
ECONOMIC ANALYSIS MANUAL AND AUTOMATIC DO  CONTROL.
CONCLUSIONS  INDICATE THAT  CAPITAL  AND OPERATING
COSTS   OF  AUTOMATIC   DO   CONTROL   SYSTEMS   ARE
JUSTIFIED  FOR  ACTIVATED  SLUDGE PLANTS  LARGER  THAN
1 MGD (44 DM3/S)  ONLY IF EQUIPMENT IS  SELECTED AND
APPLIED   IN  ACCORDANCE  WITH   GUIDELINES   OF  THE
DESIGN MANUAL AND A POWER COST  IS APPLICABLE WHICH
IS  EQUAL TO  OR GREATER  THAN THE NATIONAL  AVERAGE
POWER  RATE.  AREAS  IN WHICH  FURTHER  RESEARCH  IS
INDICATED ARE DISCUSSED. (SEIP-IPA)
DISSOLVED  OXYGEN   ANALYSIS
CONTROL TESTING  (XT-43).
LUDZACK, F. J.
JUN 71
-  ACTIVATED   SLUDGE
                              131

-------
DESC        *AUDIOVISUAL AIDS, *CHEMICAL ANALYSIS,  *CHEMISTRY,
            *INSTRUCTIONAL MATERIALS,  LABORATORY  PROCEDURES,
            POLLUTION,   *POST  SECONDARY  EDUCATION,   SCIENCE
            EDUCATION,   WATER  POLLUTION   CONTROL,   *OXYGEN,
            WASTEWATER TREATMENT, DISSOLVED OXYGEN,  *ACTIVATED
            SLUDGE
DESC NOTE   INCLUDED  IS  A  34 MINUTE  TAPE,  72  SLIDES, AND  A
            SCRIPT.  AVAILABLE ON  LOAN FROM  NTOTC,  26 W  ST.
            CLAIR, CINCINNATI, OHIO 45268
ABSTRACT    THIS  MODULE  IS  DESIGNED  FOR  ADVANCED  WASTEWATER
            TREATMENT   PLANT  OPERATORS   OR   PLANT   CONTROL
            SUPERVISORS.   RAPID   AND   VALID   TECHNIQUES   ARE
            DESCRIBED  FOR  CONTROL  OF  THE  ACTIVATED  SLUDGE
            TREATMENT PROCESS  USING ELECTRONIC MEASUREMENT  OF
            DO  AND DO CHANGES. SAMPLE  DATA ARE DISCUSSED  FOR
            INTERPRETATION OF  SLUDGE  CONDITION IN  RESPONSE  TO
            STABILIZATION,  FEED,   LOAD  RATIO  OR   CONDITIONS.
            INFORMATION  OBTAINABLE  WITHIN  20 MINUTES  PROVIDES
            SUGGESTED  CORRECTIVE  ACTION  IN  TIME  TO  UPGRADE
            EFFLUENT QUALITY.  (AUTHOR/JK)

TITLE       DYNAMIC  MODELING AND  CONTROL  STRATEGIES  FOR  THE
            ACTIVATED SLUDGE PROCESS.
AUTHOR      BUSBY, J. B.; ANDREWS, J. F.
CORP AUTH   CLEMSON UNIV., S.C. DEPT. OF ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS
            ENGINEERING; AND ENVIRONMENTAL DYNAMICS,  INC.,GR.
AVAIL       JOURNAL WATER POLLUTION CONTROL FEDERATION,
            VOL 47, NO 5, P  1055-1080, MAY 1975. 22 FIG,
            3 TAB, 23 EQU, 45 REF.
IDEN        *PROCESS   CONTROL,   DYNAMIC   MODELS,    FEEDING,
            STEP-FEED PROCESS, RATIO CONTROL.
KEYWORDS    *ACTIVATED SLUDGE,  *WASTE  WATER TREATMENT,  *WATER
            QUALITY,     *SIMULATION    ANALYSIS,     BIOLOGICAL
            TREATMENT,  WASTES, COMPUTERS,  SUSPENDED  SOLIDS,
            SYSTEMS ANALYSIS, MATHEMATICAL MODELS,  RECYCLING.
ABSTRACT    CONVENTIONAL  ACTIVATED  SLUDGE  PROCESSES  MAY  BE
            CONTROLLED  BY SLUDGE  RECYCLE  RATE,  WASTE  SLUDGE
            FLOW  RATE,   AND  AERATION  RATE.  IN A  MULTISTAGE
            REACTOR  SYSTEM  SUCH  AS   THE   STEP-FEED  PROCESS,
            VARIATIONS IN WASTEWATER FEED  PATTERNS  ARE ANOTHER
            CONTROL   TECHNIQUE.   A   WIDE-SPECTRUM   ACTIVATED
            SLUDGE PROCESS MODEL  WAS  DEVELOPED THAT  CONSIDERS
            THE STORAGE  CAPABILITY OF THE  SLUDGE,  INCORPORATES
            THE ACTIVE AND INERT FRACTIONS OF  THE MIXED LIQUOR
            VOLATILE   SUSPENDED   SOLIDS   IN   SEPARATE   MASS
            BALANCES, AND  IS COUPLED WITH A  DYNAMIC  MODEL  OF
            THE    FINAL    CLARIFIER.    CONTROL    STRATEGIES
            INVESTIGATED  INCLUDE   VARIOUS  SLUDGE  WASTING  AND
            RECYCLE  CONTROL  TECHNIQUES AND HYDRAULIC  METHODS.
                               132

-------
            COMPUTER  SIMULATION  RESULTS  INDICATE  THAT  THE
            MODEL   SATISFACTORILY  DESCRIBES   THE  DIFFERENT
            PROCESS  VERSIONS  AND  THAT DYNAMIC  VARIATIONS IN
            WASTEWATER FEED PATTERN ARE  VALUABLE FOR CONTROL.
            (BELL-CORNELL)

TITLE       EFFECTS OF FLOW  EQUALIZATION ON THE OPERATION AND
            PERFORMANCE OF AN ACTIVATED SLUDGE PLANT.
AUTHOR      FOESS, G. W.; AND OTHERS
PUB DATE    AUG 77
AVAIL       NTIS,  5285 PORT  ROYAL RD. ,  SPRINGFIELD, VA 22161
            ($6.50)
DESC        *ACTIVATED SLUDGE,  CHEMICAL OXYGEN  DEMAND, *FLOW
            MEASUREMENT,   RESEARCH REPORTS,  SEWAGE,  *SLUDGE,
            *WASTEWATER    TREATMENT,    *COST   EFFECTIVENESS,
            OPERATIONS (WASTEWATER)
DESC NOTE   110P ORDER NO. PB 272 657
ABSTRACT    A  PLANT-SCALE RESEARCH  PROGRAM  WAS  CARRIED  OUT
            OVER   A   YEAR   TO   EVALUATE   THE   IMPACT   OF
            FLOW EQUALIZATION OF THE 14,000 CU.M/DAY (3.7 MGD)
            UPGRADED  ACTIVATED   SLUDGE   PLANT  AT  YPSILANTI
            TOWNSHIP,    MICHIGAN.   PROCESS     STEAMS    WERE
            CHARACTERIZED UNDER BOTH EQUALIZED AND UNEQUALIZED
            FLOW CONDITIONS WITH  RESPECT TO  BOD,  COD,  TSS AND
            FORMS OF NITROGEN AND PHOSPHORUS. THE EQUALIZATION
            SYSTEM  WAS  EFFECTIVE IN  ITS  ABILITY  TO  DAMPEN
            VARIATIONS IN WASTEWATER  CONCENTRATION AND  MASS
            FLUX.  SOME BIOCHEMICAL  ACTION  APPARENTLY OCCURRED
            IN  THE EQUALIZATION  BASIN,  ALTHOUGH  BOD   REMOVAL
            WAS   MARGINAL  AND   INCONSISTENT.   ANALYSIS   OF
            SECONDARY    EFFLUENT    INDICATED    THAT    PLANT
            PERFORMANCE WAS SIMILAR WITH AND WITHOUT EQUALIZED
            FLOW,  SUGGESTING  THAT THE THEORETICAL  ADVANTAGES
            OF  FLOW  EQUALIZATION  MAY  NOT  BE  ACHIEVED  IN
            MANUALLY  CONTROLLED  PLANTS.  AN  EXAMINATION  OF
            THEORETICAL   POWER   COSTS  FOR  EQUALIZED   AND
            UNEQUALIZED FLOW  CONDITIONS  INDICATED THAT USE OF
            FLOW  EQUALIZATION DID  NOT  RESULT  IN  POWER   COST
            ECONOMIES. (BB)

TITLE       EFFLUENT  MONITORING PROCEDURES:  BASIC  PARAMETERS
            FOR MUNICIPAL EFFLUENTS. STAFF GUIDE.
PUB DATE    77
DESC        CHEMISTRY,   COURSE   DESCRIPTIONS,    *EDUCATIONAL
            PROGRAMS,  ENVIRONMENTAL  EDUCATION,  INSTRUCTIONAL
            MATERIALS,  *LABORATORY TECHNIQUES,  MICROBIOLOGY,
            *POLLUTION,   POST   SECONDARY   EDUCATION,   SKILL
            DEVELOPMENT,  *WATER POLLUTION  CONTROL,  *WASTEWATER
            TREATMENT,         *EFFLUENTS,          *MONITORING
                               133

-------
ERIC NO.    ED147194
EDRS PRICE  EDRS PRICE MF-$0.83 HC-$16.73 PLUS  POSTAGE.
DESC NOTE   315P.; FOR  RELATED DOCUMENTS, SEE  SE  023  377-383;
            AS NOTED IN THE TABLE OF CONTENTS,  SECTIONS  18 AND
            27 ARE NOT INCLUDED IN THE PAGINATION
ISSUE       RIEAPR78
ABSTRACT    THIS   IS   ONE   OF  SEVERAL   SHORT-TERM   COURSES
            DEVELOPED TO ASSIST IN THE TRAINING OF WASTE WATER
            TREATMENT  PLANT   OPERATIONAL  PERSONNEL   IN  THE
            TESTS,   MEASUREMENTS,    AND   REPORT   PREPARATION
            REQUIRED FOR  COMPLIANCE  WITH THEIR NPDES  PERMITS.
            THIS STAFF  GUIDE  PROVIDES STEP-BY-STEP  GUIDELINES
            ON COURSE PLANNING, DEVELOPMENT AND IMPLEMENTATION
            INVOLVING  CLASSROOM  INSTRUCTION   AND  LABORATORY
            APPLICATION OF  CRITICAL  LEARNING OUTCOMES.  PART  I
            IS  CONCERNED  WITH  THE  ADMINISTRATIVE ASPECTS OF
            THE   TRAINING  PROGRAM,   PART   II  CONSISTS  OF
            INSTRUCTIONAL   STAFF  GUIDELINES   ON  TECHNICAL
            CONTENT, LEARNING OBJECTIVES, AND LESSON-BY-LESSON
            GUIDES   FOR    THE   SELF-MONITORING    PROCEDURES
            CONTAINED   IN  THIS  COURSE.   INCLUDED   IN   THIS
            DOCUMENT  ARE  MATERIALS  RELATED   TO  DETERMINING
            DISSOLVED OXYGEN,  PH,  FECAL  COLIFORM, WATER FLOW,
            SUSPENDED SOLIDS, AND CHLORINE. (CS)

TITLE       EFFLUENT MONITORING PROCEDURES:  NUTRIENTS.  STAFF
            GUIDE.
PUB DATE    77
DESC        COURSE   DESCRIPTIONS,    *EDUCATIONAL   PROGRAMS,
            ENVIRONMENTAL EDUCATION, INSTRUCTIONAL  MATERIALS,
            LABORATORY TECHNIQUES, *POLLUTION, POST SECONDARY
            EDUCATION,   SKILL  DEVELOPMENT,  TEACHING  METHODS,
            *WATER  POLLUTION  CONTROL,  *WASTEWATER  TREATMENT,
            *EFFLUENTS, *MONITORING, *NUTRIENTS
EDRS PRICE  EDRS PRICE MF-$0.83 HC-$12.71 PLUS  POSTAGE
DESC NOTE   247P., FOR RELATED  DOCUMENTS,  SEE   SE  023  377-383,
            SOME  PAGES  MAY  REPRODUCE  POORLY  DUE  TO  PRINT
            QUALITY.
ISSUE       RIEAPR78
ABSTRACT    THIS   IS   ONE   OF  SEVERAL   SHORT-TERM   COURSES
            DEVELOPED TO ASSIST IN THE TRAINING OF WASTE WATER
            TREATMENT PLANT OPERATIONAL PERSONNEL  IN THE TESTS
            MEASUREMENTS, AND  REPORT PREPARATION  REQUIRED  FOR
            COMPLIANCE  WITH THEIR NPDES PERMITS.  THIS  STAFF
            GUIDE  PROVIDES  STEP-BY-STEP  GUIDELINES  ON  COURSE
            PLANNING, DEVELOPMENT AND IMPLEMENTATION INVOLVING
            CLASSROOM  INSTRUCTION  AND  LABORATORY APPLICATION
            OF CRITICAL LEARNING OUTCOMES. PART I  IS CONCERNED
            WITH  THE  ADMINISTRATIVE  ASPECTS  OF  THE  TRAINING
                              134

-------
            PROGRAM. PART  II CONSISTS  OF  INSTRUCTIONAL STAFF
            GUIDELINES   ON   TECHNICAL   CONTENT,   LEARNING
            OBJECTIVES,  AND  LESSON-BY-LESSON  GUIDES  FOR  THE
            SELF-MONITORING  PROCEDURES  CONTAINED   IN  THIS
            COURSE. INCLUDED ARE  A VARIETY  OF TECHNIQUES FOR
            DETERMINING  VARIOUS  MATERIALS IN  WATER INCLUDING
            PHOSPHORUS,  NITROGEN,  AMMONIA,  CADMIUM,  OIL,  AND
            GREASE. (CS)

TITLE       FACILITIES  FOR CONTROLLING THE ACTIVATED SLUDGE
            PROCESS BY MEAN CELL RESIDENCE TIME
AUTHOR      BURCHETT,  M.E.; TCHOBANDOGLOUS, G.
CORP AUTH   YODER-TROTTER-ORLOB AND  ASSOCIATES,  WALNUT CREEK,
            CALIF.
AVAIL       JOURNAL WATER POLLUTION CONTROL FEDERATION,
            VOL 46, NO 5, P 973-979, MAY 1974. 7 FIG,  6 REF.
IDEN        *MEAN CELL RESIDENCE TIME.
KEYWORDS    *ACTIVATED SLUDGE,  *TREATMENT FACILITIES,  *CONTROL
            SYSTEMS,   AUTOMATIC    CONTROL,    OPERATION   AND
            MAINTENANCE, *WASTE WATER TREATMENT
ABSTRACT    SEVERAL METHODS  NOW  BEING  USED  BY  OPERATORS  TO
            CONTROL   THE   ACTIVATED   SLUDGE   PROCESS   ARE
            DISCUSSED. THE USE OF THE MEAN CELL RESIDENCE TIME
            (MCRT)  IS   RECOMMENDED  AS   THE   MOST   SUITABLE
            OPERATIONAL  CONTROL PARAMETER.  THE BASIC  CONCEPTS
            INVOLVING  THE  THEORETICAL  AND  PRACTICAL  REASONS
            FOR   CONTROLLING  THE   MCRT  ARE  DISCUSSED.  THE
            PHYSICAL FEATURES OF A CONTROL SYSTEM  DEVELOPED TO
            USE  THIS  METHOD  ARE  PRESENTED.  THE  FOLLOWING
            ADVANTAGES  FOR THE PROPOSED CONTROL  SYSTEM ARE:
            MINIMUM REQUIRED  OPERATOR  ATTENTION,  INEXPENSIVE
            CAPITAL COSTS, MORE POSITIVE  PROCESS  CONTROL,  AND
            MORE STABLE PROCESS OPERATION. (SA

TITLE       GET THE MOST FROM THE FINAL CLARIFIERS.
AUTHOR      BOYLE, W.  H.
CORP AUTH   ENVIREX INC., WAUKESHA, WIS.
AVAIL       WATER AND WASTES ENGINEERING, VOL  12,  NO 10,
            P 53-55, 82, OCTOBER, 1975. 4 FIG.
IDEN        *CLARIFIERS, HYDRAULIC  REMOVAL MECHANISMS, SLUDGE
            RETURN.
KEYWORDS    *WASTE   WATER   TREATMENT,   *ACTIVATED   SLUDGE,
            HYDRAULIC MACHINERY, HYDRAULICS, SLUDGE, DESIGN.
ABSTRACT    THE  FINAL  CLARIFIER   PERFORMS  ONE  OF  THE  MOST
            IMPORTANT  UNIT FUNCTIONS IN  THE ACTIVATED SLUDGE
            PROCESS.   THE   HYDRAULIC    REMOVAL   MECHANISM,
            SOMETIMES CALLED A  VACUUM OR SUCTION  TYPE DEVICE,
            IS THE PREFERRED SLUDGE  COLLECTION MECHANISM WHEN
            DEALING WITH A LIGHT  FLOCCULANT  SLUDGE.  A BRIEF
                              135

-------
            REVIEW IS PRESENTED OF THE MAIN REQUIREMENTS FOR A
            HYDRAULIC REMOVAL MECHANISM WHICH ARE  RAPID SLUDGE
            REMOVAL, MINIMUM SLUDGE  AGITATION, MAXIMUM SOLIDS
            CONCENTRATION, FLEXIBILITY, AND BALANCED HYDRAULIC
            DESIGN.  ONE  OF  THE  TWO MAIN TYPES  OF  CIRCULAR
            HYDRAULIC  REMOVAL  MECHANISMS  IS  A   RECTANGULAR
            TAPERED HEADER MADE  OF 0.25 INCH STEEL PLATE WITH
            ORIFICES DRILLED INTO THE HEADER  FOR THE  REMOVAL
            OF  SLUDGE  (THE  HEADER DESIGN).  THE  OTHER  DEVICE
            INCORPORATES  SEVERAL  WITHDRAWAL  PIPES WITH  THE
            SLUDGE  CHANNELED  BY  DEFLECTOR  PLATES TO  THESE
            PIPES AND  TRANSPORTED TO COLLECTION  WELLS  (RISER
            PIPE  DESIGN). THE HYDRAULIC  DESIGN  OF  EACH  OF
            THESE  DEVICES IS  EXPLAINED.   CHOICE  OF HYDRAULIC
            SLUDGE  REMOVAL   MECHANISM   SHOULD  BE  BASED  ON
            PERFORMANCE,  HOW  THE  DEVICE  AFFECTS  THE  MAIN
            PROCESS REQUIREMENTS, AND AN  ECONOMIC EVALUATION
            OF     CAPITAL     AND     OPERATIONAL/MAINTENANCE
            EXPENDITURES. (ORR-FIRL)

TITLE       GUIDE  TO  WASTEWATER  TREATMENT:  BIOLOGICAL-SYSTEM
            DEVELOPMENTS.
AUTHOR      FORD, D. L.; TISCHLER, L. F.
CORP AUTH   ENGINEERING-SCIENCE,  INC., AUSTIN, TX.
AVAIL       CHEMICAL ENGINEERING, VOL  84, NO  17,  P  131-135,
            AUGUST, 1977. 2  FIG.  13 REF.
KEYWORDS    *BIOLOGICAL    TREATMENT,    INDUSTRIAL    WASTES,
            *ACTIVATED     SLUDGE,     *TRICKLING      FILTERS,
            *BIODEGRADATION,   EQUALIZING   RESERVOIRS,   ORGANIC
            LOADING, DILUTION,  SOLVENT  EXTRACTIONS, SUSPENDED
            SOLIDS,     DESIGN     CRITERIA,     NITRIFICATION,
            FILTRATION, *WASTE WATER TREATMENT
ABSTRACT    HIGH-RATE  BIOLOGICAL  TREATMENT  SYSTEMS  SUCH  AS
            ACTIVATED SLUDGE,  TRICKLING  FILTERS,  AND  ROTATING
            DISCS  ARE  REVIEWED  FOR  USE  IN  MUNICIPAL  AND
            INDUSTRIAL WASTE WATER TREATMENT.  VARIOUS  ASPECTS
            OF   SUSPENDED-GROWTH   SYSTEMS    SUCH    AS   THE
            COMPLETELY-MIXED  ACTIVATED   SLUDGE   PROCESS   ARE
            DISCUSSED,  INCLUDING  CONTACT STABILIZATION,  SOLIDS
            REMOVAL,  AND  EFFLUENT   POLISHING,    FIXED-GROWTH
            SYSTEMS SUCH  AS  THE CONVENTIONAL TRICKLING FILTER
            AND  THE  ROTATING BIOLOGICAL FILTER  ARE DESCRIBED
            AND  COMPARED  WITH SUSPENDED-GROWTH  SYSTEMS.  FLOW
            EQUALIZATION  AND AUXILIARY  BASINS  IN INDUSTRIAL
            WASTE  WATER  TREATMENT  ARE  SUGGESTED  TO  OFFSET
            PROBLEMS    ASSOCIATED    WITH    HYDRAULIC-    AND
            ORGANIC-LOAD  VARIATIONS  TO   BIOLOGICAL   SYSTEMS.
            PRETREATMENT  WITH  HYDROLYSIS  IS  SUGGESTED  TO
            ENHANCE BIODEGRADABILITY. PRE-DILUTION OF  INFLUENT
                              136

-------
TITLE
PUB DATE
AVAIL

DESC
ABSTRACT
TITLE

AUTHOR
PUB DATE
AVAIL

DESC
DESC NOTE
ABSTRACT
STREAMS  HAVING  HIGH  ORGANIC  CONCENTRATIONS   BY
STREAMS  HAVING   LOW  ORGANIC  CONCENTRATIONS   IS
SUGGESTED  TO  IMPROVE  OVERALL  PERFORMANCE  OF  A
BIOLOGICAL SYSTEM.  STEAM OR  SOLVENT  STRIPPING  OF
INDUSTRIAL WASTE  STREAMS IS RECOMMENDED TO REDUCE
HIGH-ORGANIC  LOADS,  MINIMIZE  LOADING VARIATIONS,
AND  REDUCE  INHIBITION OF  BIOLOGICAL  PROCESSES  BY
PARTICULARLY  TOXIC  WASTES.  INCREASING  THE AMOUNT
OF  BIOLOGICAL  SOLIDS  IN  THE  AERATION  BASIN  OF
SUSPENDED   GROWTH   SYSTEMS   BY   INCREASING   THE
SLUDGE-RECYCLE   RATIO   AND/OR   REDUCING   SLUDGE
WASTAGE  IS  REPORTED TO  PREVENT  BIOLOGICAL UPSET.
VARIOUS PROCESSES USED IN THE REMOVAL OF SECONDARY
SOLIDS  ARE   DISCUSSED.   DESIGN  AND  OPERATIONAL
VARIABLES WHICH CAN AFFECT PROCESS PERFORMANCE ARE
DISCUSSED,  INCLUDING  SLUDGE  AGE,   TEMPERATURE,
SLUDGE   BULKING,   NITRIFICATION,   AND  ACTIVATED
CARBON TREATMENT. ((SCHULZ-FIRL)

HANDBOOK FOR WATER AND WASTEWATER ANALYSIS.
76
VWR  SCIENTIFIC,  PO  BOX  3200,  SAN FRANCISCO,  CA
94119
*ANALYTICAL    TECHNIQUES,     CHEMICAL   ANALYSIS,
INSTRUCTIONAL  MATERIALS,  LABORATORY TECHNIQUES,
*MANUALS,   POST   SECONDARY   EDUCATION,   *WATER
ANALYSIS
ANALYTICAL  TECHNIQUES   FOR  USE  IN  WATER  AND
WASTEWATER LABORATORIES.

HANDBOOK  OF  ADVANCED WASTEWATER TREATMENT, 2ND
EDITION
CULP, RUSSELL L.; AND OTHERS
78
                                  300    PIKE    ST.,
VAN   NOSTRAND/REINHOLD   CO.
CINCINNATI, OH 45202
CARBON    DIOXIDE,    *CHEMISTRY,    CHLORINATION,
DEMINERALIZATION,    *DISINFECTION,    *ECONOMICS,
FILTRATION,   FLOCCULATION,   *HIGHER   EDUCATION,
INSTRUCTIONAL   MATERIALS,   *LAND   APPLICATION,
"OPERATIONS     (WASTEWATER),     POST    SECONDARY
EDUCATION, *SLUDGE, WASTEWATER SLUDGE, *WASTEWATER
TREATMENT, *WATER POLLUTION CONTROL
632P.
INCLUDED  IN THIS  BOOK  ARE CHAPTERS ON THE PURPOSE
AND  BENEFITS   OF  ADVANCED  WASTEWATER  TREATMENT,
CHEMICAL CLARIFICATION, RECARBONATION, FILTRATION,
ACTIVATED  CARBON  ADSORPTION   AND  REGENERATION,
DISINFECTION,   NITROGEN  REMOVAL,  CHEMICAL  SLUDGE
                              137

-------
            HANDLING,   DEMINERALIZATION,   LAND  TREATMENT   OF
            WASTEWATERS,  ESTIMATING ' THE  COSTS  OF WASTEWATER
            TREATMENT  FACILITIES  AND  SELECTING AND  COMBINING
            UNIT PROCESSES.  SOME  OF  THE  TOPICS INCLUDED ARE:
            (1) COAGULATION,  FLOCCULATION, AND  SEDIMENTATION;
            (2) SINGLE  STAGE VS,  TWO STAGE  CARBONATION;  (3)
            DESIGN  OF   FILTER   SYSTEMS;   (4)  EVALUATION   OF
            ACTIVATED CARBON; (5) CHLORINATION;  (6) BIOLOGICAL
            NITROGEN REMOVAL; (7) ELECTRODIALYSIS; AND  (8)  ION
            EXCHANGE. THIS  BOOK CONTAINS  DESIGN EXAMPLES  AND
            CASE HISTORIES  OF OPERATING  PLANTS.  IT  IS  USEFUL
            AS A  REFERENCE  BOOK,  OR  A  TEXT IN  GRADUATE   OR
            UNDERGRADUATE  ENVIRONMENTAL  ENGINEERING  COURSES.
            (BB)

TITLE       THE IMPACT  OF OILY MATERIAL  ON  ACTIVATED  SLUDGE
            SYSTEMS.
CORP AUTH   HYDROSCIENCE, INC.,  WESTWOOD, N.J.
AVAIL       COPY AVAILABLE  FROM GPO SUP  DOC AS  SN5501-0088,
            $1.25;  MICROFICHE FROM NTIS AS PB-212 422,  $0.95.
            ENVIRONMENTAL  PROTECTION AGENCY,  WATER  POLLUTION
            CONTROL RESEARCH SERIES, MARCH 1971,  110  P,
            29 FIG,  10  TAB, 38  REF.  EPA PROGRAM  12050  DSH
            03/71.
IDEN        *SPENT CRANKCASE  OIL,  "VEGETABLE .OIL, *CRUDE OIL,
            REFINERY WASTE OIL,  LOAD TOLERANCE.
KEYWORDS    *OIL WASTES, *ACTIVATED  SLUDGE, *SEWAGE TREATMENT,
            *WASTE WATER  DISPOSAL,  BIOLOGICAL TREATMENT, OIL,
            BIODEGRADATION, ABSORPTION, SLUDGE  TREATMENT
ABSTRACT    THE   PREFORMANCE   OF    SMALL  SCALE   CONTINUOUS
            ACTIVATED SLUDGE  SYSTEMS WAS  OBSERVED AFTER BEING
            EXPOSED  TO  A  VAREITY  OF  OILY COMPOUNDS  SUCH   AS
            CRANKCASE  OIL,   CRUDE  OIL AND VEGETABLE  OIL,   AT
            SEVERAL  LOADING  LEVELS.   BATCH   STUDIES  WERE
            CONDUCTED  TO DETERMINE  BIODEGRADABILITY  AND  THE
            EFFECT  OF  EMULSIFICATION  AND TEMPERATURE  ON  THE
            RATE OF  BIOLOGICAL  REACTION.  OILS ARE ABSORBED ON
            THE  FLOC   AND   SLOWLY  DEGRADE   WHEN  THEY   ARE
            INTRODUCED  INTO  AN ACTIVATED SLUDGE  SYSTEM.  THE
            OIL ACCUMULATES  ON  THE  SLUDGE CAUSING A LOSS   OF
            DENSITY AND ACCEPTABLE SETTLING CHARACTERISTICS IF
            THE LOADING  RATE IS HIGHER  THAN THE DEGRADATION
            WASTAGE. THE ABILITY  OF THE  MICROBIAL  SYSTEM  TO
            REMOVE OTHER SUBSTRATES  IS  NOT INHIBITED ALTHOUGH
            THE BIOLOGICAL  SYSTEM  FAILS   DUE TO  THE  LOSS   OF
            SLUDGE. 0.10  POUNDS  PER  DAY  PER  POUND  OF  SLUDGE
            UNDER  AERATION  SHOULD  BE THE  MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS
            FEED  LEVEL  OF  OILS  TO  ACTIVATED  SLUDGE.   SHOCK
            LOADS  SHOULD NOT EXCEED 5%  OF THE WEIGHT  OF'THE
            SLUDGE UNDER AERATION.  (SMITH-TEXAS)
                               138

-------
TITLE       IS  INADEQUATE  SLUDGE  AGE  AND  DISSOLVED  OXYGEN
            CONTROL PREVENTING OPERATORS FROM GETTING THE BEST
            FROM THEIR ACTIVATED-SLUDGE PLANTS.
AUTHOR      PITMAN, A. R.
PUB DESC    WATER POLLUTION CONTROL, VOL 77, NO  1, P 97-99,
            1978. 1 FIG.
KEYWORDS    *ACTIVATED      SLUDGE,      *DISSOLVED     OXYGEN,
            *FLOCCULATION,  *SUSPENDED  SOLIDS,   OPTIMIZATION,
            OXYGEN  DEMAND,  BACTERIA,   PROTOZOA,  WASTE  WATER
            TREATMENT, SLUDGE DIGESTION, MUNICIPAL WASTES.
ABSTRACT    THE  OPTIMIZATION OF  THE  ACTIVATED  SLUDGE  WASTE
            WATER TREATMENT PROCESS IS CONSIDERED WITH RESPECT
            TO  SLUDGE   AGE  AND  DISSOLVED  OXYGEN  CONTROL.
            CLARIFIER  CAPACITY  INCREASES  AT A  CONSTANT FEED
            RATE OF  HOMOGENOUS  SLUDGE AND A DISSOLVED OXYGEN
            LEVEL OF 2 MG/LITER. AS SLUDGE AGE INCREASES UNDER
            THESE CIRCUMSTANCES, EFFLUENT  CLARITY  IMPROVES DUE
            TO   INCREASED  BIOFLOCCULATION   EFFICIENCY;   THE
            SLUDGE  SETTLING RATE  INCREASES WITH  HIGHER FLOC
            DENSITY;  AND  THE  QUANTITY   OF  SLUDGE  PRODUCED
            DECREASES.  THE OXIDATION  OF  ORGANIC NITROGEN AND
            AMMONIA ALSO IMPROVES WHILE THE FLOC OXYGEN DEMAND
            AND  MIXED  LIQUOR SUSPENDED   SOLIDS  INCREASE.   AS
            SLUDGE  AGE   INCREASES,   OPTIMUM  CONDITIONS  ARE
            APPROACHED.  THESE  INCLUDE THE  REDUCTION  OF  THE
            PROTOZOA  POPULATION,  THE  PRESENCE OF  BACTERIA  IN
            THE ENDOGENOUS GROWTH  PHASE,  THE DETERIORATION  OF
            BIOFLOCCULATION,  AND THE  CONTINUING  INCREASE   OF
            FLOC  DENSITY,   SUSPENDED   SOLIDS,  TOTAL  OXYGEN
            DEMAND, AND  CLARIFIER SOLIDS  LEVELS.  WHEN SLUDGE
            AGE EXCEEDS THE OPTIMUM CONDITIONS,  DEFLOCCULATION
            OCCURS.  TWO  EXAMPLES  OF  EFFLUENT  DEFLOCCULATION
            ARE  PRESENTED.   IN   ONE  CASE,  CONTROL  OF  THE
            DISSOLVED OXYGEN LEVEL BELOW CAPACITY  IMPROVES THE
            CLARIFIED  EFFLUENT  QUALITY.  IN  THE  SECOND CASE,
            REDUCING SLUDGE AGE IMPROVES THE AMBIENT DISSOLVED
            OXYGEN LEVEL.  (LISK-FIRL)

TITLE       INTERMEDIATE   ACTIVATED  SLUDGE.  TRAINING  MODULE
            2.116.3.77.
PUB DATE    SEP 77
DESC        INSTRUCTIONAL    MATERIALS,     *POST    SECONDARY
            EDUCATION,  SECONDARY  EDUCATION, *TEACHING GUIDES,
            *UNITS   OF   STUDY,   *WATER   POLLUTION  CONTROL:
            ACTIVATED    SLUDGE,    OPERATIONS   (WASTEWATER),
            *WASTEWATER TREATMENT
ERIC NO.    ED151221
EDRS PRICE  EDRS PRICE MF-$0.83 HC-$4.67 PLUS POSTAGE.
DESC NOTE   89P.;  FOR RELATED DOCUMENTS   SEE  SE 024 025-047;
                              139

-------
            PAGE  81  MISSING  FROM  DOCUMENT  PRIOR  TO  BEING
            SHIPPED TO  EDRS  FOR FILMING;  BEST COPY  AVAILABLE
ISSUE       RIEJUL78
ABSTRACT    THIS DOCUMENT  IS AN INSTRUCTIONAL MODULE  PACKAGE
            PREPARED   IN  OBJECTIVE   FORM  FOR   USE  BY   AN
            INSTRUCTOR  FAMILIAR WITH  OPERATION  OF  ACTIVATED
            SLUDGE  WASTEWATER TREATMENT  PLANTS.  INCLUDED  ARE
            OBJECTIVES,  INSTRUCTOR  GUIDES,   STUDENT HANDOUTS
            AND  TRANSPARENCY  MASTERS.   THIS   IS   THE   SECOND
            LEVEL  OF  A THREE  MODULE  SERIES AND  CONSIDERS
            AERATION   DEVICES,   PROCESS  CONTROL   PROCEDURES,
            MICROORGANISMS  AND  DATA  TREND   CHART  PLOTTING.
            (AUTHOR/RH)

TITLE       INTRODUCTION TO WASTEWATER TREATMENT PROCESSES.
AUTHOR      RAMALHO, R. S.
PUB DATE    77
AVAIL       ACADEMIC PRESS,  111 FIFTH  AVE., NEW YORK, NY  10003
DESC        BIOLOGY,  CHEMISTRY, *ENGINEERING, *ENVIRONMENTAL
            INFLUENCES,  EQUIPMENT,  FACILITIES, INSTRUCTIONAL
            MATERIALS,  LAND  USE,  *POLLUTION,  POST  SECONDARY
            EDUCATION, PROBLEM SOLVING,  *WASTE  DISPOSAL,  WATER
            QUALITY,  *WATER  POLLUTION   CONTROL,   OPERATIONS
            (WASTEWATER),  *WASTEWATER  TREATMENT,   *FACILITIES
DESC NOTE   409P.
ABSTRACT    THIS  BOOK  INTRODUCES  FUNDAMENTAL PROCESSES   OF
                                    THE  TEXT  IS   DESIGNED   TO
                                    EVALUATION  OF   WASTEWATER
                                    THAT  PROPER PROCESSES  AND
            EQUIPMENT  MAY  BE SELECTED.  FOR EACH  PROCESS  THE
            TEXT PROVIDES:  (1)  A  SUMMARY OF THEORY, INVOLVED
            IN  THAT  PROCESS,  (2)  DEFINITION OF  IMPORTANT
            DESIGN PARAMETERS INVOLVED IN THE  PROCESS,  AND  (3)
            DEVELOPMENT  OF A SYSTEMATIC  DESIGN PROCEDURE  FOR
            THE  TREATMENT  PLANT.  EVERY  STEP  OF THIS SEQUENCE
            IS ILLUSTRATED WITH NUMERICAL EXAMPLES.  (CS)

TITLE       LABORATORY   CONTROL  FOR  WASTEWATER   FACILITIES,
            WASTEWATER TECHNOLOGY: A TWO-YEAR  POST  HIGH SCHOOL
            INSTRUCTIONAL PROGRAM. VOLUME III, PARTS A,  B,  C,
            D, E, F, G.
AUTHOR      WAGNER, DAVID;  AND OTHERS
PUB DATE    JUL 76
DESC        BEHAVIORAL  OBJECTIVES,  CURRICULUM,  ENVIRONMENT,
            *ENVIRONMENTAL     TECHNICIANS,     INSTRUCTIONAL
            MATERIALS,   LABORATORY   PROCEDURES,    LABORATORY
            TECHNIQUES,  *POLLUTION,  POST SECONDARY EDUCATION,
            *WATER POLLUTION CONTROL,  *WASTEWATER TREATMENT
ERIC NO.    ED148582
THIS  BOOK  INTRODUCES
WASTEWATER  TREATMENT.
TRAIN  THE  READER  IN
TREATMENT  PROBLEMS  SO
                              140

-------
EDRS PRICE  EDRS PRICE MF-$0.83 HC-$20.75 PLUS POSTAGE
DESC NOTE   377P.; FOR  RELATED DOCUMENTS,  SEE  SE 023  408-410
            AND SE 023 432; CONTAINS OCCASIONAL LIGHT TYPE.
ISSUE       RIEMAY78
ABSTRACT    THIS  VOLUME  IS  ONE  IN A SERIES  WHICH OUTLINES
            PERFORMANCE  OBJECTIVES AND  INSTRUCTIONAL  MODULES
            FOR   A  COURSE   OF   STUDY   WHICH   EXPLAINS   THE
            RELATIONSHIP AND FUNCTION  OF  THE PROCESS UNITS  IN
            A WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT. EXAMPLES  OF  MODULES
            INCLUDE MEASURING  SETTLEABLE MATTER,  TOTAL  SOLIDS,
            DISSOLVED  SOLIDS,  SUSPENDED  SOLIDS,  AND VOLATILE
            SOLIDS.  THE  MODULES  ARE  ARRANGED   IN  AN  ORDER
            APPROPRIATE   FOR   TEACHING   STUDENTS  WITH   NO
            EXPERIENCE.  THEY  CAN   ALSO   BE  REARRANGED   AND
            ADAPTED  FOR COURSES  TO UPGRADE  PERSONNEL  MOVING
            INTO   SUPERVISORY  POSITIONS   OR  DESIGNED  AS   A
            MINICOURSE.  EACH   MODULE  CONTAINS A  STATEMENT  OF
            PURPOSE,    OBJECTIVES,    CONDITIONS,     ACCEPTABLE
            PERFORMANCE,   INSTRUCTOR  ACTIVITY   AND   STUDENT
            ACTIVITY.  THE  TASKS  ARE ORGANIZED  IN THE  GENERAL
            CATEGORIES:     NORMAL     OPERATIONS,    ABNORMAL
            OPERATIONS,   PREVENTIVE  MAINTENANCE,   CORRECTIVE
            MAINTENANCE,    LABORATORY    CONTROL,     SYSTEMS
            INTERACTION,       AND      MANAGEMENT/SUPERVISORY
            PROCEDURES.   INCLUDED  IN  THIS   VOLUME   ARE   29
            MODULES.  THE MODULES  ARE DESIGNED   TO  TEACH  THE
            STUDENT   LABORATORY   PROCEDURES   FOR  ANALYZING
            VARIOUS   POLLUTANTS   AND  VARIABLES   RELATED   TO
            WASTEWATER.  MOST  STANDARD   TESTS  ARE  INCLUDED.
            (CS)
INSTITUTION CHARLES  COUNTY COMMUNITY COLL.,  LA PLATA, MD.;
NAME        CLEMSON  UNIV.,  S.C.;  GREENVILLE TECHNICAL  COLL.,
            S.C.;  LINN-BENTON  COMMUNITY COLL., ALBANY,  OREG.

TITLE       MANUAL FOR ACTIVATED  SLUDGE SEWAGE TREATMENT.
AUTHOR      GOODMAN, B.  L.
PUB DATE    71
AVAIL       TECHNOMIC  PUBLISHING  CO.,  INC.,  265  WEST  STATE
            STREET, WESTPORT,  CT  06880
DESC        *ACTIVATED   SLUDGE,    ENVIRONMENTAL    TECHNICIANS,
            INSERVICE   EDUCATION,  *INSTRUCTIONAL   MATERIALS,
            *MANUALS,   *POST   SECONDARY   EDUCATION,  *SLUDGE,
            *WASTE   DISPOSAL,   *WASTEWATER  TREATMENT,   WATER
            POLLUTION CONTROL
DESC NOTE   204P.
ABSTRACT    STEP  BY  STEP EXPLANATION  OF  THE PROCESS, FROM
            BASICS  TO   FINE   POINTS   OF  ADVANCED  WASTEWATER
            TREATMENT METHODS.
                              141

-------
TITLE       MANUAL  OF  INSTRUCTION FOR  SEWAGE TREATMENT  PLANT
            OPERATORS.
PUB DATE    65
AVAIL       HEALTH EDUCATION  SERVICE, PO  BOX 7283, ALBANY,  NY
            12224 ($2.00)
DESC        ANALYTICAL  TECHNIQUES,  *INSTRUCTIONAL MATERIALS,
            MAINTENANCE,    *MANUALS,     OPERATIONS,     *POST
            SECONDARY  EDUCATION,  PRIMARY   TREATMENT,  RECORD
            KEEPING,   *SEWAGE,    SLUDGE,    *WASTE  DISPOSAL,
            WASTEWATER   CHARACTERISTICS,   WASTEWATER   SLUDGE,
            *WASTEWATER  TREATMENT
DESC NOTE   243P.
ABSTRACT    PREPARED FOR GRADE 2 OPERATORS,  WRITTEN PRIMARILY
            AS A TEXT TO BE  USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH  TRAINING
            COURSE. HEAVILY NARRATIVE, AVOIDS OVERLY TECHNICAL
            TREATMENT,   AND   PRESENTS    MATERIAL   CONCISELY,
            APPENDICES    SUPPORT   BACKGROUND  MATERIAL    (EG
            ARITHMETIC,    CHEMISTRY,    BACTERIOLOGY,     ETC).
            GLOSSARY.

TITLE       MANUAL  OF  INSTRUCTION  FOR WASTE TREATMENT  PLANT
            OPERATORS.
AVAIL       HEALTH  EDUCATION  SERVICE,  PO BOX 7126, ALBANY,  NY
            12224 ($2.00)
DESC        *CHEMICAL  ANALYSIS,  *ENVIRONMENT,  INSTRUCTIONAL
            MATERIALS, NATURAL RESOURCES, OPERATIONS  (WATER),
            POST  SECONDARY  EDUCATION,   WASTEWATER TREATMENT,
            *WATER  ANALYSIS,  WATER  POLLUTION CONTROL, *WATER
            QUALITY
DESC NOTE   308P.
ABSTRACT    THIS  MANUAL  IS  INTENDED TO  BE  A  TEXTBOOK FOR A
            WATER  TREATMENT  OPERATORS   COURSE.   IT   CONTAINS
            CHAPTERS ON  THE  PURPOSE OF WATER TREATMENT,  WATER
            SOURCES  AND USES,  HYDRAULICS  AND   ELECTRICITY,
            WATER   CHEMISTRY,  MICROBIOLOGY,  WATER   QUALITY,
            CHEMICAL  COAGULATION,  SEDIMENTATION,   FILTRATION,
            CHLORINATION,   SOFTENING,   AERATION,   IRON   AND
            MAGNESIUM,   TASTE AND   ODOR  CONTROL, CORROSION,
            FLUORIDATION, PROTECTION OF TREATED WATER,  RECORDS
            AND  REPORTING,  TREATMENT  PLANT MAINTENANCE  AND
            ACCIDENT  PREVENTION,  MATHEMATICS,  AND LABORATORY
            EXAMINATION   OF   WATER.   THE  MANUAL   SHOULD   BE
            UNDERSTANDABLE TO THE AVERAGE  PLANT OPERATOR WITH
            A  HIGH  SCHOOL  EQUIVALENT  BACKGROUND. EXTREMELY
            TECHNICAL MATERIAL HAS BEEN AVOIDED.  (BB)

TITLE       A  MANUAL  OF  SIMPLIFIED  LABORATORY  .METHODS  FOR
            OPERATORS OF WASTEWATER  TREATMENT FACILITIES.
AUTHOR      WESTERHOLD,  ARNOLD F., ED.; BENNETT, ERNEST C., ED
                               142

-------
PUB DATE    APR 74
DESC        CHEMISTRY, ENVIRONMENTAL EDUCATION,  *ENVIRONMENTAL
            TECHNICIANS,   INDEPENDENT  STUDY,   *INSTRUCTIONAL
            MATERIALS,  JOB  SKILLS,   LABORATORY   TECHNIQUES,
            *POLLUTION,   *POST  SECONDARY  EDUCATION,   PUBLIC
            HEALTH,   *WATER   POLLUTION  CONTROL,   *WASTEWATER
            TREATMENT
ERIC NO.    ED149972
EDRS PRICE  EDRS PRICE MF-$0.83 HC-$4.67 PLUS  POSTAGE.
            94P.,    PAGES    1-1    THROUGH    1-12    (GENERAL
            INTRODUCTION)    REMOVED    DUE     TO     COPYRIGHT
            RESTRICTION;    SECTION    8    MISSING;    CONTAINS
            OCCASIONAL LIGHT TYPE; BEST COPY AVAILABLE
ISSUE       RIEJUN78
ABSTRACT    THIS  MANUAL  IS  DESIGNED  TO  PROVIDE  THE  SMALL
            WASTEWATER  TREATMENT  PLANT  OPERATOR,   AS WELL  AS
            THE NEW OR INEXPERIENCED OPERATOR,  WITH SIMPLIFIED
            METHODS  FOR  LABORATORYY  ANALYSIS  OF  WATER  AND
            WASTEWATER.  IT  IS EMPHASIZED  THAT THIS  MANUAL IS
            NOT A REPLACEMENT  FOR  STANDARD METHODS BUT  A GUIDE
            FOR PLANTS  WITH  INSUFFICIENT EQUIPMENT TO  PERFORM
            ANALYSES IN ACCORDANCE WITH STANDARD METHODS.  EACH
            OF THE  SECTIONS  IS DESIGNED TO BE  COMPLETE WITHIN
            ITSELF.   THE   TESTS   AND  MEASUREMENTS  PRESENTED
            INCLUDE:  ACIDS,  BIOCHEMICAL  OXYGEN DEMAND  (BOD),
            DISSOLVED OXYGEN,  RESIDUES,  SLUDGE, AND  SUSPENDED
            SOLIDS. (CS)
INSTITUTION ILLINOIS  STATE  ENVIRONMENTAL  PROTECTION  AGENCY,
NAME        SPRINGFIELD.

TITLE       THE MATHEMATICS OF ACTIVATED  SLUDGE CONTROL.
AUTHOR      UHTE, WARREN R.
CORP AUTH   BROWN AND CALDWELL,  SAN FRANCISCO,  CALIF.
AVAIL       JOURNAL OF THE WATER POLLUTION  CONTROL FEDERATION,
            VOL 42, NO 7, P  1292-1304, JULY  1970.  1 FIG,
            1 TAB.
I DEN        SUSPENDED  SOLIDS,  WASTING,  COMPUTATION,  PROCESS
            CONTROL.
KEYWORDS    *MATHEMATICAL  MODEL,  *ACTIVATED SLUDGE,  *CONTROL,
            SLUDGE, KINETICS,  DESIGN.
ABSTRACT    FOR  THE  USE  OF  THE  MEAN CELL  RESIDENCE   OR  THE
            SOLIDS  RETENTION  TIME   IN  THE  CONTROL   OF   AN
            ACTIVATED  SLUDGE  SYSTEM,  ONE  MUST   SELECT  THE
            DESIRED TIME,  COMPUTE  THE TOTAL SOLIDS  PRESENT IN
            THE SYSTEM AND DETERMINE  THE  TOTAL VOLATILE SOLIDS
            TO BE WASTED PER DAY.  THE  SOLIDS  IN THE SYSTEM MAY
            BE EXPRESSED  AS THE SUM  OF THOSE  IN  THE AERATION
            FACILITIES  SECONDARY  SEDIMENTATION  UNITS  AND  THE
            SLUDGE  RETURN  SYSTEM.  SOLIDS ARE  WASTED  BOTH OVER
                               143

-------
            THE EFFLUENT  WEIR AND THROUGH THE SOLIDS  DISPOSAL
            SYSTEM. NUMERICAL EXAMPLES SHOW THESE  COMPUTATIONS
            FOR   CONVENTIONAL,   STEP  FEED,   HIGH  RATE   AND
            MULTIPLE STEP OPERATIONS OF AN HYPOTHETICAL  PLANT.
            ASSUMED  PLANT DESIGN  IS  FOR AN  18  MGD FLOW.  THE
            PLANT  LAYOUT  INCLUDES FOUR AERATION TANKS, MIXED
            LIQUOR   CHANNEL  AND   RETURN   ACTIVATED   SLUDGE
            CHANNEL, AND FOUR SECONDARY SEDIMENTATION  BASINS.
            (HANCUFF-TEXAS)

TITLE       MAXIMIZING PHOSPHORUS  REMOVAL IN  ACTIVATED SLUDGE.
AUTHOR      ELLIOTT, W. R.; RIDING, J. T.; SHERRARD, J.  H.
CORP AUTH   VIRGINIA   POLYTECHNIC   INST.  AND  STATE   UNIV.,
            BLACKSBURG. DEPT. OF CIVIL ENGINEERING.
PUB DESC    WATER  AND  SEWAGE WORKS,  VOL 125, NO  3,   P  88-92,
            MARCH, 1978. 38 REF.
KEYWORDS    *PHOSPHORUS,   *BIOLOGICAL  TREATMENT,  *ACTIVATED
            SLUDGE, *CHEMICAL PERCIPITATION,  NUTRIENT  REMOVAL,
            ABSORPTION,   BIODEGRADATION,   CALCIUM  CARBONATE,
            LIME,   PILOT  PLANTS,   LABORATORY  TESTS,   HARDNESS
            (WATER),     PHOSPHATES,     LIMITING      FACTORS,
            PUBLICATIONS,  WASTE   WATER  TREATMENT,  MUNICIPAL
            WASTES.
ABSTRACT    IMPROVING  PHOSPHORUS  REMOVAL IN  ACTIVATED  SLUDGE
            BY MICROBIAL  GROWTH,  EXCESS  UPTAKE, AND  CHEMICAL
            PRECIPITATION  WAS   DISCUSSED  IN   A  REVIEW   OF
            PUBLISHED  EXPERIMENTAL DATA AND  ON-SITE   TESTS  IN
            WASTE  WATER  TREATMENT PLANTS. LABORATORY  DATA  ON
            MICROBIAL  UPTAKE IDENTIFIED  THE  C:P  RATIO AS A
            LIMITING FACTOR  IN  PHOSPHORUS  REMOVA1; THE  HIGHER
            COD:P  RATIO  PROVIDED  MORE OF  THE  STOICHIOMETRIC
            REQUIREMENT.   VARIATIONS  IN  MEAN CELL RESIDENCE
            TIME  AFFECTED  PHOSPHORUS  REMOVAL,   ALTHOUGH   THE
            AVERAGE  SLUDGE  PHOSPHORUS  CONTENT  OF   2-3%   BY
            WEIGHT  WAS NOT  SIGNIFICANTLY  IMPROVED.   ENHANCED
            PHOSPHORUS  REMOVAL  WAS  ACHIEVED   IN  PLUG FLOW
            REACTORS  WITH  DISSOLVED  OXYGEN  CONTROL  AT PH6;
            ANAEROBIC  CONDITIONS  WERE  AVOIDED  BY   ADEQUATE
            SLUDGE  REMOVAL.   BATCH STUDIES   ON  EXCESS  UPTAKE
            DEMONSTRATED  THAT  80% REMOVAL OCCURRED FOR A  LOW
            PHOSPHATE   CONCENTRATION,   5MG/LITER,    IN   THE
            PRESENCE  OF  A  HIGH  MICROBIAL   POPULATION.   THE
            PRESENCE OF  NA(+) AND K  AND  THE RATE  OF  AERATION
            WERE   CITED   AS   LIMITING   FACTORS   IN   EXCESS
            PHOSPHORUS  UPTAKE.  FULL-SCALE   STUDIES   VERIFIED
            THAT  PHOSPHORUS  WAS   RELEASED  INTO  THE   EFFLUENT
            STREAM  UNDER  ANAEROBIC  CONDITIONS.   PRECIPITATION
            WITH CAC03 RESULTED IN HYDROLYSIS OF PHOSPHATES AT
            THE  HEAD  OF  THE  AERATION  TANK,  DECREASED   C02
                              144

-------
            GENERATION,   AND   THE   FORMATION   OF   CALCIUM
            PHOSPHATE  SLUDGE.   THE   OPTIMUM  CONDITIONS  FOR
            PHOSPHORUS  REMOVAL  IN A  PLUG  FLOW  SYSTEM WERE
            CONCLUDED TO BE: PH 7.5-8.5 LESS THAN 350 MG/LITER
            CAC03, AND 24 MG/LITER MG(-H-). (LISK- FIRL)

TITLE       THE METAZOA OF WASTE TREATMENT
            PROCESSES-ROTIFERS.
AUTHOR      CALAWAY, W. T.
CORP AUTH   FLORIDA UNIV., GAINESVILLE.
AVAIL       JOURNAL OF WATER POLLUTION CONTROL FEDERATION,
            VOL 40, NO 11, PART 2, P R412-R422, NOV. 1968.
            3 FIG, 0 TAB, 23 REF.
IDEN        *METAZOA
DESC        *ACTIVATED   SLUDGE,   *ROTIFERS,   *MICROBIOLOGY,
            *EFFICIENCIES,    TREATMENT,    WASTE    TREATMENT,
            TRICKLING FILTER, SEWAGE TREATMENT, ANIMALS, WASTE
            WATER TREATMENT.
ABSTRACT    DIFFERENT WASTE  WATER TREATMENT PROCESSES DEVELOP
            DIFFERENT  CHARACTERISTICS  FAUNA.  THE  ACTIVATED
            SLUDGE  PROCESS  COMMONLY SUPPORTS  ROTIFERS AS ITS
            PRINCIPAL  METAZOA,   TRICKLING   FILTERS   SUPPORT
            POPULATIONS   OF   ROTIFERS,    ROUND   WORMS,   AND
            ANNELIDS, AND THE METAZOA  OF  LAGOONS VERY WIDELY.
            ALTHOUGH  THE  METAZOA  SOMETIMES  CAUSE  TREATMENT
            PROBLEMS  THEY CONSUME  LARGE  AMOUNTS  OF   BACTERIA
            AND SOLIDS AND  THEREFORE ARE GENERALLY HELPFUL  IN
            TREATMENT. THEY ALSO  BREAK  UP  BIOLOGICAL MASSES
            AND EXPOSE NEW AREAS  TO  OXYGEN. THE ROTIFERS AID
            IN   KEEPING   AN   ACTIVELY   GROWING   BACTERIAL
            POPULATION  BY   CONSUMING   BACTERIA  AND  THEREBY
            ENCOURAGING   REPLACEMENT  GROWTH.   BY  CONSUMING
            UNFLOCCULATED BACTERIA, THE ROTIFERS CONTRIBUTE  TO
            CLEARER   EFFLUENCE.   THEIR   SECRETION   CAN  ALSO
            CONTRIBUTE TO FLOCCULATION OF SUSPENDED MATERIALS.
            THE   BDELLOID   ROTIFERS  DOMINATE   AS   PROCESS
            STABILITY IS APPROACHED. (DIFILIPPO-TEXAS)

TITLE       MICROSCOPIC ANALYSIS  OF  PLANKTON, PERIPHYTON, AND
            ACTIVATED SLUDGE. TRAINING MANUAL.
PUB DATE    JUN 76
DESC        BIOLOGICAL   SCIENCES;   CHEMISTRY;   ENVIRONMENT;
            INSTRUCTIONAL  MATERIALS; LABORATORY  PROCEDURES,
            *MANUALS, *MICROBIOLOGY, POST SECONDARY EDUCATION,
            SCIENCE   EDUCATION,    *WASTE   DISPOSAL,   WATER
            POLLUTION  CONTROL,  *WATER RESOURCES,  *ACTIVATED
            SLUDGE,            *WASTEWATER           TREATMENT
                              145

-------
ERIC NO.    ED161715
DESC NOTE   342P.; CONTAINS OCCASIONAL LIGHT  AND  SMALL TYPE
ISSUE       RIEMAR79
ABSTRACT    THIS MANUAL IS INTENDED FOR PROFESSIONAL PERSONNEL
            IN   THE  FIELDS   OF  WATER   POLLUTION   CONTROL,
            LIMNOLOGY,  WATER   SUPPLY  AND   WASTE   TREATMENT,
            PRIMARY  EMPHASIS  IS  GIVEN  TO  PRACTICE  IN  THE
            IDENTIFICATION  AND   ENUMERATION  OF   MICROSCOPIC
            ORGANISMS  WHICH  MAY  BE  ENCOUNTERED  IN WATER  AND
            ACTIVATED  SLUDGE.  METHODS  FOR   THE  CHEMICAL  AND
            INSTRUMENTAL  EVALUATION  OF  PLANKTON  ARE  COMPARED
            WITH THE RESULTS OF  MICROSCOPIC  EXAMINATION  IN  AN
            EXTENSIVE   PRACTICAL   EXERCISE.    PROBLEMS    OF
            SIGNIFICANCE  AND  CONTROL  ARE   ALSO  CONSIDERED.
            (AUTHOR/BB)

TITLE       OPERATION  OF  WASTEWATER  TREATMENT PLANTS: A  HOME
            STUDY TRAINING PROGRAM.
AUTHOR      KERRI, K., ED.
PUB DATE    70
AVAIL       DEPARTMENT OF  CIVIL  ENGINEERING,  CALIFORNIA  STATE
            UNIVERSITY  AT  SACRAMENTO,   6000   JAY   STREET,
            SACRAMENTO, CA 95819
DESC        ACTIVATED  SLUDGE,   CHLORINATION,  INSTRUCTIONAL
            MATERIALS,  MAINTENANCE,   *MANUALS,    OPERATIONS
            (WASTEWATER),   PRIMARY TREATMENT, *POST  SECONDARY
            EDUCATION,  PUMPS,   SAFETY,   SEDIMENTATION,  SLUDGE
            TREATMENT,    STABILIZATION    LAGOONS,    TRICKLING
            FILTERS, *WASTE DISPOSAL, *WASTEWATER TREATMENT
DESC NOTE   1317P.  REVISED ANNUALLY;  ALSO AVAILABLE  ON  ERIC
            MICROFICHE ED150008.
ABSTRACT    WRITTEN  BY  EXPERIENCED OPERATORS WITH THE  INTENT
            OF  PROVIDING  OPERATORS WITH  THE  INFORMATION  THEY
            NEED   TO  KNOW   TO    OPERATE   THEIR  PLANTS   AS
            EFFICIENTLY   AS   POSSIBLE.    OPERATORS,   PERSONS
            INTERESTED  IN  BECOMING  OPERATORS,   AND   PERSONS
            INTERESTED  IN THE  OPERATION OF  TREATMENT  PLANTS
            WILL  FIND VALUABLE   INFO  IN  THE  MANUAL.  TOPICS
            COVERED  INCLUDE  DESCRIPTION  OF  PLANTS,  RACKS,
            SCREENS, COMMINUTORS,  GRIT REMOVAL, SEDIMENTATION,
            TRICKLING   FILTERS,   ACTIVATED   SLUDGE,   SLUDGE
            DISGESTION  AND  HANDLING,   PONDS,   CHLORINATION,
            MAINTENANCE, SAFETY,  MATH, LAB, RECORD.

TITLE       OPERATIONAL CONTROL   PROCEDURES  FOR THE  ACTIVATED
            SLUDGE PROCESS: APPENDIX.
AUTHOR      WEST, ALFRED W.
PUB DATE    MAR 74
                              146

-------
DESC        *ENVIRONMENTAL     TECHNICIANS,     INSTRUCTIONAL
            MATERIALS,   *JOB   SKILLS,   LABORATORY  TRAINING,
            MANAGEMENT,  *MEASUREMENT  TECHNIQUES,  POLLUTION,
            *POST SECONDARY EDUCATION,  WASTE DISPOSAL, *WATER
            POLLUTION  CONTROL,  ACTIVATED  SLUDGE,  *WASTEWATER
            TREATMENT, WATER QUALITY
ERIC NO.     ED156472
EDRS PRICE  EDRS PRICE MF-$0.83 HC-$2.06 PLUS POSTAGE.
DESC NOTE   37P. , FOR  RELATED  DOCUMENTS,  SEE  SE  024  421-423;
            GRAPHS AND CHARTS  MAY NOT REPRODUCE WELL
ISSUE       RIENOV78
ABSTRACT    THIS  DOCUMENT  IS  THE APPENDIX FOR  A  SERIES  OF
            DOCUMENTS  DEVELOPED  BY THE  NATIONAL  TRAINING AND
            OPERATIONAL    TECHNOLOGY     CENTER    DESCRIBING
            OPERATIONAL  CONTROL  PROCEDURES  FOR  THE ACTIVATED
            SLUDGE  PROCESS  USED  IN  WASTEWATER  TREATMENT.
            CATEGORIES DISCUSSED  INCLUDE:  CONTROL  TEST DATA,
            TREND  CHARTS,  MOVING AVERAGES,  SEMI-LOGARITHMIC
            PLOTS,   PROBABILITY    PLOT   EXAMPLES,   TESTING
            EQUIPMENT AND SYMBOLS AND TERMINOLOGY. (CS)

TITLE       OPERATIONAL  CONTROL  PROCEDURES  FOR  THE ACTIVATED
            SLUDGE PROCESS, PART  I - OBSERVATIONS,  PART II -
            CONTROL TESTS.
AUTHOR      WEST, ALFRED W.
PUB DATE    MAY 74
DESC        *ENVIRONMENT,   INSTRUCTIONAL   MATERIALS,   *JOB
            SKILLS,    LABORATORY    TRAINING,     MANAGEMENT,
            MEASUREMENT TECHNIQUES, POLLUTION, *POST SECONDARY
            EDUCATION,   WASTE   DISPOSAL,    *WATER   POLLUTION
            CONTROL, ACTIVATED  SLUDGE,  *WASTEWATER TREATMENT,
            WATER QUALITY
ERIC NO.     ED156469
EDRS PRICE  EDRS PRICE MF-$0.83 HC-$2.06 PLUS POSTAGE.
DESC NOTE   31P.; FOR  RELATED  DOCUMENTS,  SEE  SE  024  422-424;
            CONTAINS  OCCASIONAL   LIGHT  TYPE;  PHOTOGRAPHS  MAY
            NOT REPRODUCE WELL.
ISSUE       RIENOV78
ABSTRACT    THIS  IS  THE  FIRST  IN  A  SERIES  OF  DOCUMENTS
            DEVELOPED BY THE NATIONAL TRAINING AND OPERATIONAL
            TECHNOLOGY CENTER  DESCRIBING  OPERATIONAL CONTROL
            PROCEDURES FOR  THE  ACTIVATED  SLUDGE  PROCESS USED
            IN  WASTEWATER  TREATMENT.  PART  I OF  THIS  DOCUMENT
            DEALS WITH PHYSICAL  OBSERVATIONS WHICH  SHOULD BE
            PERFORMED  DURING  EACH ROUTINE  CONTROL TEST. PART
            II  DISCUSSES THE  CONTROL TESTS THAT ARE  USED TO
            DIRECTLY   IDENTIFY  PROCESS   PERFORMANCE  AND  TO
            DICTATE PROCESS CONTROL  ADJUSTMENTS.  INCLUDED ARE
                              147

-------
            CENTRIFUGE  TESTS,  EFFLUENT  TURBIDITY  TESTS  AND
            DISSOLVED OXYGEN TESTS.  (CS)

TITLE       OPERATIONAL  CONTROL PROCEDURES  FOR THE  ACTIVATED
            SLUDGE    PROCESS,    PART    III-A:    CALCULATION
            PROCEDURES.
AUTHOR      WEST, ALFRED W.
PUB DATE    DEC 73
DESC        CALCULATION,      ENVIRONMENT,      INSTRUCTIONAL
            MATERIALS,   *JOB   SKILLS,   LABORATORY   TRAINING,
            MANAGEMENT,  MEASUREMENT  TECHNIQUES,   POLLUTION,
            *POST SECONDARY  EDUCATION,  WASTE DISPOSAL,  *WATER
            POLLUTION  CONTROL,  *ACTIVATED SLUDGE,  *WASTEWATER
            TREATMENT, WATER QUALITY
ERIC NO.    ED156470
EDRS PRICE  EDRS PRICE MF-$0.83 HC-$3.50  PLUS POSTAGE.
DESC NOTE   56P.; FOR RELATED DOCUMENTS,  SEE SE 024 421-424
ISSUE       RIENOV78
ABSTRACT    THIS  IS  THE  SECOND  IN  A  SERIES  OF  DOCUMENTS
            DEVELOPED BY THE NATIONAL TRAINING  AND  OPERATIONAL
            TECHNOLOGY  CENTER  DESCRIBING OPERATIONAL  CONTROL
            PROCEDURES  FOR  THE ACTIVATED  SLUDGE PROCESS USED
            IN  WASTEWATER,  TREATMENT.   THIS   DOCUMENT   DEALS
            EXCLUSIVELY  wilH  THE   CALCULATION   PROCEDURES,
            INCLUDING  SIMPLIFIED  MIXING FORMULAS,  AERATION
            TANK   CHARACTERISTICS,    ORGANIC    LOADING    AND
            PURIFICATION  PRESSURES,   CLARIFIER  SLUDGE  FLOW
            DEMAND, AND MIXING  FORMULA DEVELOPMENT.  (CS)

TITLE       OPERATIONAL  CONTROL PROCEDURES  FOR THE  ACTIVATED
            SLUDGE PROCESS, PART III-B: CALCULATION PROCEDURES
            FOR  STEP-FEED  PROCESS  RESPONSES AND ADDENDUM  NO.
            1.
AUTHOR      WEST, ALFRED W.
PUB DATE    FEE 75
DESC        CALCULATION,      ENVIRONMENT,      INSTRUCTIONAL
            MATERIALS,  *JOB  SKILLS,  LABORATORY   TECHNIQUES,
            MANAGEMENT,  MEASUREMENT  TECHNIQUES,   POLLUTION,
            *POST SECONDARY  EDUCATION,  WASTE DISPOSAL,  *WATER
            POLLUTION  CONTROL,  *ACTIVATED SLUDGE,  *WASTEWATER
            TREATMENT, WATER QUALITY
ERIC NO.    ED156471
EDRS PRICE  EDRS PRICE MF-$0.83 HC-$2.06  PLUS POSTAGE.
DESC NOTE   44P., FOR RELATED DOCUMENTS,  SEE SE 024 421-424^
ISSUE       RIENOV78
ABSTRACT    THIS  IS  THE  THIRD  IN  A   SERIES OF  DOCUMENTS
            DEVELOPED BY THE NATIONAL TRAINING  AND  OPERATIONAL
            TECHNOLOGY  CENTER  DESCRIBING OPERATIONAL  CONTROL
            PROCEDURES  FOR  THE ACTIVATED SLUDGE PROCESS USED
                              148

-------
            IN WASTEWATER TREATMENT.  THIS DOCUMENT DEALS WITH
            THE CALCULATION PROCEDURES  ASSOCIATED  WITH A STEP
            FEED  PROCESS.  ILLUSTRATIONS  AND  EXAMPLES  ARE
            INCLUDED  TO  EMPHASIZE  HOW  THE ACTIVATED SLUDGE
            PROCESS REACTS TO CHANGES IN  WASTEWATER FEED-POINT
            LOCATIONS. THE  SUMMARY  ILLUSTRATES THE  TYPES  OF
            CHANGES  THAT OCCUR WHEN  A  PLUG-FLOW  SYSTEM  IS
            SWITCHED TO VARIOUS STEP-FEED COMBINATIONS. (CS)

TITLE       OPERATIONAL CONTROL TESTS FOR THE ACTIVATED SLUDGE
            PROCESS - PART I (XT-40).
AUTHOR      WEST, A. W.
PUB DATE    71
DESC        *AUDIOVISUAL   AIDS,   INSTRUCTIONAL   MATERIALS,
            LABORATORY PROCEDURES, POLLUTION,  *POST  SECONDARY
            EDUCATION,   WATER   POLLUTION   CONTROL,    *SLUDGE,
            *SOLID  WASTES,  WASTEWATER  TREATMENT,  *ACTIVATED
            SLUDGE
DESC NOTE   INCLUDED  IS  A 16  MINUTE TAPE,  51  SLIDES, ALSO A
            SCRIPT.  AVAILABLE  ON  LOAN FROM  NTOTC,   26  W ST.
            CLAIR, CINCINNATI, OHIO 45268
ABSTRACT    THIS  MODULE  IS  DESIGNED  FOR  WASTEWATER  WORKS
            OPERATORS  WHO  WISH  TO UPGRADE  PLANT  PERFORMANCE
            AND  TO  INCREASE  THEIR  OWN KNOWLEDGE  AND SKILLS.
            THIS  IS  PART ONE  OF  A THREE-PART  LESSON SERIES
            ON  OPERATIONAL  CONTROL  TESTS  FOR  THE   ACTIVATED
            SLUDGE   PROCESS.   ENTITLED  "OBSERVATIONS,"  THIS
            FIRST PART IS CONCERNED  WITH  THE ACCURATE READING
            OF METERS  AND  WITH THE  VISUAL OBSERVATIONS TO BE
            MADE  BOTH AT THE  AERATOR  (FOAM CHARACTERISTICS,
            SLUDGE,   COLOR,   AND  ODOR)  AND   AT   THE  FINAL
            CLARIFIERS (CLARITY,  EVIDENCES OF  BULKING AND OF
            SEPTIC SOLIDS). PROVISIONAL INTERPRETATIONS TO BE
            MADE  OF  THESE  VISUAL  OBSERVATIONS  ARE PRESENTED,
            AND  THE  EFFECTIVE USE OF  A SLUDGE BLANKET FINDER
            IS DISCUSSED IN DETAIL.  (AUTHOR/JK)

TITLE       OPERATIONAL CONTROL TESTS FOR THE ACTIVATED SLUDGE
            PROCESS --PART II  (XT-41).
AUTHOR      WEST, A. W.
PUB DATE    71
DESC        *AUDIOVISUAL   AIDS,   INSTRUCTIONAL   MATERIALS,
            LABORATORY PROCEDURES, POLLUTION,  *POST  SECONDARY
            EDUCATION, *SOLID WASTES, WATER POLLUTION CONTROL,
            *SLUDGE, WASTEWATER TREATMENT,  *ACTIVATED SLUDGE
DESC NOTE   INCLUDED  IS  A  17  MINUTE  TAPE,  47 SLIDES  AND A
            SCRIPT.  AVAILABLE  ON  LOAN FROM  NTOTC,   26  W ST.
            CLAIR, CICINNATI,  OHIO 45268
                              149

-------
            PERFORMANCE  AND TO  INCREASE  THEIR  OWN  KNOWLEDGE
            AND  SKILLS.   THIS  IS  PART  TWO  OF   A  THREE-PART
            LESSON SERIES ON OPERATIONAL CONTROL  TESTS  FOR THE
            ACTIVATED SLUDGE PROCESS.  THIS PART  IS A DETAILED
            DISCUSSION OF THE PREFERRED TECHNIQUES INVOLVED IN
            CONDUCTING SETTLOMETER TESTS TO  DETERMINE SETTLING
            CHARACTERISTICS  AND  IN  CENTRIFUGING  SAMPLES  TO
            DETERMINE  THE CONCENTRATION  OF MIXED LIQUOR  AND
            RETURN  SLUDGE.   HANDLING  THE  RELATED SAMPLES  IS
            INCLUDED  ALONG  WITH PROVISIONAL  INTERPRETATIONS
            AND APPLICATIONS OF  THE  TESTS.  (AUTHOR/JK)

TITLE       OPERATIONAL CONTROL  TESTS  FOR  THE  ACTIVATED SLUDGE
            PROCESS - PART III (XT-42).
AUTHOR      WEST, A. W.
PUB DATE    71
DESC        *AUDIOVISUAL   AIDS,   INSTRUCTIONAL   MATERIALS,
            LABORATORY PROCEDURES,  POLLUTION, *POST SECONDARY
            EDUCATION, *SOLID WASTES,  WATER  POLLUTION CONTROL,
            *SLUDGE,  WASTEWATER  TREATMENT,  *ACTIVATED  SLUDGE
DESC NOTE   INCLUDED  IS  A  22  MINUTE  TAPE,  67  SLIDES, AND A
            SCRIPT. AVAILABLE  ON LOAN FROM NTOTC,  26  W.  ST.
            CLAIR, CINCINNATI, OHIO  45268
ABSTRACT    THIS MODULE IS DESIGNED  FOR EXPERIENCED WASTEWATER
            WORKS   OPERATORS  WHO   WISH  TO   UPGRADE   PLANT
            PERFORMANCE  AND TO  INCREASE  THEIR  OWN  KNOWLEDGE
            AND  SKILLS.  THIS  IS PART THREE  OF  A  THREE-PART
            LESSON SERIES ON OPERATIONAL CONTROL  TESTS  FOR THE
            ACTIVATED  SLUDGE  PROCESS.  THIS  CONCLUDING  PART
            PRESENTS     DEVELOPMENT    OF    SETTLING     AND
            CONCENTRATION    CURVES    FROM   SETTLOMETER    AND
            CENTRIFUGE    TESTS    RESULTS,    TECHNIQUES    FOR
            CONDUCTING   TURBIDITY   TESTS   AS   WELL  AS   THE
            SIGNIFICANCE  OF TURBIDITY RESULTS,   A SUMMARY  OF
            ALL  THE  TESTS PRESENTED IN THE  THREE-PART  SERIES,
            THE  CONTROL  ADJUSTMENTS  WHICH  ARE  MADE  ON  THE
            BASIS OF THESE TEST  RESULTS, AND PROGRESSIVE  TREND
            CHARTS OF PROCESS CHARACTERISTICS. (AUTHOR/JK)

TITLE       OXYGEN   ACTIVATED   SLUDGE    CONSIDERATIONS    FOR
            INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS.
AUTHOR      ADAMS, C. E. , JR.; ECKENFELDER,  W. W. ,  JR.;  KOON,
            J. H.; SHELBY, S. E.
CORP AUTH   AWARE, INC., NASHVILLE,  TN.
PUB DESC    AVAILABLE  FROM  COPYRIGHT  CENTER,  INC.,  NEW  YORK,
            NY   AS    0065-8812-78-9754-0178    ($0.95).    IN:
            WATER--1977,  AICHE   SYMPOSIUM  SERIES,  VOL  74,  NO
            178, EDITED  BY G. F.  BENNETT,  P  93-101,  1978,  9
            FIG, 6 REF.
                              150

-------
KEYWORDS
ABSTRACT
TITLE
            *ACTIVATED   SLUDGE,   *WASTE   WATER   TREATMENT,
            INDUSTRIAL   WASTE,   *OXYGENATION,   *BIOLOGICAL
            TREATMENT, *EVALUATION, WASTE TREATMENT, AERATION,
            HYDROGEN  ION  CONCENTRATION,  ORGANIC  COMPOUNDS,
            SLUDGE,    SUSPENDED   SOLIDS,   ECONOMICS,   COSTS,
            APPRAISALS,  INSTALLATION  COSTS,   OPERATING  COSTS,
            ODOR.
            A NUMBER  OF  FACTORS ARE  DISCUSSED WHICH MUST BE
            EVALUATED  WHEN  ASSESSING THE  RELATIVE  MERITS OF
            AIR  OXYGENTED   VERSUS  PURE  OXYGEN  OXYGENATED
            ACTIVATED  SLUDGE   SYSTEMS   FOR   INDUSTRIAL  USE.
            ORGANIC  REMOVAL KINETICS MAY PLAY A MORE IMPORTANT
            ROLE  IN TREATING  INDUSTRIAL WASTES THAN MUNICIPAL
            WASTES  BECAUSE OF THEIR HIGH STRENGTH. IT IS SHOWN
            THAT   A  HIGHER  DISSOLVED  OXYGEN  LEVEL  IN  THE
            AERATION BASIN WILL RESULT  IN A  HIGHER RESISTANCE
            TO ORGANIC SHOCK LOADINGS AND A MORE AEROBIC FLOG.
            A HIGHER  TEMPERATURE  BECAUSE OF  THE  ENCLOSURE OF
            THE AERATION BASIN IS  AN  ADVANTAGE  OF  THE  PURE
            OXYGEN   SYSTEM,   ESPECIALLY  IN   COLD  CLIMATES.
            EQUILIBIRUM  OF  THE  AERATION BASIN  PH  CAN  BE  A
            PROBLEM WITH THE  PURE OXYGEN  SYSTEM  BECAUSE IT
            INTAILS  A SLIGHTLY LOWER  PH.  WITH HIGHLY  ACIDIC
            INDUSTRIAL WASTE  WATERS  IT MAY  BE  DIFFICULT TO
            MAINTAIN PH TO AN ACCEPTABLE RANGE BETWEEN 6.5 AND
            7.5.  ALSO, THE  ENCLOSED OXYGEN  SYSTEM MAY  RESULT
            IN DIFFICULTIES  BY  RETAINING   VOLATILE  ORGANICS
            WHICH CAN  INHIBIT  THE  SYSTEM. PURE OXYGEN SYSTEMS
            ARE PREFERABLE  TO AIR OXYGEN SYSTEMS FOR CONTROL
            OF ODORS   AND  SUSCEPTIBILITY TO  SHOCK LOADINGS.
            ANOTHER  FACTOR  TO  BE  CONSIDERED  IS  MIXED  LIQUOR
            VOLATILE SUSPENDED SOLIDS CONCENTRATIONS WHICH CAN
            BE HANDLED EFFECTIVELY BY BOTH SYSTEMS  IF THEY ARE
            PROPERLY DESIGNED; HOWEVER,  THE PURE OXYGEN SYSTEM
            DOES  HAVE  THE ADVANTAGE  OF BEING  ABLE TO  SUPPLY
            SUFFICIENT  OXYGEN  TO  MAINTAIN  RELATIVELY  HIGH
            MIXED LIQUOR OR  SOLIDS  LEVELS  WITHOUT REQUIRING
            USE  OF   HIGH POWER LEVELS  WHICH  WOULD  PROMOTE
            BREAK-UP  OF  FLOG PARTICLES. ECONOMICALLY,  A  PURE
            OXYGEN  SYSTEM  COSTS  MORE  TO  CONSTRUCT BUT  MAY
            OFFER  SUBSTANTIAL  SAVINGS  IN  OPERATING  COSTS,
            BASED MOSTLY ON THE POWER REQUIREMENTS TO ACHIEVE
            THE NECESSARY DISSOLVED OXYGEN CONCENTRATION.  (SEE
            ALSO  W79-00342) (MAJTENYI-IPA)
            PERFORMANCE  OF  CIRCULAR  FINAL  CLARIFIERS  AT  AN
            ACTIVATED SLUDGE PLANT
AUTHOR      MUNCH,  W. L.; FITZPATRICK, J. A.
CORP AUTH   METROPOLITAN SANITARY  DISTRICT  OF GREATER CHICAGO
                               151

-------
PUB DESC    JOURNAL WATER POLLUTION CONTROL  FEDERATION,
            VOL 50, NO 2, P 265-276, FEBRUARY,  1978.  10  FIG,
            2 TAB, 10 REF.
KEYWORDS    *ACTIVATED  SLUDGE,  *SETTLING BASINS,   *HYDRAULIC
            MODELS,  *SOLID  WASTES,  *SEPARATION   TECHNIQUES,
            SUSPENDED  SOLIDS,   HYDRAULICS,   EFFLUENT  STREAMS,
            PERFORMANCE,  WASTE  WATER  TREATMENT,   MUNICIPAL
            WASTES.
ABSTRACT    THE   PERFORMANCE   OF   A   38    M-DIAM   CIRCULAR
            CENTER-FEED CLARIFIER  WAS  EVALUATED UNDER VARYING
            CONDITIONS OF HYDRAULIC AND  SOLIDS LOADING AT AN
            ACTIVATED  SLUDGE   TREATMENT  FACILITY  IN 'CHICAGO,
            ILLINOIS.  LIMITING THE  EFFLUENT FLOW  TO 0.66 CU
            M/SEC  WITH A 30%   RETURN  RATE   ALLOWED A MAXIMUM
            SOLIDS LOADING RATE FOR EFFICIENT CLARIFICATION OF
            146 KG/SQ M/DAY AT A MIXED LIQUOR CONCENTRATION OF
            2,500  MG/LITER.  HIGHER  FLOW RATES WERE  POSSIBLE
            WHEN  THE  MIXED LIQUOR CONTENT  WAS  DECREASED.  A
            HIGHER SOLIDS LOADING RATE WAS ACCOMMODATED  BY THE
            CLARIFIER  WHEN  THE HYDRAULIC   LOADING  RATE  WAS
            MAINTAINED  BELOW  0.83  CU  M/SEC,   VERIFYING  THE
            DEPENDENCE OF SOLIDS LOADING ON  HYDRAULIC  LOAD. AN
            INCREASE IN  THE  THICKNESS OF  THE  SLUDGE  BLANKET,
            OCCURRING AT HYDRAULIC  LOADING  IN  EXCESS OF 0.83
            CU M/SEC  AT A 30% RETURN,  THREATENED  THE  SOLIDS
            SEPARATION  EFFICIENCY  OF  THE   CLARIFIER.   SLUDGE
            BLANKET LEVEL, SOLIDS SETTLEABILITY, AND HYDRAULIC
            LOADING  REPORTEDLY  HAD  A  GREATER   IMPACT  ON
            CLARIFIER SOLIDS  SEPARATION PERFORMANCE THAN SHOCK
            HYDRAULIC  LOADING.  THE   ACTUAL  MAXIMUM   SOLIDS
            LOADING  RATE  WAS   SIGNIFICANTLY  LOWER  THAN  THE
            THEORETICAL MAXIMUM. (LISK-FIRL)

TITLE       PRIMARY TREATMENT AND SLUDGE DIGESTION  WORKSHOP.
PUB DATE    SEP 77
AVAIL       PUBLICATIONS   CENTRE,    ONTARIO    MINISTRY   OF
            GOVERNMENT  SERVICES,  880  BAY   ST.,   5TH   FLOOR,
            TORONTO, ONTARIO,  CANADA  M7A 1N8  ($'2.00;  ORDERS
            MUST  BE  ACCOMPANIED  BY  CHECK OR  MONEY  ORDER
            PAYABLE TO "THE TREASURER OF ONTARIO")
DESC        *BEHAVIORAL OBJECTIVES;  *ENVIRONMENTAL EDUCATION;
            ENVIRONMENTAL TECHNICIANS, EQUIPMENT,  JOB SKILLS,
            *POLLUTION,   SAMPLING,   WASTE   DISPOSAL,   *WATER
            POLLUTION  CONTROL, *WORKSHOPS,  ONTARIO,  *SLUDGE,
            *WASTEWATER TREATMENT
ERIC NO.    ED155002
EDRS PRICE  EDRS PRICE MF-$0.83 PLUS POSTAGE. HC NOT AVAILABLE
            FROM EDRS.
                              152

-------
DESC NOTE   269P; FOR  RELATED DOCUMENTS,  SEE  SE 024  226-233,
       x     NOT AVAILABLE IN HARD COPY DUE TO COPYRIGHT
            RESTRICTIONS; CONTAINS COLORED PAGES WHICH MAY NOT
            NOT REPRODUCE WELL
ISSUE       RIEOCT78
ABSTRACT    THIS MANUAL  WAS  DEVELOPED  FOR  USE  AT WORKSHOPS
            DESIGNED TO  UPGRADE THE  KNOWLEDGE  OF  EXPERIENCED
            WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT  OPERATORS.  EACH OF THE
            SIXTEEN  LESSONS  HAS  CLEARLY   STATED   BEHAVIORAL
            OBJECTIVES TO TELL THE TRAINEE WHAT HE  SHOULD KNOW
            OR  DO  AFTER COMPLETING  THAT TOPIC.  AREAS COVERED
            IN  THIS MANUAL  INCLUDE:  SEWAGE CHARACTERISTICS;
            COLLECTION,  TREATMENT,  AND  SEDIMENTATION; AEROBIC
            AND     ANAEROBIC     DIGESTION;     SAMPLING    AND
            INTERPRETATION;   MONITORING   AND   CONTROL;   AND
            SELECTED TESTS. (CS)

TITLE       PROCESS  CONTROL   BY  OXYGEN-UPTAKE   AND  SOLIDS
            ANALYSIS.
AUTHOR      BENEFIELD, L. D.; RANDALL, C. W.; KING,  P. H.
CORP AUTH   MISSISSIPPI  STATE  UNIV.,  MISSISSIPPI STATE. DEPT.
            OF CIVIL ENGINEERING.
AVAIL       JOURNAL WATER POLLUTION CONTROL  FEDERATION,
            VOL 47, NO  10,  P  2498-2503,  OCTOBER, 1975. 2 FIG,
            6 REF.
IDEN        PROCESS CONTROL, *OXYGEN-UPTAKE, *SOLIDS ANALYSIS,
            CLARIFIERS,  SLUDGE  AGE,  SLUDGE WASTING, SUBSTRATE
            CONCENTRATION.
KEYWORDS    OXYGEN,  *SOLIDS  CONTACT  PROCESSES,   WASTE  WATER
            TREATMENT,   *ACTIVATED  SLUDGE,  ANALYSIS,  SLUDGE
            TREATMENT,   MICROORGANISM,   MATHEMATICS,  CONTROL
            SYSTEMS.
ABSTRACT    THE MOST COMMON METHODS USED BY  PLANT OPERATORS  TO
            CONTROL   THE   ACTIVATED    SLUDGE   PROCESS   ARE
            DISCUSSED.   THE   THEORETICAL  BASIS  FOR  ANOTHER
            METHOD  HAVING  CERTAIN ADVANTAGES OVER  THE OTHERS
            WAS  STUDIED. FOUR  CONTROL  METHODS  IN  COMMON USE
            ARE: SLUDGE  WASTING TO MAINTAIN  A CONSTANT MASS  OF
            ORGANISMS   IN   THE  SYSTEM;   SLUDGE  WASTING   TO
            MAINTAIN  A  CONSTANT  SPECIFIC  RATE  OF SUBSTRATE
            UTILIZATION; SLUDGE WASTING  TO MAINTAIN A  CONSTANT
            SLUDGE  AGE;  AND HYDRAULIC  CONTROL TO  MAINTAIN  A
            CONSTANT  SLUDGE  AGE. TOE  LAST  TWO,  IN WHICH THE
            SLUDGE  AGE   IS   KEPT  CONSTANT,   ARE  THE  MOST
            FAVORABLE  ONES.   THE   MAJOR  WEAKNESS  IN  THESE
            METHODS  IS  THE CONTINUAL  SHIFTING IN  THE SOLIDS
            BALANCE   BETWEEN   THE   AERATION  TANK  AND  THE
            CLARIFIER  AS THE  INFLUENT  FLOW RATE  DEVIATES.   A
            NEW  METHOD   IS   PROPOSED   IN  WHICH   THE  SOLIDS
                               153

-------
            SEPARATE   AT  A   RATE   SUCH   THAT   THE   SOLIDS
            CONCENTRATION  IS  MAINTAINED  IN  THE SLUDGE  RETURN
            LINES  AND  NO  MICROBIAL   GROWTH   OCCURS   IN  THE
            SECONDARY  CLARIFIER.  ADVANTAGES  OF  THIS  METHOD
            INCLUDE:  THE  EFFECT  OF  THE  FLUCTUATING  SOLIDS
            LEVEL IN THE SECONDARY CLARIFIER IS MINIMIZED;  ANY
            CHANGE  IN  THE  INFLUENT  SUBSTRATE CONCENTRATION
            WILL BE REFLECTED IMMEDIATELY IN THE OXYGEN UPTAKE
            RATE; AND  LOADING FLUCTUATIONS  CAN BE  COMPENSATED
            FOR  BY  VARYING   THE  INTERVAL  BETWEEN   CONTROL
            PERIODS. DISADVANTAGES OF  THIS METHOD  INCLUDE:  THE
            REQUIREMENT  FOR  A  LABORATORY STUDY  TO DETERMINE
            CHANGES IN  THE CONSTANTS; MORE  OPERATOR ATTENTION
            THAN  IS  REQUIRED  IN THE HYDRAULIC   METHOD  FOR
            CONTROLLING    SLUDGE   AGE;    AND    MATHEMATICAL
            MANIPULATIONS  ARE REQUIRED THAN IN ANY  OTHER  OF
            THE METHODS. (PINTO-FIRL)

TITLE       PROCESS CONTROL DEMANDS -  PART A (XT-60)
            WEST, A.
PUB DATE    NOV 72
DESC        *AUDIOVISUAL   AIDS;   INSTRUCTIONAL   MATERIALS;
            POLLUTION;   *POST  SECONDARY  EDUCATION;   SLIDES;
            WASTES;   *WATER   POLLUTION   CONTROL,   *ACTIVATED
            SLUDGE, OPERATIONS  (WASTEWATER)
DESC NOTE   INCLUDED  IS  A 10 MINUTE  TAPE,  19 SLIDES,  AND A
            SCRIPT. AVAILABLE ON LOAN FROM NTOTC,  26 W.  ST.
            CLAIR, CINCINNATI, OHIO 45268
ABSTRACT    THIS MODULE IS DESIGNED FOR EXPERIENCED WASTEWATER
            WORKS  OPERATORS  WHO  DESIRE  TO  UPGRADE   PLANT
            PERFORMANCE  AND   TO  INCREASE   THEIR OWN KNOWLEDGE
            AND  SKILLS.   PROVIDED IS  AN  INTRODUCTION  TO A
            SERIES  ON  OPERATIONAL  CONTROL  OF AN ACTIVATED
            SLUDGE  PROCESS.   A  PLANT  SCHEMATIC   IS   USED   TO
            PRESENT   THE  EFFECTS   OF   RETURN  SLUDGE  FLOW
            ADJUSTMENTS   ON   SLUDGE   CONCENTRATIONS,    SLUDGE
            DETENTION   TIMES,   PROCESS   EQUILIBRIUM,    SLUDGE
            CHARACTERISTICS,   AND  FINAL  EFFLUENT   QUALITY.
            (AUTHOR/JK)

TITLE       PROCESS CONTROL DEMANDS -  PART B (XT-61).
            WEST, A.
PUB DATE    NOV 72
DESC        *AUDIOVISUAL   AIDS,   INSTRUCTIONAL   MATERIALS,
            POLLUTION,  *POST SECONDARY  EDUCATION, TECHNICAL
            EDUCATION,   *WATER   POLLUTION  CONTROL,    *PLANT
            OPERATIONS,    *WASTEWATER    TREATMENT,    SLUDGE,
            *ACTIVATED SLUDGE
                              154

-------
DESC NOTE
ABSTRACT
TITLE

AUTHOR
PUB DATE
DESC
ERIC NO.
EDRS PRICE
DESC NOTE
ISSUE
ABSTRACT
INSTITUTION
NAME
INCLUDED  IS  A   15  MINUTE  TAPE  AND  A   SCRIPT.
AVAILABLE ON LOAN  FROM NTOTC,  26 W.  ST.  CLAIR,
CINCINNATI, OHIO  45268
THIS MODULE IS DESIGNED FOR EXPERIENCED WASTEWATER
WORKS   OPERATORS   WHO   WISH   TO   UPGRADE   PLANT
PERFORMANCE  AND   TO  INCREASE  THEIR  OWN KNOWLEDGE
AND SKILLS.  ONE  OF A SERIES,  THIS MODULE PRESENTS
THE DERIVATION OF MIXING FORMULA THAT WILL  BE USED
IN  SUBSEQUENT  SECTIONS  TO  DEVELOP  THE  RETURN
SLUDGE  FLOW DEMAND  FORMULA  USED  IN  OPERATIONAL
CONTROL   OF  AN   ACTIVATED  SLUDGE   PROCESS.   A
SCHEMATIC IS USED TO  ILLUSTRATE  COMPONENTS OF  THE
FORMULA AND TO  DEVELOP A FINAL MASS BALANCE  RATIO
OF  RETURN  SLUDGE CONCENTRATION  TO MIXED  LIQUOR
CONCENTRATION   IN  TERMS   OF   CLARIFIER  SLUDGE
PERCENTAGE.   SIMPLE   MIXING  FORMULAE   ARE  THEN
DERIVED FOR EACH  OF  THE  THREE  FACTORS ALONG WITH
EXAMPLE CALCULATIONS.  (AUTHOR/JK)

PROCESS   DESIGN   MANUAL:   WASTEWATER   TREATMENT
FACILITIES  FOR SEWERED SMALL COMMUNITIES.
LEFFEL, R.  E.;  AND OTHERS
OCT 77
*ENGINEERING,      ENVIRONMENT,      INSTRUCTIONAL
MATERIALS,  *MANUALS,  POLLUTION,  *POST SECONDARY
EDUCATION,  SCIENCE EDUCATION,  TECHNICAL REPORTS,
UTILITIES,  *WASTE    DISPOSAL,   WATER  POLLUTION
CONTROL,  WATER  RESOURCES,  *WASTEWATER TREATMENT,
*OPERATIONS  (WASTEWATER), RURAL AREAS
ED162869
EDRS PRICE  MF-$1.00 HC-$26.11 PLUS POSTAGE.
496P.; FOR  RELATED DOCUMENTS, SEE SE 025 368-370
RIEAPR79
THIS  MANUAL ATTEMPTS  TO  DESCRIBE NEW TREATMENT
METHODS,  AND   DISCUSS  THE  APPLICATION   OF   NEW
TECHNIQUES  FOR  MORE  EFFECTIVELY  REMOVING  A  BROAD
SPECTRUM  OF CONTAMINANTS FROM  WASTEWATER.  TOPICS
COVERED      INCLUDE:      FUNDAMENTAL      DESIGN
CONSIDERATIONS,   FLOW  EQUALIZATION,   HEADWORKS
COMPONENTS,  CLARIFICATION   OF   RAW  WASTEWATER,
ACTIVATED   SLUDGE,  PACKAGE   PLANTS,  FIXED  GROWTH
SYSTEMS,  WASTEWATER  TREATMENT   PONDS,  FILTRATION
AND  MICROSCREENING,   PHYSICAL-CHEMICAL TREATMENT,
NUTRIENT  REMOVAL, SLUDGE  AND  PROCESS  SIDESTREAM
HANDLING, DISINFECTION AND POSTAERATION, OPERATION
AND   MAINTENANCE,  AND   COST   EFFECTIVENESS.   A
GLOSSARY  IS ALSO  INCLUDED.  (AUTHOR/BB)

CAMP, DRESSLER &  MCKEE, INC., BOSTON, MASS.
                               155

-------
TITLE       ROLE OF ACTIVATED  SLUDGE  FINAL SETTLING TANKS.
AUTHOR      DICK, RICHARD  I.
CORP AUTH   ILLINOIS    UNIV.,    URBANA.    DEPT.   OF    CIVIL
            ENGINEERING.
AVAIL       JOURNAL  OF  THE   SANITARY  ENGINEERING  DIVISION,
            ASCE, VOL 96,  NO SA2,  P 423-436,  APRIL 1970.
            10 FIG, 17 REF.
IDEN        *THICKENING,   *FINAL  SETTLING  TANK,  *FLUX  RATE,
            CLARIFICATION,  SUSPENDED  SOLIDS.
KEYWORDS    *ACTIVATED      SLUDGE,      SEWAGE      TREATMENT,
            SEDIMENTATION,  *WASTE  WATER TREATMENT.
ABSTRACT    THE  FINAL  SETTLING  TANK  IN  THE  ACTIVATED  SLUDGE
            PROCESS  HAS   TWO   FUNCTIONS:  CLARIFICATION  AND
            THICKENING.  CONVENTIONAL  DESIGN  PROCEDURES  HAVE
            CONSIDERED   ONLY   THE   CLARIFICATION   FUNCTION.
            HOWEVER,  INADEQUATE  PERFORMANCE   OF  THICKENING
            FUNCTIONS  PRODUCES  ADVERSE  EFFECTS,  INCLUDING:
            LOSS  OF  SUSPENDED  SOLIDS  TO  THE  EFFLUENT  AND
            INSUFFICIENT SUSPENDED SOLIDS  CONCENTRATION IN THE
            SLUDGE RECYCLE WHICH LEADS  TO LOWER  MIXED  LIQUOR
            SUSPENDED  SOLIDS   CONCENTRATIONS   IN  THE  AERATION
            TANK. TO  ASSURE PROPER  PERFORMANCE  OF THE  FINAL
            SETTLING  TANK  THE  TANK  SHOULD BE SIZED FOR EACH
            FUNCTION  AND   THE  LARGER  SIZE SHOULD GOVERN  THE
            DESIGN.  THE  AREA  REQUIRED  FOR THICKENING MUST BE
            SUFFICIENT SO  THAT SOLIDS ARE APPLIED  TO THE TANK
            AT A RATE  LESS THAN THE  RATE AT  WHICH SOLIDS ARE
            ABLE TO  REACH  THE BOTTOM  OF  THE  TANK.  THE  RATE
            WHICH BIOLOGICAL   SOLIDS  REACH THE  BOTTOM  OF  THE
            TANK IS TERMED THE FLUX RATE.  CHARACTERISTICALLY,
            THIS FLUX  RATE PASSES THROUGH A MINIMUM FOR SOME
            CONCENTRATION  OF  ACTIVATED  SLUDGE  PRESENT  IN  THE
            SETTLING  TANK. THIS MINIMUM FLUX  RATE ACTS  AS  A
            BOTTLENECK  AND  GOVERNS   THE   AREA  REQUIRED  FOR
            THICKENING.  SEVERAL METHODS  FOR DETERMINING  THE
            LIMITING  CAPACITY   ARE  GIVEN  IN  AN  ILLUSTRATIVE
            EXAMPLE. (DIFILIPPO-TEXAS)

TITLE       SEWAGE TREATMENT:  BASIC PRINCIPLES AND TRENDS.
AUTHOR      BOLTON,  R. L.; KLEIN, L.
            76
AVAIL       ANN  ARBOR  SCIENCE  PUBLISHERS,  P.O.  BOX  1425,  ANN
            ARBOR, MI  48106
DESC        CALCULATION,    *CHEMICAL    ANALYSIS,    CHEMISTRY,
            ENVIRONMENTAL       INFLUENCES,       *INSTRUCTIONAL
            MATERIALS,  MEASUREMENT   TECHNIQUES,   POLLUTION,
            *POST SECONDARY EDUCATION, *PUBLIC  HEALTH,  *WASTE
            DISPOSAL, WATER QUALITY,  *WATER POLLUTION CONTROL,
            OPERATIONS (WASTEWATER),  *WASTEWATER TREATMENT
                              156

-------
ABSTRACT    PROVIDED IS INFORMATION ON THE BASIC PRINCIPLES OF
            THE PROCESSES  OF SEWAGE  TREATMENT,  ESPECIALLY AS
            IT RELATES  TO  THE  CHEMISTRY  OF  SEWAGE TREATMENT.
            THE  TEXT  DISCUSSES  THE  NATURE  OF  SEWAGE  AND
            CHEMICAL ANALYSIS  AND  THEN  PROCEEDS  THROUGH THE
            TREATMENT  PROCESSES TO  FINAL DISPOSAL.  THE LAST
            CHAPTERS DEAL  WITH  CURRENT TRENDS IN THE FIELD OF
            WATER   POLLUTION   CONTROL   AND  WITH   CHEMICAL
            CALCULATIONS. CONVERSION  TABLES  FOR BRITISH  METRIC
            UNITS ARE INCLUDED IN THE APPENDIX.

TITLE       SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANT  DEPENDABILITY WITH SPECIAL
            REFERENCE TO THE ACTIVATED SLUDGE PROCESS.
AUTHOR      WEST, A.  W.
CORP AUTH   NATIONAL FIELD INVESTIGATIONS CENTER - CINCINNATI,
            OHIO.
AVAIL       AVAILABLE FROM  THE  NATIONAL  TECHNICAL INFORMATION
            SERVICE,  SPRINGFIELD,  VA 22161,  AS  PB-231 070,
            $3.25 IN PAPER COPY. $2.25  IN MICROFICHE,  MARCH,
            1971. 12 P.
KEYWORDS    *SEWAGE  TREATMENT,   *DESIGN   CRITERIA,  *OPERATION
            AND  MAINTENANCE, FACILITIES,  *ACTIVATED  SLUDGE,
            BIOLOGICAL  TREATMENT,  WATER  POLLUTION  CONTROL,
            WATER  QUALITY   CONTROL,   TREATMENT  FACILITIES,
            *WASTE WATER TREATMENT.
ABSTRACT    THIS  WORK   IS  A  REFERENCE  FOR   SEWAGE  TREATMENT
            PLANT DEPENDABILITY LECTURES PRESENTED AT TRAINING
            SESSIONS,   SYMPOSIA,    AND    WORKSHOPS.     DESIGN
            CONSIDERATIONS  NECESSARY TO  ACHIEVE CONSISTENTLY
            SATISFACTORY PLANT  PERFORMANCE  AND FINAL EFFLUENT
            QUALITY INCLUDE  THE PROPER TREATMENT PROCESSES, A
            GENEROUS PLANT  CAPACITY, ESSENTIAL  FLEXIBILITY,
            AND   TRUE   CONTROLLABILITY  OF   THE  PLANT.  THE
            TREATMENT PROCESS OR MODIFICATION MOST APPROPRIATE
            TO THE  KNOWN  WASTE CHARACTERISTICS  AND  EFFLUENT
            QUALITY  REQUIREMENTS SHOULD  BE  CHOSEN.  EXAMPLES
            INCLUDE THE  CLASSIC ACTIVATED SLUDGE PROCESS, THE
            COMPLETE MIX MODIFICATION AND  THE  STEP  AERATION
            MODIFICATION. PILOT  STUDIES  ON A BENCH, PILOT, OR
            DEMONSTRATION  SCALE MAY  BE  PERFORMED  TO RESOLVE
            UNCERTAINTIES   ABOUT   THE   CORRECT   PROCESS  TO
            CHOOSE.   THE   SUGGESTIONS  CONTAINED   IN   DESIGN
            CRITERIA MANUALS SUCH AS  THE "10-STATES STANDARDS"
            SHOULD  BE   CONSIDERED   AS  MINIMUM  REQUIREMENTS
            NEEDED  TO  PROVIDE  ADEQUATE  SAFETY  FACTORS  TO
            ASSURE PLANT DEPENDABILITY.  ITEMS DISCUSSED UNDER
            FLEXIBILITY OF  A PLANT INCLUDE:  PROCESS; AERATION
            TANKS;  FINAL  CLARIFIERS; RETURN SLUDGE  PUMPING
            FACILITIES;  EXCESS  SLUDGE   WASTING;   EMERGENCY
                              157

-------
TITLE

AUTHOR
CORP AUTH
AVAIL
I DEN
KEYWORDS
ABSTRACT
            CHEMICAL  TREATMENT;  SLUDGE  HANDLING  FACILITIES;
            EQUALIZING TANKS; AND HOLDING PONDS.  THE  ACTIVATED
            SLUDGE  SYSTEM   IS  A  CONTROLLABLE   PROCESS  THAT
            SHOULD HAVE  THE  APPROPRIATE METERS AND ACCURATELY
            CONTROLLABLE GATES, VALVES, PUMPS, AND  BLOWERS FOR
            OPTIMUM   PERFORMANCE.   QUALIFIED   OPERATORS   ARE
            NEEDED  TO ACHIEVE THE HIGH QUALITY  EFFLUENT  THAT
            CAN  BE  PRODUCED  BY  A   PROPERLY  DESIGNED WASTE
            TREATMENT  PLANT; DEDICATED, EXPERIENCED  OPERATORS
            ARE NEEDED EVEN  MORE  AT  PLANTS  WHICH HAVE  DESIGN
            DEFECTS.  (ORR-FIRL)
                         MUNICIPAL
                                       WASTEWATER
                                                      TREATMENT
START-UP
FACILITIES.
RADAR, R. D.; GREEN, R. L.; PAGE, G. L.,  JR.
WILEY AND WILSON, INC., LYNCHBURG, VA
FOR SALE  BY THE SUPERINTENDENT OF DOCUMENTS, U.S.
GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE, WASHINGTON, D.C.  20402
PRICE  $1.40.   ENVIRONMENTAL  PROTECTION   AGENCY,
WASHINGTON, DC, OFFICE OF WATER PROGRAM OPERATION,
REPORT  EPA-43019-74-008,  DECEMBER  1973.  92P,  3
FIG, 2 TAB, 42 REF. EPA CONTRACT  68-01-0341.
PROCEDURES,   PROCESS,   SEED   SLUDGE,    STAFFING,
STANDARD  OPERATING   PROCEDURES,   SITE   MEETINGS,
INVENTORY    INSPECTION    PRETESTING,     OPERATOR
TRAINING,   SETTLEABLE   SOLIDS,   TOTAL    SOLIDS,
VOLATILE  SOLIDS,  VOLATILE  ACIDS,  MIXED  LIQUOR
SUSPENDED SOLIDS.
*ADMINISTRATIVE  DECISIONS,  TREATMENT  FACILITIES,
*WASTE WATER TREATMENT,  OPERATIONS,   LABORATORY
TESTS,  *SAMPL1NG,- TESTING,  ANALYSIS,   CONTROLS,
ACTIVATED   SLUDGE,   TRICKLING   FILTER,   OXIDATION
LAGOONS,     ANAEROBIC     DIGESTION,      SAFETY,
CHLORINATION,   SUSPENDED  SOLIDS,   HYDROGEN  ION
CONCENTRATION,   ALKALINITY,    BIOCHEMICAL   OXYGEN
DEMAND,   CHEMICAL  OXYGEN   DEMAND,   PRE-TREATMENT
(WATER), SEWAGE TREATMENT.
THIS  MANUAL PROVIDES  GUIDANCE  FOR  PUTTING INTO
INITIAL  OPERATION  MUNICIPAL  WASTEWATER  TREATMENT
PLANT, A NEW  ADDITION  TO  AN  EXISTING  TREATMENT
PLANT, QR A CHANGE  IN THE MODE  OF  THE  TREATMENT
PLANT'S OPERATION  SO THAT THE  TREATMENT  PLANT OR
PROCESS  WILL EFFECTIVELY  TREAT  THE  WASTEWATER IN
COMPLIANCE    WITH     SPECIFIC     CONDITIONS   AND
LIMITATIONS  ESTABLISHED  FOR  TREATMENT  FACILITY.
THE MANUAL WAS DEVELOPED AND PREPARED WITH THE AID
AND  COOPERATION  OF  WASTEWATER  TREATMENT  PLANT
OPERATORS  AND  SUPERINTENDENTS,  START-UP  EXPERTS,
THE    ACADEMIC    COMMUNITY,    MANUFACTURERS   AND
                              158

-------
            SUPPLIERS OF WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT EQUIPMENT,
            AND  A  LITERATURE REVIEW  OF WASTEWATER  TREATMENT
            PLANT   OPERATIONS    AND   RECOGNIZED    START-UP
            TECHNIQUES.  INFORMATION  IS  PROVIDED ON  PREPARING
            FOR  ACTUAL TREATMENT  PLANT  START-UP.  PREPARATIONS
            FOR    START-UP    INCLUDE:    STAFFING   THE   PLANT,
            DEVELOPING STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES, DRY- AND
            WET-RUN  TESTING  OF  EQUIPMENT,  ON-SITE  OPERATOR
            TRAINING,  SAFETY,  AND   ESTABLISHING   PROCEDURES
            WHEN CONSTRUCTION  IS  CONTINUING  DURING  START-UP.
            THIS MANUAL DESCRIBES  START-UP PROCEDURES FOR SOME
            OF   THE  MORE  COMMON  PRETREATMENT  AND  PRIMARY
            TREATMENT  UNITS;   FOR  THE   SPECIFIC   SECONDARY
            TREATMENT PROCESSES OF ACTIVATED SLUDGE,  TRICKLING
            FILTERS,  STABILIZATION PONDS  AND AERATED LAGOONS;
            AND   FOR  THE  SLUDGE  HANDLING  UNITS   AND  THE
            ANAEROBIC   DIGESTION    PROCESS.    THE   START-UP
            PROCEDURES FOR ADVANCED WASTEWATER TREATMENT UNITS
            AND  PROCESSES  ARE  NOT CONSIDERED IN  THIS MANUAL.
            (EPA)

TITLE       UPGRADING BIOLOGICAL TREATMENT (XT-25).
AUTHOR      WEST, A.  W.
PUB DATE    AUG  71
DESC        *AUDIOVISUAL   AIDS,   ENGINEERING,  INSTRUCTIONAL
            MATERIALS,  POLLUTION,  *POST  SECONDARY  EDUCATION,
            *WATER   POLLUTION   CONTROL,   *PLANT   OPERATIONS,
            *WASTEWATER TREATMENT, *BIOLOGICAL TREATMENT
DESC NOTE   INCLUDED IS A 28  MINUTE TAPE AND 63 SLIDES, ALSO A
            SCRIPT. AVAILABLE  ON  LOAN  FROM  NTOTC,  26  W.  ST.
            GLAIR, CINCINNATI, OHIO  45268
ABSTRACT    THIS  MODULE   IS  DESIGNED   FOR   EXPERIENCED  AND
            SUPERVISORY   WASTEWATER   WORKS   OPERATORS   AND
            MANAGERIAL  PERSONNEL,  AND   SHOULD  ALSO  BE  OF
            INTEREST  TO   DESIGN   ENGINEERING  PERSONNEL.  IT
            DISCUSSES  WAYS  TO  GET  MAXIMUM  USE  OF  PRESENT
            EXISTING SECONDARY TREATMENT PROCESSES BY IMPROVED
            OPERATIONAL  CONTROL  OF  DESIGN.  IT INCLUDES CASE
            HISTORIES OF  HOW  THE  POLLUTIONAL STRENGTH  OF AN
            ACTIVATED  SLUDGE PLANT  EFFLUENT WAS  REDUCED  TO
            ONE-QUARTER  OF   ITS  FORMER  STRENGTH   AT  ONE
            LOCATION, AND  HOW  TRICKLING  FILTER  PRETREATMENT
            WITH ACTIVATED SLUDGE POLISHING  ACCOMPLISHED 99%
            REDUCTION FOR A COMBINATION OF DOMESTIC  SEWAGE AND
            STRONG MEAT PACKING WASTES AT ANOTHER.  (AUTHOR/JK)

TITLE       USE  OF HIGH-PURITY  OXYGEN IN THE ACTIVATED  SLUDGE
            PROCESS,  VOLUME 1.
AUTHOR      MCWHIRTER, J. R.
                              159

-------
PUB DATE    78
AVAIL       CRC PRESS, INC., 2255 PALM BEACH LAKES BLVD., WEST
            PALM BEACH, FL 33409
DESC        ACTIVATED   SLUDGE,   DEWATERING,   INSTRUCTIONAL
            MATERIALS,  OPERATIONS,  *OXYGEN,  POST   SECONDARY
            EDUCATION, *SECONDARY  TREATMENT,  *WASTE  DISPOSAL,
            WASTEWATER SLUDGE, *WASTEWATER TREATMENT
DESC NOTE   250P. CAT. NO. 5101EF32
ABSTRACT    CONSTITUTES A COMPREHENSIVE  SOURCE  OF BACKGROUND
            AS WELL AS CURRENT-DAY TECHNOLOGY STATUS  REGARDING
            THE   USE   OF   OXYGEN   IN   SECONDARY  WASTEWATER
            TREATMENT. DIVIDED INTO  THREE  BASIC  PARTS,  THE
            FIRST   SECTION   CONSISTS   OF   BACKGROUND   AND
            HISTORICAL  INFORMATION,  THE  SECOND  DEALS  WITH
            CURRENT-DAY DESIGN  AND APPLICATIONS.  THE LAST  IS
            ON   PRESENT-DAY   EXPERIENCE   AND   OPERATIONAL
            INFORMATION FROM OXYGENATION SYSTEMS CURRENTLY  IN
            OPERATION AND UNDER DESIGN.

TITLE       USE OF HIGH-PURITY OXYGEN  IN THE ACTIVATED SLUDGE
            PROCESS, VOLUME 2.
AUTHOR      MCWHIRTER, J.  R.
PUB DATE    78
AVAIL       CRC PRESS, INC., 2255 PALM BEACH LAKES BLVD., WEST
            PALM BEACH, FL  33409
DESC        ACTIVATED   SLUDGE,   DEWATERING,   INSTRUCTIONAL
            MATERIALS,  OPERATIONS,  *OXYGEN,  POST   SECONDARY
            EDUCATION, *SECONDARY  TREATMENT,  *WASTE  DISPOSAL,
            WASTEWATER SLUDGE, *WASTEWATER TREATMENT
DESC NOTE   250P. CAT. NO. 5102EF32

TITLE       WASTEWATER  ENGINEERING:   COLLECTION,  TREATMENT,
            DISPOSAL.
PUB DATE    72
DESC        MCGRAW-HILL  BOOK  COMPANY,  1221  AVENUE OF  THE
            AMERICAS,  NEW YORK, NY 10020
            *DESIGN, *ENGINEERING, *FAGILITIES, INSTRUCTIONAL
            MATERIALS,    OPERATIONS     (WASTEWATER),    POST
            SECONDARY  EDUCATION,   PUMPS,   *SEWERS,   SLUDGE,
            *WASTEWATER   TREATMENT,    WATER   CHARACTERISTICS,
            *WATER RESOURCES
DESC NOTE   782P.   (NO.   041675-3);   SOLUTION   MANUAL   (NO.
            041676-1)
ABSTRACT    INCLUDES:   DEVELOPMENT  AND  TRENDS   IN  WASTEWATER
            ENGINEERING;   DETERMINATION  OF  SEWAGE  FLOWRATES;
            HYDRAULICS OF SEWERS;  DESIGN OF  SEWERS;  PUMPS AND
            PUMPING   STATIONS;  WASTEWATER   CHARACTERISTICS;
            PHYSICAL UNIT OPERATIONS; CHEMICAL UNIT PROCESSES;
            DESIGN  OF FACILITIES  FOR:   PHYSICAL  AND  CHEMICAL
                               160

-------
            TREATMENT OF WASTEWATER, FOR BIOLOGICAL TREATMENT,
            DISPOSAL OF SLUDGE AND MORE.

TITLE       WASTEWATER TREATMENT - SERIES C.
AVAIL       NEW  ENGLAND  REGIONAL  WASTEWATER  INST.,   2  FORT
            ROAD, SOUTH PORTLAND, ME 04106  (FREE RENTAL)
DESC        CHEMICAL   TREATMENT,   DISINFECTION,   FILTRATION,
            INSTRUCTIONAL MATERIALS, *PRIMARY TREATMENT, POST
            SECONDARY   EDUCATION,   SEDIMENTATION,  *SECONDARY
            TREATMENT,     *SLIDES,     SLUDGE     DEWATERING,
            STABILIZATION LAGOONS, *TERTIARY TREATMENT, VISUAL
            AIDS, WASTE DISPOSAL, *WASTEWATER TREATMENT
DESC NOTE   ORDER  SERIES  C  WITH ACCOMPANYING  NARRATIVE:   100
            SLIDES.
ABSTRACT    FOCUSING  ON THE  TECHNICAL  ASPECTS  OF WASTEWATER
            TREATMENT.  IT   FEATURES   PRIMARY  AND  SECONDARY
            FACILITIES  AND  INCLUDES SEGMENTS  ON  THE TRAINING
            OF PLANT OPERATORS AND ON SAFETY.

TITLE       WATER  AND  WASTEWATER TREATMENT:  CALCULATIONS   FOR
            CHEMICAL AND PHYSICAL PROCESSES.
AUTHOR      HUMENICK, MICHAEL J. JR.
PUB DATE    77
AVAIL       MARCEL  DEKKER,   270 MADISON  AVE.,  NEW  YORK,  NY
            10016
ABSTRACT    THIS  BOOK  PRESENTS  THE  INFORMATION NEEDED  BY  AN
            ENVIRONMENTAL  TECHNICIAN TO  PERFORM  THE   PROCESS
            CALCULATIONS NECESSARY  IN  THE  OPERATION  OF WATER
            OR  WASTEWATER  TREATMENT FACILITIES.  THE MATERIAL
            IS  ORGANIZED  SO  AS A  PROBLEM IS  PRESENTED,   THE
            SOLUTION FOLLOWS  IMMEDIATELY.  EACH TOPIC AREA  HAS
            NUMEROUS  PRACTICE  EXAMPLES  WITH  SOLUTIONS   AND
            ANSWERS.  SUBJECT AREAS  INCLUDE:  COAGULATION   AND
            FLOCCULATION;  WATER  CONDITIONS,  SEDIMENTATION;
            FILTRATION;    ACTIVATED    CARBON;    ADSORPTION;
            CHLORINATION AND  AERATION.  THE APPENDICES  CONTAIN
            INFORMATION   REGARDING   PHYSICAL   AND   CHEMICAL
            PROPERTIES,   CONVERSION  FACTORS,   AND   COMPUTER
            PROGRAMS. (CS)

TITLE       WATER AND WASTEWATER TREATMENT, VOL.  4
AUTHOR      HUMENICK, MICHAEL J. , JR.
PUB DATE    77
DESC        CALCULATION,    *CHEMICAL    REACTIONS,   *DESIGN,
            ENVIRONMENTAL        INFLUENCES,       ENGINEERING,
            *INSTRUCTIONAL    MATERIALS,    POLLUTION,    *POST
            SECONDARY   EDUCATION,    PUBLIC   HEALTH,   WASTE
            DISPOSAL,  *WATER  POLLUTION CONTROL,  OPERATIONS
            (WASTEWATER),  OPERATIONS   (WATER),  *WASTEWATER
                              161

-------
            TREATMENT, WATER TREATMENT
DESC NOTE   236P.
ABSTRACT    INCLUDED IN THIS VOLUME ARE  CALCULATION  PROCEDURES
            WHICH  CAN  BE  UTILIZED  IN   THE  DESIGN  OF  SUCH
            PROCESSES   AS   EQUALIZATION,    COAGULATION   AND
            FLOCCULATION, CHEMICAL  PRECIPITATION, AND  GRAVITY
            SEDIMENTATION.  EXAMPLES  OF  PROBLEMS  RELATED  TO
            FILTRATION,   ACTIVATED   CARBON   ABSORPTION,   ION
            EXCHANGE, CHLORINATION, DISINFECTION, AND  AERATION
            ARE  ALSO  COVERED.   INFORMATION  OF  PHYSICAL  AND
            CHEMICAL   PROPERTIES,   CONVERSION  FACTORS,   AND
            COMPUTER PROGRAMS ARE DETAILED IN  THE APPENDIXES.
            (CS)

TITLE       WPCF WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT OPERATOR  TRAINING
            PROGRAM,  INTERMEDIATE  COURSE:   STUDENT  WORKBOOK,
            VOL. 1, PARTS 1 AND  2.
PUB DATE    "78
AVAIL       WATER    POLLUTION    CONTROL    FEDERATION,    2626
            PENNSYLVANIA AVE.,  WASHINGTON, D.C.  20036
DESC        *ACTIVATED      SLUDGE,       AUDIOVISUAL      AIDS,
            CERTIFICATION,     CLARIFICATION     (WASTEWATER),
            ENVIRONMENTAL      TECHNICIANS,      INSTRUCTIONAL
            MATERIALS,  JOB  SKILLS,  OPERATIONS  (WASTEWATER),
            POLLUTION,  *POST  SECONDARY EDUCATION, *WASTEWATER
            COLLECTION, *WASTEWATER TREATMENT,  WATER POLLUTION
            CONTROL.
DESC NOTE   244P. COURSE MATERIALS: 35 MM  SLIDES  (340),  9 TAPE
            CASSETTES,  ADMINISTRATOR  HANDBOOK, CARRYING  CASE,
            AND  STUDENT WORKBOOK (PARTS  1 AND 2) - ORDER  NO.
            E0291  $400.00;  STUDENT  WORKBOOK  ONLY - ORDER  NO.
            E0292, $4.50; OTHER  VOLUMES; EW003822 AND  EW003823
ABSTRACT    THIS   DOCUMENT   IS   ONE   IN    A   SERIES   OF
            SELF-INSTRUCTIONAL    WORKBOOKS     FOR     TRAINING
            WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT OPERATIONS IN THE  BASIC
            FUNCTIONS  OF   FACILITY  OPERATION.   THE  WORKBOOK
            CONTAINS  A PRE- AND POST-TEST  QUESTIONNAIRE  FOR
            EACH UNIT AS WELL AS SELF-TESTS AS  INTERIM GUIDES.
            THE  UNITS  DISCUSSED IN  THE  VOLUME ARE A  GENERAL
            INTRODUCTION,   THE   COMMUNITY  WASTEWATER   SYSTEM,
            PRE-TREATMENT,   CLARIFICATION,    AND   ACTIVATED
TITLE       SLUDGE. (CS)

            WPCF   WASTEWATER   TREATMENT   OPERATOR    TRAINING
PUB DATE    PROGRAM,  INTERMEDIATE  COURSE:  STUDENT  WORKBOOK,
AVAIL       VOL. 8.
            78
            WATER   POLLUTION    CONTROL    FEDERATION,    26226
            PENNSYLVANIA AVE.,  WASHINGTON, DC  20037
                              162

-------
DESC        AUDIOVISUAL  AIDS,  CERTIFICATION,  *ENVIRONMENTAL
            TECHNICIANS, INSTRUCTIONAL MATERIALS, JOB SKILLS,
            OPERATIONS    (WASTEWATER),    POLLUTION,    *POST
            SECONDARY EDUCATION,  *SLUDGE,  *TRICKLING FILTERS,
            *WASTE STABILIZATION PONDS, *WASTEWATER TREATMENT,
            WATER POLLUTION CONTROL.
DESC NOTE   144P.  COURSE  MATERIALS:  35  MM  SLIDES  (APPROX.
            230),  7  TAPE  CASSETTES,  ADMINISTRATOR HANDBOOK,
            CARRYING  CASE,  AND  STUDENT WORKBOOK  - ORDER NO.
            E0293, $300.00; STUDENT  WORKBOOK ONLY - ORDER NO.
            E0294, $3.50; OTHER VOLUMES: EW003821 AND EW003823
ABSTRACT    THIS   DOCUMENT    IS    ONE   IN   A   SERIES   OF
            SELF-INSTRUCTIONAL    WORKBOOKS    FOR    TRAINING
            WASTEWATER TREATMENT  PLANT OPERATORS  IN THE BASIC
            FUNCTIONS  OF  FACILITY  OPERATION.   THE  WORKBOOK
            CONTAINS  A PRE-  AND POST-TEST  QUESTIONNAIRE FOR
            EACH UNIT AS WELL AS  SELF-TESTS  AS INTERIM GUIDES.
            THE  UNITS  DISCUSSED  IN  THIS  VOLUME  ARE  WASTE
            STABILIZATION PONDS, TRICKLING FILTERS, AND  SLUDGE
            HANDLING AND DIGESTION.  (CS)

TITLE       WPCF WASTEWATER  TREATMENT  PLANT OPERATOR TRAINING
            PROGRAM,  INTERMEDIATE  COURSE:  STUDENT WORKBOOK,
            VOL. C.
PUB DATE    78
AVAIL       WATER    POLLUTION   CONTROL    FEDERATION,    2626
            PENNSYLVANIA AVE., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20037
DESC        AUDIOVISUAL  AIDS,  CERTIFICATION,  *DISINFECTION,
            *ENVIRONMENTAL     TECHNICIANS,     INSTRUCTIONAL
            MATERIALS,  JOB  SKILLS,  OPERATIONS  (WASTEWATER),
            POLLUTION,   *POST  SECONDARY  EDUCATION,  *PUMPS,
            *SAFETY,  *WASTEWATER  TREATMENT,  WATER POLLUTION
            CONTROL.
DESC NOTE   90P. COURSE MATERIALS: 35  MM SLIDES (APPROX. 270),
            7 TAPE CASSETTES, ADMINISTRATOR  HANDBOOK, CARRYING
            CASE,  AND  STUDENT WORKBOOK  -  ORDER  NO.   E0296,
            $3.50; OTHER VOLUMES: EW003821 AND EW003822
ABSTRACT    THIS   DOCUMENT    IS    ONE   IN   A   SERIES   OF
            SELF-INSTRUCTIONAL    WORKBOOKS    FOR    TRAINING
            WASTEWATER TREATMENT  PLANT OPERATORS  IN THE BASIC
            FUNCTIONS  OF  FACILITY  OPERATION.   THE  WORKBOOK
            CONTAINS  A PRE-  AND POST-TEST  QUESTIONNAIRE FOR
            EACH UNIT AS WELL AS  SELF-TESTS  AS INTERIM GUIDES.
            THE   UNITS   DISCUSSED    IN   THIS   VOLUME  ARE
            DISINFECTION, SAFETY, AND  PUMPING.
                               163

-------
      Part IV

Reference Materials
  Not Abstracted
       165

-------
TITLE       THE ABC WAY TO BETTER WASTEWATER TREATMENT.
AUTHOR      KERL, J. F.
CORP AUTH   ENVIRONMENTAL  QUALITY  ENGINEERING, INC.,  OAKLAND,
            CALIF.
AVAIL       AMERICAN DYESTUFF REPORTER, VOL  62, NO  8,  P  24-25,
            AUGUST 1973. 1 FIG,  1 ILLUS,  2 REF.

TITLE       ACTINOMYCETES,OF SEWAGE-TREATMENT PLANTS.
AUTHOR      LECHEVALIER,   H.    A.;    LECHEVALIER,    M.    P.;
            WYSZKOWSKI, P.  E.
CORP AUTH   RUTGERS - THE STATE  UNIV., PISCATAWAY,  NJ. WAKSMAN
            INST. OF MICROBIOLOGY.
AVAIL       THE   NATIONAL   TECHNICAL   INFORMATION   SERVICE,
            SPRINGFIELD,  VA  22161  AS  PB-272  589,  IN   PAPER
            COPY,  IN   MICROFICHE.   REPORT   EPA-600/2-77-145,
            1977. 89 P. 6 FIG, 15 TAB, 5  REF.

TITLE       ACTINOMYCETES OF SEWAGE-TREATMENT PLANTS.
AUTHOR      LECHEVALIER, H. A.
CORP AUTH   RUTGERS  -  THE  STATE  UNIV.,  NEW  BRUNSWICK,  NJ.
            WAKSMAN INST. OF MICRIBIOLOGY.
AVAIL       THE   NATIONAL    TECHNICAL    INFORMATION   SERVICE,
            SPRINGFIELD, VA 22161,  AS  PB-245 914,   $4.50  IN
            PAPER  COPY,  $3.00   IN  MICROFICHE.   ENVIRONMENTAL
            PROTECTION   AGENCY,   ENVIRONMENTAL   PROTECTION
            TECHNOLOGY  STUDIES   SERIES  NO.   EPA-600/2-75-031,
            SEPTEMBER 1975. 62 P, 23 TAB, 19 REF. R-802003.

TITLE       ACTIVATED SLUDGE.
AUTHOR      SAUNDERS, F. M.
CORP AUTH   GEORGIA INST. OF TECH., ATLANTA.
AVAIL       JOURNAL  WATER  POLLUTION  CONTROL  FEDERATION,  VOL
            49, NO 6, P 1005-1016, JUNE,  1977.  114  REF.

TITLE       ACTIVATED SLUDGE (LITERATURE  REVIEW).
AUTHOR      SCHROEDER, E. D.
CORP AUTH   CALIFORNIA   UNIV.,   DAVIS.    DEPT.    OF   CIVIL
            ENGINEERING.
AVAIL       JOURNAL WATER POLLUTION CONTROL  FEDERATION,
            VOL 48, NO 6, P 1098-1107, JUNE,  1976.  110 REF.

TITLE       ACTIVATED SLUDGE (LITERATURE  REVIEW).
AUTHOR      AZAD, H.  S.; BERGMANN, D. E.; STUMPF, M. R.
CORP AUTH   WATER POLLUTION CONTROL FEDERATION, WASHINGTON,  DC
AVAIL       JOURNAL OF THE WATER POLLUTION CONTROL  FEDERATION,
            VOL 42, NO 6, P 897-910, JUNE 1970. 105 REF.
                              166

-------
TITLE       ADDITION OF POWDERED ACTIVATED  CARBON  TO  ACTIVATED
            SLUDGE REACTORS.
AUTHOR      KLEI, H. E.; SUNDSTROM, D.  W.
CORP AUTH   CONNECTICUT   UNIV.,   STORKS.   INST.    OF   WATER
            RESOURCES.
AVAIL       THE   NATIONAL   TECHNICAL   INFORMATION   SERVICE,
            SPRINGFIELD,  VA  22161 AS   PB-264  887,  IN  PAPER
            COPY,  IN  MICROFICHE.  COMPLETION   REPORT,   MARCH
            1977.   41   P,   2   TAB,  27   FIG,   4  REF,   OWRT
            A-057-CONN(1),  14-31-0001-5007.

TITLE       ADVANCED  AUTOMATIC  CONTROL  STRATEGIES   FOR  THE
            ACTIVATED SLUDGE TREATMENT  PROCESS.
AUTHOR      PETERSACK, J. F.;  SMITH,  R.  G.
CORP AUTH   SYSTEMS CONTROL, INC.,  PALO ALTO, CALIF.
AVAIL       THE   NATIONAL   TECHNICAL   INFORMATION   SERVICE,
            SPRINGFIELD,  VA  22161.  ENVIRONMETNAL  PROTECTION
            AGENCY, REPORT  EPA-670/2-75-039. MAY  1975.,  154 P,
            33  FIG,  11  TAB,  14  REF,  3  APPEND.   1BB043;  ROAP
            21ASC; TASK 007 R800356.

TITLE       AERATION  TANK  FOR  ACTIVATED  SLUDGE  TREATMENT  OF
            WASTE  WATER  -  IS  SMALLER AND REQUIRES LESS  POWER
            FOR A GIVEN TREATMENT  CAPACITY.
AVAIL       NETHERLANDS  PATENT NL  7610-431.  ISSUED  MARCH  28,
            1977.  DERWENT  NETHERLANDS  PATENTS  ABSTRACTS,  VOL
            Y, NO  15, P D5,  MAY, 1977.

TITLE       AIR V. OXYGEN IN DORSET.
AVAIL       WATER AND WASTE TREATMENT,  VOL 20,  NO  1,  P  14-15,
            JANUARY, 1977.  1 FIG,  1 TAB.

TITLE       AIR VS 02: TWO  ACTIVATED  SLUDGE  SYSTEMS COMPARED.
AUTHOR      MILLER, M. A.
CORP AUTH   UNION  CARBIDE  CORP.,  TONAWANDA,  NY ENVIRONMENTAL
            SYSTEMS DEPT.
AVAIL       WATER  AND WASTES  ENGINEERING,  VOL  15,   NO  4,  P
            58-60, 62-65, APRIL, 1978.  6 FIG, 8 TAB,  17  REF.

TITLE       ALBUQUERQUE PLANT  DESIGNED  WITH  COMPUTER  IN  MIND.
AUTHOR      RICOY, J. L.; MATOTAN,  W. I.
CORP AUTH   WILLIAM MATOTAN AND ASSOCIATES,  ALBUQUERQUE,  NM
AVAIL       WATER AND WASTES ENGINEERING,  VOL  13,  NO  1,
            P 32-35, 37, JANUARY,  1976.

TITLE       ALUM  ADDITION  AIDS  SLUDGE  PROCESS IN  PHOSPHORUS
            REMOVAL.
AVAIL       WATER AND WASTES ENGINEERING, VOL  15, NO  3,  P  14,
            MARCH, 1978.
                               167

-------
TITLE       ALUM  ADDITION  TO  ACTIVATED  SLUDGE WITH  TERITARY
            SOLIDS REMOVAL.
AUTHOR      HAIS, A. B.;  STAMBERG,  J.  B.;  BISHOP,  D.  F.
CORP AUTH   DISTRICT   OF   COUMBIA  DEPT.   OF   ENVIRONMENTAL
            SERVICES, WASHINGTON.
AVAL        COPY AVAILABLE  FROM GPO SUP AS  EPl. 23:670-73-037,
            $0.65;  MICROFICHE   FROM  NTIS  AS  PB-225  028/0,
            $1.45. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION  AGENCY,  TECHNOLOGY
            SERIES REPORT EPA-670/2-73-037,  AUGUST 1973, 25 P,
            7  FIG,  5   TAB, 8   REF.  EPA  PROJECT  11010  EYM.
            CONTRACT 14-12-818.

TITLE       ALUM  ADDITION  AND  STEP-FEED  STUDIES  IN  OXYGEN
            ACTIVATED SLUDGE.
AUTHOR      BISHOP,  D.   F. ;  HEIDMAN,  J.  A.;  BRENNER,  R.  C. ;
            STAMBERG, J.  B.
CORP AUTH   DEPARTMENT  OF ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES,  WASHINGTON,
            DC.
AVAIL       THE   NATIONAL   TECHNICAL   INFORMATION   SERVICE,
            SPRINGFIELD,  VA  22161  AS PB-272  892,  IN  PAPER
            COPY,   IN   MICROFICHE,  REPORT   EPA-600/2-77/166,
            1977. 31 P,  6 FIG,  10  TAB,  10  REF.

TITLE       APPLICATION   OF MICROBIOLOGY  AND  BIOENGINEERING
            PRINCIPLES  TO BIOLOGICAL WASTE TREATMENT.
AUTHOR      LEVIN, GILBERT  V.;  COHEN,  OBADIAH P.
CORP AUTH   BIOSPHERICS  INC., ROCKVILLE, MD
AVAIL       CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING  PROGRESS,  SYMPOSIUM  SERIES,
            VOL 67, NO  107. P 131-134,  1971.  1 TAB,  44 REF.

TITLE       ATP POOLS IN ACTIVATED  SLUDGE.
AUTHOR      CHIU, S. Y.;  KAO, I. C.; ERICKSON,  L.  E.;
CORP AUTH   FAN, L. T.  KANSAS STATE UNIV., MANHATTAN.  DEPT.  OF
            CHEMICAL ENGINEERING.
AVAIL       JOURNAL WATER POLLUTION CONTROL  FEDERATION,
            VOL 45, NO  8, P 1746-1758, AUGUST  1973.  18  FIG,  4
            TAB, 30 REF.  OWRR A-045-KAN(3) 14-31-0001-3516.

TITLE       AUTOMATIC -DISSOLVED  OXYGEN CONTROL.
AUTHOR      FLANAGAN, M.  J.; BRACKEN,  B.  D.;  ROESLER,  J. F.
CORP        FLANAGAN  AND  ASSOCIATES,  SAN  FRANCISCO,  CALIF.
AVAIL       JOURNAL OF  THE  ENVIRONMENTAL  ENGINEERING DIVISION,
            PROCEEDINGS  OF  ASCE, VOL  103, NO  EE4,  P  707-722,
            DIVISION, PROCEEDINGS  OF ASCE, VOL 103,  NO  EE4,
            P   707-722,  AUGUST  1977.  9 TAB,  5 FIG,  3  REF,
            1 APPEND.

TITLE       AUTOMATION  OF THE  CONTROL AND OPERATION  OF WATER
            POLLUTION CONTROL WORKS.
AUTHOR      COTTON, P.
CORP AUTH   NORWICH SEWAGE  TREATMENT WORKS (ENGLAND)
AVAIL       WATER POLLUTION CONTROL, VOL 72, NO 8, P  635-657,
            1973. 25 REF.
                               168

-------
TITLE

AUTHOR
CORP AUTH
AVAIL
TITLE

AUTHOR
CORP AUTH

AVAIL
TITLE

AUTHOR
CORP AUTH

AVAIL
TITLE

AUTHOR
CORP AUTH

AVAIL
TITLE
AUTHOR
CORP AUTH

AVAIL
TITLE
AUTHOR
CORP AUTH

AVAIL
BIOFLOCCULATION AND  THE  ACCUMULATION OF CHEMICALS
BY FLOC-FORMING ORGANISMS.
DUGAN, P. R.
OHIO STATE UNIV., COLUMBUS
THE   NATIONAL   TECHNICAL
SPRINGFIELD,  VA  22161  AS
COPY,   IN   MICROFICHE.   REPORT  EPA-600/2-75-032,
SEPTEMBER 1975. 148  P, 51 FIG, 21 TAB,  119 REF.
DEPT. OF MICROBIOLOGY.
 INFORMATION   SERVICE,
PB-245  793,   IN  PAPER
BIOLOGICAL  CONCEPTS FOR  DESIGN AND  OPERATION OF
THE ACTIVATED SLUDGE PROCESS.
GAUDY, F., JR.; GAUDY, T.
OKLAHOMA STATE UNIV., STILLWATER, BIOENVIRONMENTAL
ENGINEERING LABS.
GPO  SUP  DOC AS  EP 2.10:  17090 FQJ 09/71,  $1.25;
MICROFICHE  FROM   NTIS   AS   PB-211   131,   $0.95.
ENVIRONMENTAL  PROTECTION AGENCY,  WATER  POLLUTION
CONTROL RESEARCH SERIES, SEPTEMBER  1971.  154 P,
36  FIG,  3  TAB,  69  REF.   EPA PROGRAM  17090  FQJ
09/71.

BIOLOGICAL  METHODS  FOR  CONTROL OF  NITROGEN IN
MUNICIPAL WASTEWATERS.
ROSENKRANZ, W. A.
ENVIRONMENTAL  PROTECTION AGENCY,  WASHINGTON,  DC.
OFFICE OF RESEARCH  AND DEVELOPMENT.
IN:  3RD  USA/USSR  SYMPOSIUM ON INTENSIFICATION OF
BIO-CHEMICAL  TREATMENT  OF  WASTEWATERS,   HELD AT
VOGEDO HEADQUARTERS, MOSCOW,  USSR ON AUGUST  23-24,
1976. P 32-35, 1976. 4 FIG,  2 TAB,  5 REF.

BIOLOGICAL   REGENERATION   OF  POWERED   ACTIVATED
CARBON ADDED TO ACTIVATED  SLUDGE UNITS.
DEWALLE, F. B.; CHIAN, E.  S.  K.
ILLINOIS UNIV. AT  URBANA-CHAMPAIGN. DEPT.  OF CIVIL
ENGINEERING.
WATER RESEARCH, VOL 11, NO  5,  P 439-446,  1977.
9 FIG, 2 TAB, 33 REF.

BIOLOGICAL TREATMENT PROCESS  IN COLD CLIMATES.
BOYLE, J. D.
CH2M/HILL,     CORVALLIS,      OREG.     WASTEWATER
RECLAMATION.
WATER AND SEWAGE WORKS,  REFERENCE  NUMBER, P R-28,
R-30, R-32-R-34, R-37-R-38,  R-43-R-44,  R-46, R-48,
R-50, APRIL 30, 1976. 16 FIG,  2 TAB, 9  REF.

BIOLOGICAL WASTE TREATMENT.
JANK, B. E.
DEPARTMENT  OF  THE  ENVIORNMENT, OTTAWA  (ONTARIO).
WASTEWATER TECHNOLOGY CENTRE.
IN:  PROCEEDINGS  OF SEMINARS  ON  WATER  POLLUTION
ABATEMENT   TECHNOLOGY   IN   THE  PULP   AND  PAPER
INDUSTRY, MAY  1975,  OTTAWA,  MONCTON,  AND  PRINCE
GEORGE, CANADA,  ENVIRONMENTAL  PR^^CTION-SERVICE,
                             169

-------
            WATER POLLUTION  CONTROL DIRECTORATE, ECONOMIC  AND
            TECHNICAL  REVIEW REPORT  EPS  3-WP-76-4,  P  35-80,
            MARCH, 1976. 14 FIG, 31 REF,  4 TAB.

TITLE       BULKING   CONTROL  MADE   EASY   -   WITH  HYDROGEN
            PEROXIDE.
AUTHOR      STRUNK, W. G.; SHAPIRO, J.
CORP AUTH   FMC CORP., PRINCETON, NJ.
AVAIL       WATER AND  POLLUTION  CONTROL, VOL 114, NO 7,  P  10,
            12, 14, 15, 40-41, JULY,  1976.

TITLE       CASE  HISTORIES:  IMPROVED ACTIVATED  SLUDGE  PLANT
            PERFORMANCE BY OPERATIONS CONTROL.
AUTHOR      WEST, A. W.
CORP AUTH   FEDERAL  WATER  POLLUTION  CONTROL  ADMINISTRATION,
            CINCINNATI,  OHIO.  DIV.  OF   TECHNICAL   SERVICES.
AVAIL       PROCEEDINGS,  8TH ANNUAL  ENVIRONMENTAL  AND  WATER
            RESOURCES  ENGINEERING  CONFERENCE,  JUNE 5-6,  1969,
            TECHNICAL    REPORT    NO    20,    DEPARTMENT    OF
            ENVIRONMENTAL  AND  WATER  RESOURCES  ENGINEERING,
            VANDERBILT UNIVERSITY, P  161-170,  (1969).

TITLE       CELL YIELD AND GROWTH RATE IN ACTIVATED SLUDGE.
AUTHOR      SHERRARD,  J.H.; SCHROEDER, E.  D.
CORP AUTH   CORNELL  UNIV.,  ITHACA,   NY   SCHOOL  OF  CIVIL  AND
            ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING.
AVAIL       JOURNAL  WATER POLLUTION  CONTROL  FEDERATION,  VOL
            45, NO 9,  P 1889-1897, SEPTEMBER 1973. 8  FIG,
            2 TAB, 12  REF.

TITLE       CHEMICALLY ASSISTED BIOLOGICAL OXIDATION  OF WASTES
            AND EXCESS SLUDGE.
AUTHOR      GAUDY, A.  F., JR.
CORP AUTH   OKLAHOMA STATE UNIV., STILLWATER, BIOENVIRONMENTAL
            ENGINEERING LABS.
AVAIL       WATER  AND SEWAGE WORKS,  REFERENCE  ISSUE,  P  48,
            50-52, 54-56, APRIL, 1977. 11 FIG, 10 REF.

TITLE       COMPARING  DESIGN MODELS FOR  ACTIVATED SLUDGE.
AUTHOR      GAUDY, A.  F., JR.; KINCANNON, D. F.
CORP AUTH   OKLAHOMA  STATE UNIV., STILLWATER.  BIOENVIRONMENTAL
            ENGINEERING LABS.
AVAIL       WATER  AND SEWAGE WORKS,  VOL  124, NO  2,  P  66-70,
            FEBRUARY  1977. 1 FIG, 7 TAB,  16  REF.

TITLE       COMPARISON  OF  COMPLETELY   MIXED  AND  PLUG FLOW
            BIOLOGICAL SYSTEMS.
AUTHOR      TOERBER, E. D.; PAULSON W. L.; SMITH, H.  S.
                              170

-------
CORP AUTH   FEHR  AND  GRAHAM  CONSULTING  ENGINEERS,  FREEPORT,
            ILL.
AVAIL       JOURNAL  WATER  POLLUTION  CONTROL  FEDERATION,  VOL
            46, NO 8, P 1995-2014, AUGUST  1974.  26  FIG,  9 TAB,
            3 REF.

TITLE       COMPUTER-ASSISTED     ACTIVATED    SLUDGE     PLANT
            OPERATION.
AUTHOR      LACROIX, P. G. ; BLOODGOOD, D.  E.
CORP AUTH   OTTAWA    UNIV.    (ONTARIO).    DEPT.    OF    CIVIL
            ENGINEERING.
AVAIL       EFFLUENT AND  WATER TREATMENT  JOURNAL,  VOL  13, NO
            11,  P 701-714,  NOVEMBER 1973.  3 FIG,  2 TAB, 26
            REF.

TITLE       CONTROL   OF  ACTIVATED   SLUDGE   BULKING   DURING
            BIOLOGICAL  PURIFICATION  (REGULIROVANIE   PRIROSTA
            AKTIVNOGO ILA PRI BIOLOGICHESKOI  OCHISTKE).
AUTHOR      EVILEVICH, M. A.; KOROVIN, L.  K.
CORP AUTH   GIPROBUM  (USSR).
AVAIL       BUMAZHNAYA  PROMYSHLENNOST,  NO 8, P  27-28, AUGUST,
            1978. 3 FIG,  1  TAB.

TITLE       CONTROL OF ACTIVATED  SLUDGE BY MEAN  CELL  RESIDENCE
            TIME.
AUTHOR      JENKINS, DAVID; GARRISON, WALTER  E.
CORP AUTH   CALIFORNIA UNIV., BERKELEY. SANITATION  ENGINEERING
            RESEARCH LAB.
AVAIL       JOURNAL  WATER  POLLUTION  CONTROL  FEDERATION,  VOL
            40, NO 11, PART 1, P  1905-1919, NOV  1968.  6  FIG,  2
            TAB,  15 REF.

TITLE       DEMONSTRATION   OF  A  HIGH-RATE  ACTIVATED  SLUDGE
            SYSTEM.
AUTHOR      HUANG, C. H.; FEURSTEIN, D. L.; MILLER,  E. L.
CORP AUTH   ENGINEERING-SCIENCE,  INC., BERKELEY,  CALIF.
AVAIL       THE   NATIONAL   TECHNICAL   INFORMATION   SERVICE,
            SPRINGFIELD,  VA  22161  AS  PB-240  005,  IN   PAPER
            COPY,   IN  MICROFICHE,   REPORT   EPA-670/2-75-037,
            MARCH  1975.  150  P,  25 FIG,  22  TAB,  46  REF,  1
            APPEND.

TITLE       DESIGN AND  CONTROL OF NITRIFYING  ACTIVATED SLUDGE.
            SYSTEMS.
AUTHOR      LAWRENCE, A. W.; BROWN, C. G.
CORP AUTH   CORNELL  UNIV.,  ITHACA,  NY  DEPT.  OF  ENVIRONMENTAL
            ENGINEERING.
AVAIL       JOURNAL  WATER  POLLUTION  CONTROL  FEDERATION,  VOL
            48, NO  7,  P 1779-1803, JULY  1976.  13 FIG,  8 TAB,
                             171

-------
TITLE       THE DESIGN AND OPERATION OF ACTIVATED SLUDGE FINAL
            SETTLING TANKS.
AUTHOR      HIBBERD, R. L.; JONES, W. F.
CORP AUTH   SATEC LTD., CREWE  (ENGLAND).
AVAIL       WATER  POLLUTION  CONTROL, VOL 78,  NO 1, P  14-32,
            1974, 13 FIG, 9 TAB,  11 REF.

TITLE       THE  DESIGN AND  SELECTION OF MECHANICAL AERATION
            DEVICES.
AUTHOR      SHAW, J. A.
CORP AUTH   LIGHTNIN MIXER PTY LTD., CAMBERWELL (AUSTRALIA).
AVAIL       IN:   WATER   POLLUTION   CONTROL   IN   DEVELOPING
            COUNTRIES.   PROCEEDINGS   OF   THE   INTERNATIONAL
            CONFERENCE,  HELD  AT  BANGKOK,  THAILAND, FEBRUARY
            1978. EDITED  BY  E.A.R.  OUANO, B. M.  LOHANI  &  C.M.
            THANH.  ASIAN  INSTITUTE  OF   TECHNOLOGY, BANGKOK,
            THAILAND,  (PERGAMON  PRESS   IN  USA),  P 709-722,
            1978. 13 FIG.

TITLE       DESIGNING AND OPERATING AN OXYGEN  ACTIVATED  SLUDGE
            SYSTEM INCLUDING TERTIARY ALUM-MUD PRECIPITATION.
AUTHOR      FULLER, R. R.; GILBERT, D. W.
CORP AUTH   GULF STATES PAPER  CORP., TUSCALOOSA,  AL.
AVAIL       COPYRIGHT CLEARANCE CENTER,  INC.,  NEW YORK, NY AS
            0065-8812-78-9661-0178  ($1.25).  IN:  WATER—1977,
            AICHE SYMPOSIM SERIES,  VOL 74,  NO 178, EDITED BY
            G.  F.  /BENNETT,  P 48-65,  1978,  6 FIG,  6  TAB, 3
            REF.

TITLE       DESIGN AND  OPERATIONAL MODEL FOR COMPLETE  MIXING
            ACTIVATED SLUDGE SYSTEM.
AUTHOR      MCKINNEY, R. E.
CORP AUTH   KANSAS UNIV., LAWRENCE.
AVAIL       BIOTECHNOLOGY AND  BIOENGINEERING,  VOL 16,  NO  6, P
            703-722, JUNE, 1974.  14 REF.

TITLE       EFFECT  OF  PRIMARY  EFFLUENT   SUSPENDED SOLIDS  AND
            BOD ON ACTIVATED SLUDGE PRODUCTION.
AUTHOR      VOSHEL, DORIS; SAK, J. G.
CORP AUTH   GRAND RAPIDS WATER POLLUTION  CONTROL  PLANT,  MICH.,
            AND DOW CHEMICAL CO., MIDLAND, MICH.
AVAIL       JOURNAL OF THE WATER  POLLUTION CONTROL FEDERATION,
            VOL  40,  NO 5, PART  2,  P  R203-R212,  MAY  1968. 8
            FIG, 3 TAB, 10 REF.

TITLE       EFFECT OF WASTEWATER  COMPOSITION AND CELL RESIDENT
            TIME ON PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL IN ACTIVATED SLUDGE.
AUTHOR      STALL, T. R.; SHERRARD, J. H.
CORP AUTH   PHILLIPS   PETROLEUM   CO.,   BARTLESVILLE,    OKLA.
                              172

-------
AVAIL
TITLE

AUTHOR
CORP AUTH
AVAIL
JOURNAL  WATER  POLLUTION  CONTROL  FEDERATION, VOL
48, NO 2, P 307-322, FEBRUARY,  1976,  8 FIG,  4 TAB,
23 REF.

EFFECTS  OF  DISSOLVED  OXYGEN   IN  THE OXYGENATION
ACTIVATED SLUDGE PROCESS.
D'ANTONI, J. M.; STEIMLE, S. E.
NUS CORP., HOUSTON, TX.
COPYRIGHT CLEARANCE  CENTER,  INC.
0065-8812-78-9823-1078  ($0.95).
AICHE  SYMPOSIUM SERIES,  VOL 74,
            G.  F.
            REF.
                                             , NEW YORK, NY  AS
                                               IN:  WATER-1977,
                                             NO  178,  EDITED  BY
       BENNETT, P  66-74,  1978,  9 FIG,  2 TAB,  10
TITLE       EFFECTS  OF  FLOW EQUALIZATION ON  THE  OPERATION  AND
            PERFORMANCE OF  AN ACTIVATED  SLUDGE  PLANT.
AUTHOR      FOESS, G. W.; MEENAHAN,  J. G.;  BLOUGH,  D.
CORP AUTH   YPSILANTI TOWNSHIP, MI.
AVAIL       THE   NATIONAL   TECHNICAL   INFORMAITON   SERVICE,
            SPRINGFIELD,  VA  22161  AS   PB-272  657,  IN  PAPER
            COPY,   IN  MICROFICHE.   REPORT  EPA-600/2-77-138,
            1977. 95  P, 8 FIG,  17  TAB, 20 REF,  1  APPEND.

TITLE       THE  EFFECT  OF  HIGH  PURITY OXYGEN ON  THE  ACTIVATED
            SLUDGE PROCESS.
AUTHOR      BENEFIELD, L. D.; RANDALL, C. W.; KING, P.  H.
CORP AUTH   MISSISSIPPI  STATE  UNIV., MISSISSIPPI STATE.  DEPT.
            OF CIVIL  ENGINEERING.
AVAIL       JOURNAL  WATER  POLLUTION CONTROL FEDERATION,  VOL
            49,  NO  2,  P  269-279, FEBRUARY,  1977.  17 FIG,  1
            TAB,  12 REF.

TITLE       EFFECTS OF  IRON ON  ACTIVATED SLUDGE TREATMENT.
AUTHOR      CARTER, J. L.;  MCKINNEY, R.  E.
CORP AUTH   MARQUETTE UNIV., MILWAUKEE,  WIS.
AVAIL       JOURNAL OF THE  ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING DIVISION,
            AMERICAN  SOCIETY OF  CIVIL  ENGINEERS,  VOL 99,  NO
            EE2,  P  135-152,  APRIL  1973.  9 FIG,  3  TAB, 24  REF.

TITLE       THE  EFFECT  OF  SLUDGE  WITHDRAWALS ON  THE  OPERATION
            OF SMALL  ACTIVATED  SLUDGE PLANTS.
AUTHOR      DRAUTZ, K. E.
CORP AUTH   RENSSELAER POLYTECHNIC INST., TROY, NY
AVAIL       MASTERS'S THESIS,   JUNE   1969.  Ill  P,  15 FIG,  34
            TAB,  17 REF.
                               173

-------
TITLE       EVALUATION  OF A  COMPLETE  MIXING ACTIVATED  SLUDGE
            PLANT.
AUTHOR      MCKINNEY, ROSS  E.;  BENJES, HENRY H.,  JR.; WRIGHT,
            JAMES R.
CORP AUTH   KANSAS UNIV., LAWRENCE.
AVAIL       JOURNAL OF WATER  POLLUTION CONTROL  FEDERATION,  VOL
            42, NO  5,  PART 1, P  737-752,  MAY  1970.  10  FIG,  1
            TAB, 19 REF.

TITLE       EVALUATION OF THE KRAUS  MODEL OF ACTIVATED  SLUDGE
            BULKING.
AUTHOR      PIPES, WESLEY 0.; MEADE, FRANK  S.
CORP AUTH   NORTHWESTERN UNIV., EVANSTON, ILL.
AVAIL       PROCEEDINGS  INDUSTRIAL WASTE CONFERENCE,  23RD,  MAY
            1968, P 111-125,  5 FIG,  7 TAB,  8  REF.

TITLE       AN  EXPERIMENTAL  STUDY OF THE ROLE  OF  THE CILIATED
            PROTOZOA IN  THE ACTIVATED SLUDGE  PROCESS.
AUTHOR      CURDS, C. R. ; COCK.BURN,  A.; VANDYKE, JENNIFER M.
CORP AUTH   WATER    POLLUTION    RESEARCH    LAB.,     STEVENAGE
            (ENGLAND).
AVAIL       WATER  POLLUTION  CONTROL,  VOL  67,  NO  3,  1968.  P
            312-329, 14  FIG,  3 TAB,  13 REF.

TITLE       FACTORS    AFFECTING    EFFLUENT    QUALITY   FROM
            FILL-AND-DRAW ACTIVATED  SLUDGE  REACTORS.
AUTHOR      DAIGGER, G.  T.; GRADY, C. P. L. ,  JR.
CORP AUTH   PURDUE   UNIV.,   LAFAYETTE,    IN.   ENVIRONMENTAL
            ENGINEERING  LAB.
AVAIL       JOURNAL  WATER POLLUTION CONTROL  FEDERATION,  VOL
            49, NO  12,  P 2390-2396, DECEMBER,  1977.  1  FIG,  4
            TAB, 12 REF.

TITLE       FACTORS  TO   BE   CONSIDERED  IN   THE   DESIGN  OF
            ACTIVATED SLUDGE  PLANTS.
AUTHOR      DOWNING, A.  L.
CORP AUTH   WATER    POLLUTION    RESEARCH    LAB.,     STEVENAGE
            (ENGLAND).
AVAIL       ADVANCES IN  WATER QUALITY IMPROVEMENTS,  (EDITORS:
            GLOYNA,  E.   F.,   AND   ECKENFELDER,   W. W.,   JR.),
            AUSTIN, TEXAS,  UNIVERSITY  OF TEXAS  PRESS, 1968,  P
            190-202, 8 FIG, 14 REF.

TITLE       FATE OF  PHOSPHORUS  IN WASTE  TREATMENT PROCESSES:
            ENHANCED REMOVAL  OF PHOSPHATE BY  ACTIVATED SLUDGE.
AUTHOR      MENAR, ARNOLD, B.; JENKINS, DAVID
CORP AUTH   CALIFORNIA  UNIV., RICHMOND.  SANITARY  ENGINEERING
            RESEARCH LAB.
                               174

-------
AVAIL       ENVIRONMENTAL  SCIENCE  AND  TECHNOLOGY,  VOL 4,  NO
            12,  P  1115-1121,  DECEMBER  1970.  6  TAB, 6  FIG,  12
            REF.

TITLE       FEDERAL  ASSISTANCE   PROJECT   METROPOLITAN  DENVER
            SEWAGE  DISPOSAL  DISTRICT  NO.  1.   OCTOBER 1969  -
            FEBRUARY 1970.
AUTHOR      HEGG, BOB A.; BURGESON,  JOHN  R.
CORP AUTH   ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY,  KANSAS CITY,  MO.
AVAIL       MARCH 1971, 42  P,  5  TAB, 6  FIG,  12  REF.

TITLE       FULL SCALE OPERATION OF PLUG  FLOW ACTIVATED SLUDGE
            SYSTEMS.
AUTHOR      BEER, C.; HETLING, L.  J.; WANG,  L.  K.
CORP AUTH   NEW    YORK    STATE     DEPT.    OF    ENVIRONMENTAL
            CONSERVATION,  ALBANY;  AND  RENSSELAER  POLYTECHNIC
            INST., TROY.
AVAIL       NEW YORK STATE  DEPT  OF ENVIRONMENTAL CONSERVATION,
            TECHNICAL REPORT  NO  42,  AUG 1975, PRESENTED AT THE
            NEW  ENGLAND WATER  POLLUTION  CONTROL  ASSOCIATION
            MEETING, HARTFORD, CONN.,  OCTOBER  23,  1974, 45 P,
            13 FIG, 7 TAB,  16 REF.  EPA  PROJECT  17050 EDL.

TITLE       INDUSTRIAL WASTE  PROCESS DESIGN.
AUTHOR      ECKENFELDER, W. W.,  JR.; O'CONNER,  D.  J.
CORP AUTH   MANHATTAN   COLL. ,   BRONX,   NY.   DEPT.  OF  CIVIL
            ENGINEERING.
AVAIL       PROCEEDINGS  AMERICAN  SOCIETY  OF CIVIL  ENGINEERS,
            FEBRUARY    15-19,    1954,    SANITARY   ENGINEERING
            DIVISION,  VOL  80, NO  411,  P  411-1  TO  411-25.  13
            FIG, 5 TAB, 26  REF.

TITLE       INFLUENCE OF ACTIVATED SLUDGE CRT ON ADSORPTION.
AUTHOR      KIM, B. R.; SNOEYINK,  V. L.;  SAUNDERS, F.  M.
CORP AUTH   ILLINOIS UNIV.  AT URBANA-CHAMPAIGN, DEPT.  OF CIVIL
            ENGINEERING.
AVAIL       JOURNAL OF  THE ENVIRONMENTAL  ENGINEERING  DIVISION
            PROCEEDINGS  OF ASCE,  VOL  102,  NO  EE1,  P  55-70,
            FEBRUARY,  1976. 12 FIG,  2 TAB, 21 REF, 1 APPEND.

TITLE       THE  INFLUENCE   OF PH  AND  ORGANIC  LOADING ON  THE
            FILAMENTATOUS BULKING OF ACTIVATED  SLUDGE.
AUTHOR      YASUDA, M.
CORP AUTH   TOYAMA COLL.  OF  TECH.  (JAPAN).  DEPT.  OF  SANITARY
            ENGINEERING.
AVAIL       TRANSACTIONS   OF   THE   JAPAN   SOCIETY  OF  CIVIL
            ENGINEERS, VOL  8,  P  131-132,  1976.  5 FIG,  1 TAB.
                              175

-------
TITLE       INSTANTANEOUS  METERING  AIDS  -  ACTIVATED  SLUDGE
            PLANT.
AUTHOR      MATZNER, B. A.
CORP AUTH   SUFFOLK  COUNTY  DEPT.  OF  ENVIRONMENTAL  CONTROL,
            HAUPPAUGE, NY OPERATIONS  DIV.
AVAIL       WATER  AND WASTES  ENGINEERING,  VOL  13,  NO  8,  P
            18-20, AUGUST, 1976.

TITLE       INTRODUCTION TO WASTEWATER  TREATMENT PROCESSES.
AUTHOR      RAMALHO, R. S.
CORP AUTH   LAVAL UNIV., QUEBEC.
AVAIL       ACADEMIC PRESS (NEW  YORK, SAN FRANCISCO,  LONDON).
            1977. 409 P.

TITLE       INVENTORY  OF  ENERGY USE   IN   WASTEWATER  SLUDGE
            TREATMENT AND DISPOSAL.
AUTHOR      SMITH, J. E.
AVAIL       INDUSTRIAL  WATER  ENGINEERING,   VOL  14,  NO  4,   P
            20-26, JULY/AUGUST,  1977. 12 FIG,  10 TAB.

TITLE       A  KINETIC MODEL   FOR DESIGN  OF  COMPLETELY-MIXED
            ACTIVATED   SLUDGE   TREATING    VARIABLE-STRENGTH
            INDUSTRIAL WASTEWATERS.
AUTHOR      ADAMS, C. E.; ECKENFELDER, W. W.;  HOVIOUS,  J.  C.
CORP AUTH   ASSOCIATED  WATER  AND  AIR  RESOURCES   ENGINEERS,
            INC., NASHVILLE, TENN.
AVAIL       WATER  RESEARCH,  VOL 9,  NO  1,  P 37-42,   JANUARY
            1975. 4 FIG, 1 TAB,  5 REF.

TITLE       LEAST COST DESIGN  OF  ACTIVATED SLUDGE SYSTEMS.
AUTHOR      MIDDLETON, A.  C. ;  LAWRENCE,  A. W.
CORP AUTH   CORNELL  UNIV.,  ITHACA,  NY  DEPT.   OF  ENVIRONMENTAL
            ENGINEERING.
AVAIL       JOURNAL  WATER POLLUTION  CONTROL  FEDERATION, VOL
            48, NO  5,  P  889-905  MAY  1976.  11 FIG,  11  TAB,  17
            REF.

TITLE       LOAD  BALANCING  AT   SEWAGE-TREATMENT  WORKS:   THE
            SOUTHAMPTON UNIVERSITY PILOT PLANT AT MILLBROOK.
AUTHOR      HELLIWELL, P.  R.;  REED, R. J. R.
CORP AUTH   SOUTHAMPTON   UNIV.   (ENGLAND).   DEPT.   OF   CIVIL
            ENGINEERING.
AVAIL       JOURNAL  OF   THE   INSTITUTE  OF   WATER POLLUTION
            CONTROL, VOL  76, NO  3,  P 355-372,  1977. 14 FIG,  2
            TAB, 10 REF.
                               176

-------
TITLE       LONG-TERM   PERFORMANCE  OF  A   COUPLED   TRICKLING
            FILTER-ACTIVATED  SLUDGE  PLANT.
AUTHOR      STENQUIST,  R.  J. ;  PARKER,  D.  S. ;  LOFTIN, W.  E. ;
            BRENNER, R. C.
CORP AUTH   BROWN AND CALDWELL,  WALNUT  CREEK,  CA
AVAIL       JOURNAL  WATER  POLLUTION CONTROL  FEDERATION,  VOL
            49,  NO  1,  P 2265-2284, NOVEMBER,  1977.  15 FIG, 10
            TAB, 8 REF.

TITLE       MANY  DESIGN PROBLEMS OVERCOME IN  STATEN  ISLAND
            PLANT.
AUTHOR      MITCHELL, R. D.
CORP AUTH   PIRNIE (MALCOLM),  INC.,  WHITE PLAINS,  NY
AVAIL       WATER  AND  WASTES  ENGINEERING,  VOL  13,  NO  12,  P
            57-59, 68,  DECEMBER, 1976.  1  FIG,  1  TAB.

TITLE       METHOD   FOR    MEASURING   AEROBIC   DECOMPOSITION
            ACTIVITY OF ACTIVATED SLUDGE  IN AN OPEN  SYSTEM.
AUTHOR      FARKAS, PETER
CORP AUTH   RESEARCH  INST.  FOR  WATER  RESOURCES  DEVELOPMENT,
            BUDAPEST  (HUNGARY).
AVAIL       FOURTH INTERNATIONAL CONFERENCE ON WATER POLLUTION
            RESEARCH, PRAGUE,  CZECH.,  SEPTEMBER  2-6, 1968.
            PREPRINT, SEC,  II, PAPER 1, 9  P,  6  FIG,  1 TAB, 15
            REF.

TITLE       MICROBIOLOGY OF  WASTE TREATMENT
AUTHOR      UNZ, R. F.
CORP AUTH   PENNSYLVANIA STATE UNIV.,  UNIVERSITY PARK.
AVAIL       JOURNAL  WATER  POLLUTION CONTROL  FEDERATION,  VOL
            45,  NO 6, P 1259-1265, JUNE 1973,  67 REF.

TITLE       MICROBIOLOGY   OF   WASTE   TREATMENT,   (LITERATURE
            REVIEW).
AUTHOR      UNZ, R. F.
CORP AUTH   PENNSYLVANIA STATE UNIV.,  UNIVERSITY PARK.
AVAIL       JOURNAL  WATER  POLLUTION CONTROL  FEDERATION,  VOL
            49,  NO 6, P 1255-1268, JUNE,  1977.  130 REF.

TITLE       MICROBIOLOGY   OF   WASTE   TREATMENT,   (LITERATURE
            REVIEW).
AUTHOR      UNZ, F. F.
CORP AUTH   PENNSYLVANIA STATE UNIV.,  UNIVERSITY PARK.
AVAIL       JOURNAL  WATER  POLLUTION CONTROL  FEDERATION,  VOL
            48,  NO 6, P 1367-1378, JUNE,  1976.  101 REF.
                               177

-------
TITLE       MICROSCOPIC   OBSERVATION   OF   ACTIVATED   SLUDGE
            APPLIED  TO  THE  MONITORING  OF   TREATMENT  PLANTS
            (L1OBSERVATION  MICROSCOPIQUES DES  BOUES  ACTIVEES
            APPLIQUE  A   LA  SURVEILLANCE  DES   INSTALLATIONS
            D'EPURATION: TECHNIQUE D'ETUDE INTERPRETATION).
AUTHOR      DRAKIDES, C.
CORP AUTH   MONTPELLIER-2   UNIV.   (FRANCE).   LAB.   DE   GENIE
            CHIMIQUE, TRAITEMENT ET EPURATION DES EAUX.
AVAIL       TECHNIQUES ET  SCIENCES MUNICIPALES-1'EAU, VOL  73,
            NO 2, P 85-98, FEBRUARY, 1978. 18 FIG,  16  REF.

TITLE       MODELING AND  OPTIMIZATION OF  STEP AERATION  WASTE
            TREATMENT SYSTEMS.
AUTHOR      ERICKSON, LARRY E.; HO, Y.  S.; FAN,  L.  T.
CORP AUTH   KANSAS STATE UNIV., MANHATTAN.
AVAIL       JOURNAL OF THE WATER POLLUTION CONTROL  FEDERATION,
            VOL 40, NO 5,  PART 1,  P 717-732, MAY 1968.  6 FIG,
            2 TAB, 5 REF.

TITLE       MODULES PERMIT EASY EXPANSION.
AUTHOR      WEAVER, J. H.
CORP AUTH   ROBERT AND CO. ASSOCIATES, WEST PALM BEACH,  FLA.
AVAIL       WATER  ANMD  WASTES ENGINEERING,  VOL  13,  NO  11,  P
            73-74, NOVEMBER,  1976, 1 FIG.

TITLE       NEW SYSTEM PUTS THE WOOD TO WASTEWATER.
AUTHOR      WEBER, C. L.; JACOBSON, C. D.
CORP AUTH   KIRKHAM MICHAEL AND ASSOCIATES, OMAHA,  NEBR.
AVAIL       WATER  AND  WASTES  ENGINEERING, VOL   12, NO   12,  P
            51-52, 64, DECEMBER, 1975.  1 FIG.

TITLE       NITRIFICATION  AND  HEAVY  METAL   REMOVAL   IN  THE
            ACTIVATED SLUDGE  TREATMENT  PROCESS.
AUTHOR      RICHARDS, P. A.
CORP AUTH   TEXAS A AND M UNIV., COLLEGE  STATION.
AVAIL       UNIVERSITY  MICROFILMS,  INC.,  ANN  ARBOR,  MICH.,
            48106. ORDER NO.  77-2662. PHD  THESIS, 1976.  182 P.

TITLE       NITRIFICATION   IN  ACTIVATED  SLUDGE   PLANTS
            GUIDELINES ON SOME OPERATION AND  DESIGN ASPECTS.
AUTHOR      SMITH, A. G.
CORP AUTH   ONTARIO  MINISTRY  OF  THE  ENVIRONMENT,   TORONTO.
            WASTEWATER TREATMENT SECTION.
AVAIL       RESEARCH  PUBLICATION,  W62,   1976.   REVISED JULY
            1977, 97 P, 17 FIG, 12 TAB, 66 REF.
                               178

-------
TITLE       NITRIFICATION    IN   HIGH-SLUDGE    AGE    CONTACT
            STABILIZATION.
AUTHOR      ZOLTEK, J., JR.; LEFEBVRE, L.
CORP AUTH   FLORIDA UNIV., GAINESVILLE.  DEPT.  OF  ENVIRONMENTAL
            ENGINEERING SCIENCES.
AVAIL       JOURNAL  WATER POLLUTION CONTROL  FEDERATION,  VOL
            48,  NO  9, P 2183-2189,  SEPTEMBER, 1976. 4 FIG,  1
            TAB,  11 REF.

TITLE       NITRIFICATION  IN   TREATMENT  PLANTS   AND  NATURAL
            WATERS:   SOME   IMPLICATIONS  OF   THE   THEORETICAL
            MODELS.
AUTHOR      DOWNING,  A. L.; KNOWLES,  G.
CORP AUTH   WATER    POLLUTION    RESEARCH    LAB.,    STEVENAGE
            (ENGLAND).
AVAIL       FIFTH   INTERNATIONAL  WATER  POLLUTION   RESEARCH
            CONFERENCE, SAN FRANCISCO, JULY  26-AUGUST 1,  1970.
            PREPRINT,  PAPER 1-8,  8 P, 4  FIG,  1 TAB, 6 REF.

TITLE       NITROGEN   REMOVAL   AND   IDENTIFICATION  FOR  WATER
            QUALITY CONTROL.
AUTHOR      CARLSON,  DALE  A.
CORP AUTH   WASHINGTON  UNIV.,   SEATTLE.   DEPT.   OF   CIVIL
            ENGINEERING.
AVAIL       NATIONAL  TECHNICAL INFORMATION  SERVICE AS  PB-204
            231,  $3.00 IN  PAPER  COPY,  $0.95 IN  MICROFICHE,
            AUGUST 15,  1971.  52 P, 12 FIG,  8  TAB,  85 REF.  OWRR
            A-040-WASH(1).

TITLE       ONE-VERSUS  TWO-STATE   NITRIFICATION   IN    THE
            ACTIVATED SLUDGE  PROCESS.
AUTHOR      STOVER, E.  L.; KINCANNON, D. F.
CORP AUTH   OKLAHOMA  STATE UNIV., STILLWATER.  SCHOOL  OF  CIVIL
            ENGINEERING.
AVAIL       JOURNAL  WATER  POLLUTION  CONTROL  FEDERATION,  VOL
            48,  NO 4,  P 645-651,  APRIL,  1976.  6 FIG, 17 REF.

TITLE       OPERATING  ACTIVATED-SLUDGE   PLANTS   TO   EFFECT
            NUTRIENT  REMOVAL.
AUTHOR      NICHOLLS,  H. A.
AVAIL       WATER POLLUTION CONTROL,  VOL  77,  NO  1,  P  99-101,
            1978.

TITLE       OPERATING  EXPERIENCE  AND  DESIGN   CRITERIA  FOR
            "UNOX"    WASTEWATER  TREATMENT    SYSTEMS,   DESIGN
            SEMINAR FOR WASTEWATER TREATMENT  FACILITIES.
CORP AUTH   UNION CARBIDE  CORP.,  TONAWANDA, NY LINDE DIV.
                              179

-------
AVAIL       REPORT   PREPARED  FOR   ENVIRONMENTAL   PROTECTION
            AGENCY,   WASHINGTON,   DC,    TECHNOLOGY   TRANSFER
            PROGRAM,  FOR  SEMINAR AT  NEW  YORK,  NY,  FEBRUARY
            29-MARCH 2,  1972. 68  P.

TITLE       OPERATION  OF  CONVENTIONAL  ACTIVATED  SLUDGE  FOR
            MAXIMUM PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL.
AUTHOR      MILBURY, WILLIAM F. ;  MCCAULEY, DONALD;  HAWTHORNE,
            CHARLES H.
CORP AUTH   WESTON (ROY  F.), INC., WEST^CHESTER,  PA.
AVAIL       JOURNAL  WATER  POLLUTION CONTROL  FEDERATION,  VOL
            43, NO 7, JULY 1971,  P  1890-1901. 3  FIG,  3  TAB,  7
            REF.

TITLE       OPERATIONAL  CONTROL   PROCEDURES  FOR  THE  ACTIVATED
            SLUDGE PROCESS.  PART  III-B.  CALCULATION PROCEDURES
            FOR STEP-FEED  PROCESS RESPONSES.
AUTHOR      WEST, A. W.
CORP AUTH   NATIONAL  FIELD  INVESTIGATIONS CENTER-CINCINNATI,
            OH.
AVAIL       REPORT, 1975.  31 P, 7 FIG,  2  TAB.

TITLE       OPTIMIZATION     OF     THE     ACTIVATED     SLUDGE
            PROCESS-OPTIMUM  VOLUME   RATIO  OF   AERATION   AND
            SEDIMENTATION  VESSELS.
AUTHOR      NAITO, M.; TAKAMATSU, T.; FAN,  L.  T.
CORP AUTH   KANSAS  UNIV.,  LAWRENCE.  DEPT.  OF  CHEMICAL  AND
            PETROLEUM  ENGINEERING;   AND KYOTO  UNIV.  (JAPAN).
            DEPT.
AVAIL       WATER RES,  VOL  3, NO 6, P  433-443,  JUNE 1969.  8
            FIG, 6 REF.

TITLE       OPTIMIZE THE EFFLUENT SYSTEM.  PART 6: BIOCHEMISTRY
            OF ACTIVATED SLUDGE PROCESS.
AUTHOR      GRUTSCH, J.  F.;  MALLATT, R.  C.
CORP AUTH   STANDARD OIL CO. (INDIANA),  CHICAGO,  IL.
AVAIL       HYDROCARBON  PROCESSING,  VOL  55,  NO 8,  P  137-142,
            AUGUST, 1976.  7  FIG,  2 TAB,  15 REF.

TITLE       THE  ORBAL   EXTENDED   AERATION  ACTIVATED   SLUDGE
            PLANT.
AUTHOR      DREWS, R. L.  C.; MALAN,  W.  M.; MEIRING, P.  G.  J. ;
            MOFFATT, B.
CORP AUTH   NATIONAL INST. FOR WATER RESEARCH,  PRETORIA  (SOUTH
            AFRICA).
AVAIL       JOURNAL  WATER  POLLUTION CONTROL  FEDERATION,  VOL
            44, NO 2, FEBRUARY  1972, P 221-231,  6  FIG,  5  TAB,
            4 REF.
                               180

-------
TITLE       ORGANIC   MATTER  REMOVAL  BY  POWDERED   ACTIVATED
            CARBON ADDED TO ACTIVATED  SLUDGE.
AUTHOR      DEWALLE,  F. B.; CHIAN,  E.  S.  K.;  SMALL,  E.  M.
CORP AUTH   ILLINOIS  UNIV. AT  URBANA-CHAMPAIGN.  DEPT.  OF  CIVIL
            ENGINEERING.
AVAIL       JOURNAL  WATER  POLLUTION  CONTROL  FEDERATION,  VOL
            49, NO 4, P 593-599,  APRIL,  1977.  5  FIG, 1 TAB, 19
            REF.

TITLE       OXYGEN-ACTIVATED  SLUDGE PLANT COMPLETES  TWO  YEARS
            OF SUCCESSFUL  OPERATION.
AUTHOR      MCDOWELL, C. S.; GIANELLI, J.
CORP AUTH   AIR PRODUCTS AND CHEMICALS,  INC.,  ALLENTOWN,  PA.
AVAIL       THE   NATIONAL   TECHNICAL   INFORMATION   SERVICE,
            SPRINGFIELD,  VA  22161  AS  PB-272  271,  IN  PAPER
            COPY, IN  MICROFICHE.  REPORT EPA-600/2-77-040,  JULY
            1977. 195 P, 75 FIG,  12 TAB,  9 REF,  2 APPWEND.

TITLE       OXYGEN AERATION AT NEWTON  CREEK.
AUTHOR      NASH,  N.;  KRASNOFF,   P.   J.;  PRESSMAN,  W.   B. ;
            BRENNER,  R. C.
CORP AUTH   NEW  YORK STATE  DEPT.  OF  WATER  RESOURCES,   NEW
            YORK.
AVAIL       JOURNAL  WATER  POLLUTION  CONTROL  FEDERATION,  VOL
            49, NO 3, P 388-400,  MARCH 1977,  4 FIG,  6 TAB,  EPA
            PROJECT  11010  GEV.

TITLE       PHOSPHORUS  REMOVAL  WITH   PICKLE   LIQUOR  IN   AN
            ACTIVATED SLUDGE PLANT.
CORP AUTH   MILWAUKEE SEWERAGE COMMISSION, WIS.
AVAIL       GPO SUP  DOC. $1.25; MICROFICHE FORM  NTIS AS PB-208
            216,  $0.95.  ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION  AGENCY  WATER
            POLLUTION CONTROL  RESEARCH SERIES, MARCH 1971.  143
            P,  25  FIG,   7 TAB,   19   REF.  EPA  PROGRAM  11010
            FLQ—03/71.

TITLE       PHYSICAL  CONDITIONING OF ACTIVATED SLUDGE FLOC.
AUTHOR      PARKER,  DENNY  S.; KAUFMAN,   WARREN J.;  JENKINS,
            DAVID.
CORP AUTH   CALIFORNIA UNIV.,  BERKELEY.
AVAIL       JOURNAL   WATER  POLLUTION  CONTROL  FEDERATION,  VOL
            43, NO  9, P 1817-1833,  SEPTEMBER 1971.  14 FIG,  6
            TAB, 25  REF.

TITLE       PLANT DATA ANALYSIS OF TEMPERATURE SIGNIFICANCE IN
            THE ACTIVATED  SLUDGE  PROCESS.
AUTHOR      LIN, K-C.; HEINKE,  G.  W.
CORP AUTH   NEW BRUNSWICK  UNIV.,  FREDERICKTON.  DEPT.  OF  CIVIL
            ENGINEERING.
                               181

-------
AVAIL       JOURNAL  WATER  POLLUTION  CONTROL  FEDERATION,  VOL
            49, NO 2, P 286-295, FEBRUARY,  1977.  4 FIG,  3 TAB,
            18 REF, 1 APPEND.

TITLE       POLLUTION ABATEMENT  IN A BREWING  FACILITY.
CORP AUTH   ENVIRONMENTAL  PROTECTION AGENCY,  WASHINGTON, . DC,
            TECHNOLOGY TRANSFER  STAFF.
AVAIL       EPA  TECHNOLOGY  TRANSFER  CAPSULE  REPORT  NO.  6,
            (1974). 17 P, 8 FIG, 6 TAB.

TITLE       POLYMER  ADDITION  IMPROVES  WASTE  WATER  TREATMENT
            PROCESS.
AUTHOR      CHURCHILL, R. J.; RYBACKI, R. L.
CORP AUTH   PETROLITE CORP., ST. LOUIS, MO. TRETOLITE DIV.
AVAIL       WATER AND  SEWAGE  WORKS,  REFERENCE  ISSUE, P  10-12,
            14-17, 20, APRIL,  1977. 8 FIG,  2  TAB,  5 REF.

TITLE       PROCESS CONTROL OF ACTIVATED  SLUDGE TREATMENT.
AUTHOR      KERMODE, R. I.; BRETT, R. W.  J.
CORP AUTH   KENTUCKY WATER RESOURCES INST., LEXINGTON.
AVAIL       NTIS AS  PB-227 238  $4.00  IN  PAPER COPY, $1.45  IN
            MICROFICHE. RESEARCH REPORT NO  63, 1973. 88  P,  18
            FIG.   40    REF,    9   TAB.    OWRB(l)   A-040-KY.
            14-31-0001-3517. 14-31-0001-3817.

TITLE       PROCESS  CONTROL  OF ACTIVATED  SLUDGE  TREATMENT,
            PHASE II.
AUTHOR      KERMODE, R. I.; BRETT, R. W.  J.;  PAULT, J. D., JR.
CORP AUTH   KENTUCKY WATER RESOURCES INST., LEXINGTON.
AVAIL       THE   NATIONAL   TECHNICAL   INFORMATION  SERVICE,
            SPRINGFIELD,  VA  22161  AS  PB-240 176,  $4.75  IN
            PAPER COPY,  $2.25 IN MICROFICHE.  RESEARCH  REPORT
            NO.  83,  JANUARY  1975.  87 P,  29   FIG,  14 TAB,  14
            REF. OWRT A-050-KY(1). 14-31-0001-4017.

TITLE       PROCESS  DESIGN   MANUAL   FOR   UPGRADING  EXISTING
            WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANTS.
CORP AUTH   WESTON (ROY F.), INC., WEST CHESTER,  PA
AVAIL       EPA  REGIONAL  OFFICE  TECHNOLOGY  TRANSFER;   IN
            MICROFICHE  FROM  NTIS  AS  PB-214  550  FOR  $1.45.
            ENVIRONMENTAL    PROTECTION   AGENCY,    TECHNOLOGY
            TRANSFER MANUAL,  OCTOBER 1971, 275P.   EPA PROJECT
            17090 GNQ, CONTRACT  14-12-933.

TITLE       PROCESS OPTIMA IN ACTIVATED SLUDGE.
AUTHOR      POLOCSIK, S.; GRIEVES, R. B.: PIPES,  W. 0. JR.
CORP AUTH   ILLINOIS INST. OF  TECH., CHCAGO.
                              182

-------
AVAIL       PROCEEDINGS,  INDUSTRIAL  WASTE  CONFERENCE,  20TH,
            MAY 4, 5,  6,  1965,  PURDUE  UNIVERSITY,  VOL XLIX,  NO
            4,  P   197-209,  JULY  1965.  5  FIG,  1  TAB, 4  REF.
            PUBLIC    HEALTH   SERVICE   TRAINING   GRANT   NO
            5T1ES26-02.

TITLE       PROCESS  STABILITY OF  ACTIVITY  SLUDGE  PROCESSES.
AUTHOR      CHIANG,  C. H.
CORP AUTH   PIRNIE (MALCOLM), INC.,  WHITE  PLAINS,  NY
AVAIL       JOURNAL    OF    THE   ENVIRONMENTAL    ENGINEERING
            DIVISION-ASCE,  VOL  103, NO EE2,  P  259-271,  APRIL,
            1977.  3  FIG,  3  TAB, 2 APPEND.

TITLE       ROLE OF  NITROGEN IN ACTIVATED  SLUDGE  PROCESS.
AUTHOR      WU, Y. C.
CORP AUTH   PITTSBURGH  UNIV.,   PA.    DEPT.   OF   CIVIL   AND
            ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING.
AVAIL       JOURNAL  OF THE  ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING  DIVISION,
            PROCEEDINGS   OF THE   AMERICAN  SOCIETY  OF  CIVIL
            ENGINEERS, VOL   102,  NO  EE5,  PROCEEDINGS  PAPER  NO
            12454, P 897-907, OCTOBER  1976.

TITLE       SECONDARY TREATMENT.
AVAIL       IN:  1977  PUBLIC WORKS  MANUAL  AND  CATALOG  FILE,
            BILLINGS,  C. H. ,  CONNER,   S.  H. , AND  KIRCHER,  J.
            R., EDITORS,  P  D24-D32,  1977.  1  FIG.

TITLE       SETTLING  CHARACTERISTICS  OF  ACTIVATED  SLUDGE  AT
            LOW TEMPERATURE.
AUTHOR      REED,  SHERWOOD
CORP AUTH   COLD   REGIONS   RESEARCH   AND   ENGINEERING   LAB. ,
            HANOVER,  N.H.
AVAIL       NTIS  AS  AD-717   239,  $3.00  IN  PAPER COPY, $0.95 IN
            MICROFICHE.  CRREL  TECHNICAL REPORT 203,  NOV 1970.
            30 P,  17 FIG, 5 TAB,  25 REF.

TITLE       SEWAGE  TREATMENT  WORKS FOR  SMALL  COMMUNITIES—A
            NEED FOR CAREFUL DESIGN AND OPERATION.
AUTHOR      DREWS, R.  J.  L.  C.; DENYSSCHEN,  J.  H.
CORP AUTH   NATIONAL INST.  FOR  WATER RESEARCH,  PRETORIA (SOUTH
            AFRICA).
AVAIL       IN:   WATER   POLLUTION   CONTROL   IN   DEVELOPING
            COUNTRIES.    PROCEEDINGS    OF   THE   INTERNATIONAL
            CONFERENCE HELD AT  BANGKOK,   THAILAND,   FEBRUARY
            1978.  EDITED BY E.A.R.  OUANO, B. M.   LOHANI,  |  N.
            C. THANH.  ASIAN INSTITUTE  OF  TECHNOLOGY, BANGKOK,
            THAILAND (PERGAMON  PRESS IN USA), P 381-397, 1978,
            7  FIG, 1  TAB, 9 REF.
                               183

-------
TITLE

AUTHOR
CORP AUTH

AVAIL
TITLE

AUTHOR
CORP AUTH

AVAIL
TITLE
AUTHOR
CORP AUTH
AVAIL
TITLE
AUTHOR

CORP AUTH

AVAIL
TITLE


CORP AUTH

AVAIL
SHOCK  LOAD  RESPONSE  OF  ACTIVATED   SLUDGE   WITH
CONSTANT RECYCLE SLUDGE CONCENTRATION.
SALEH, M. M.; GAUDY, A. F., JR.
EL-AZHAR  UNIV.,  CAIRO  (EGYPT).  SCHOOL  OF  CIVIL
ENGINEERING.
JOURNAL  WATER POLLUTION  CONTROL  FEDERATION,  VOL
50, NO 4, P  764-774,  APRIL,  1978.  190 FIG, 1  TAB,
11 REF.

SIMPLIFIED   OPTIMIZATION  OF   ACTIVATED  SLUDGE
PROCESS.
GRADY, C. P. L., JR.
PURDUE UNIV.,  LAFAYETTE,  INDIANA,  SCHOOL OF  CIVIL
ENGINEERING.
JOURNAL OF THE ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING  DIVISION,
PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE  AMERICAN  SOCIETY   OF   CIVIL
ENGINEERS, VOL  103,  NO EE3,  PROCEEDINGS  PAPER NO.
12974, P 413-429, JUNE 1977. 3 FIG, 6  TAB,  19 REF.

START-UP OF NEW WASTE WATER TREATMENT  PLANTS.
CAVERLY,  D. S.
ONTARIO WATER RESOURCES COMMISSION, TORONTO
JOURNAL OF THE WATER POLLUTION CONTROL FEDERATION,
VOL 40, NO 4, P 571-580, APRIL 1968.

SYSTEM ALTERNATIVES IN OXYGEN ACTIVATED SLUDGE.
STAMBERG, J.  B. ;  BISHOP,  D.  F. ;  BENNETT,  S.  M. ;
HAIS, A.  B.
DISTRICT  OF   COLUMBIA  DEPT.   OF  ENVIRONMENTAL
SERVICES, WASHINGTON.
THE   NATIONAL   TECHNICAL  INFORMATION   SERVICE,
SPRINGFIELD,  VA  22161,  AS PB-241  310,  $4.25  IN
PAPER  COPY,   $2.25   in MICROFICHE.
PROTECTION   AGENCY,    CINCINNATI,
                                                 ENVIRONMENTAL
                                                 OHIO.   REPORT
EPA-670/2-75-008, APRIL 1975. 59 P, 22 FIG,  7 TAB,
26 REF. 1BB043 ROAP 21-ASR TASK-015 68-01-0162.

TECHNICAL    ASSISTANCE   PROJECT    FORT    COLLNS
WASTEWATER   TREATMENT   FACILITY   FORT    COLLINS,
COLORADO, JANUARY - FEBRUARY, 1973.
ENVIRONMENTAL   PROTECTION  AGENCY,   DENVER,   CO.
REGION VIII.
THE   NATIONAL   TECHNICAL   INFORMATION    SERVICE,
SPRINGFIELD,  VA  22161 AS  PB-255  573,   IN  PAPER
COPY, IN MICROFICHE. REPORT S AND A/TSB  -  22, 1973
25 P, 4 FIG.
                              184

-------
TITLE       TECHNICAL   ASSISTANCE   PROJECT   VAIL   WASTEWATER
            TREATMENT  FACILITY VAIL, COLORADO,  MARCH -  APRIL
            1973.
CORP AUTH   ENVIRONMENTAL   PROTECTION  AGENCY,   DENVER,   CO.
            REGION VIII.
AVAIL       THE   NATIONAL   TECHNICAL  INFORMATION   SERVICE,
            SPRINGFIELD,  VA  22161  AS  PB-255  257,  IN  PAPER
            COPY, IN MICROFICHE. REPORT SA/TSB-21,  1973.  31  P,
            4 FIG, 2 REF.

TITLE       TEMPERATURE   EFFECTS  ON   THE   ACTIVATED   SLUDGE
            PROCESS.
AUTHOR      SAYIGH, B. A.; MALINA, J. F., JR.
CORP AUTH   TEXAS UNIV. AT AUSTIN. DEPT. OF CIVIL ENGINEERING.
AVAIL       JOURNAL WATER POLLUTION  CONTROL FEDERATION,  VOL  50
            NO 4, P 678-687, APRIL,  1978. 13 FIG, 18 REF.

TITLE       TEMPERATURE   EFFECTS  ON  GROWTH  AND   YIELD   OF
            ACTIVATED SLUDGE.
AUTHOR      FRIEDMAN, A. A.; SCHROEDER, E. D.
CORP AUTH   TENNESSEE  TECHNOLOGICAL  UNIV.,  COOKEVILLE.  DEPT.
            OF CIVIL ENGINEERING.
AVAIL       JOURNAL  WATER  POLLUTION CONTROL  FEDERATION, VOL
            44, NO  7,  P  1433-1442,  JULY  1972,  8 FIG, 3  TAB,
            25 REF.

TITLE       TOWARD A MORE MEANINGFUL INDEX OF SLUDGE QUALITY.
AUTHOR      FITCH, B.; KOS, P.
CORP AUTH   CARNEGIE-MELLON UNIV., PITTSBURGH, PA.
AVAIL       JOURNAL  WATER  POLLUTION CONTROL  FEDERATION, VOL
            48,  NO  8,  P  1979-1987,  AUGUST,  1976.   11 FIG,  1
            REF.

TITLE       TRACE ELEMENTS  IN  BIOLOGICAL  WASTE TREATMENT  IWTH
            SPECIFIC   REFERENCE   TO  THE   ACTIVATED   SLUDGE
            PROCESS.
AUTHOR      WOOD, D. K.; TCHOBANOGLOUS, G.
CORP AUTH   CALIFORNIA UNIV., DAVIS.
AVAIL       IN:  PROCEEDINGS  OF   THE  29TH  INDUSTRIAL   WASTE
            CONFERENCE,  MAY  7-9,   1974,  PART   2,   LAFAYETTE,
            INDIANA,  PURDUE UNIVERSITY,  P  648-661.  4 FIG,  6
            TAB, 21 REF.

TITLE       TRICKLING FILTER VERSUS  ACTIVATED  SLUDGE: WHEN  TO
            SELECT EACH PROCESS.
AUTHOR      KINCANNON, D. F.; SHERRARD, J. H.
CORP AUTH   OKLAHOMA STATE  UNIV.,  STILLWATER,  SCHOOL  OF  CIVIL
            ENGINEERING.
                               185

-------
AVAIL       WATER AND SEWAGE WORKS,  VOL  121,  NO 4,  P 32-34, 36
            APRIL 30, 1974.  1 FIG, 4 TAB,  9 REF.

TITLE       UNIFIED BASIS  FOR  BIOLOGICAL TREATMENT  DESIGN AND
            OPERATION.
AUTHOR      LAWRENCE, ALONZO W.: MCCARTY,  PERRY L.
CORP AUTH   STANFORD UNIV.,  CALIF.
AVAIL       JOURNAL,     SANITARY     ENGINEERING     DIVISION,
            PROCEEDINGS  AMERICAN SOCIETY  OF CIVIL  ENGINEERS,
            VOL  96,  NO  SA3,  P  757-778,  JUNE  1970.  4 FIG,  6
            TAB, 48 REF.

TITLE       WASTEWATER     CHARACTERIZATION     AND     PROCESS
            RELIABILITY FOR  POTABLE  WASTEWATER  RECLAMATION.
AUTHOR      PETRASEK, A. C. , JR.
CORP AUTH   DALLAS WATER UTILITIES DEPT.,  TX.
AVAIL       THE   NATIONAL   TECHNICAL   INFORMATION   SERVICE,
            SPRINGFIELD,  VA  22161   AS  PB-274  874,  IN  PAPER
            COPY,   IN   MICROFICHE.    REPORT   EPA-600/2-77-210,
            1977. 124 P, 56  FIG, 22  TAB,  10 REF.

TITLE       WASTEWATER   TREATMENT    DESIGN:    ECONOMICS    AND
            TECHNIQUES, PART I.
AUTHOR      ECKENFELDER, W.  W.,  JR.
CORP AUTH   VANDERBILT UNIV., NASHVILLE,  TENN.
AVAIL       WATER AND  SEWAGE WORKS,  VOL 122,  NO  6, P  63-65,
            JUNE, 1975. 67 FIG,  2 TAB.

TITLE       WASTEWATER TREATMENT DESIGN,  PART II.
AUTHOR      ECKENFELDER, W. W.,  JR.
CORP AUTH   VANDERBILT UNIV., NASHVILLE,  TENN.
AVAIL       WATER AND  SEWAGE WORKS,   VOL  122,  NO 7. P  70, 75,
            JULY, 1975. 2 FIG,  1 TAB, 3  REF.

TITLE       WASTEWATER  TREATMENT  PROBLEMS  AT  NORTH  KANSAS
            CITY, MISSOURI.
AUTHOR      SCHMIDT, P. J.
CORP AVAIL  BLACK AND VEATCH, KANSAS CITY,  MO
AVAIL       JOURNAL  WATER POLLUTION CONTROL  FEDERATION,  VOL
            50, NO 4, P 635-644, APRIL,  1978. 5 FIG, 3 TAB.

TITLE       WATER AND WASTEWATER TREATMENT.
AUTHOR      SCHROEDER, E. D.
CORP AUTH   CALIFORNIA   UNIV.,    DAVIS.   DEPT.    OF    CIVIL
            ENGINEERING.
AVAIL       MCGRAW-HILL, NEW YORK, NY 1977, 370 P.  $3.95.
                              186
                                  U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1980--657-165/0059

-------